How help comes about for Mind Control Victims

PART 2. HOW HELP COMES ABOUT FOR MIND CONTROL VICTIMS

[back]

INTRODUCTION
THE HARVEST OF WEEPING
An overview of what the support team faces
ACCESSING
BOUNDARIES & ROLES
COMMUNICATIONS ISSUES
DENIAL, how to deal with the therapists or ministers
DEPRESSION (initial client complaint)
DETECTION OF MIND-CONTROL
EATING DISORDERS (as an Initial problem, and as a Deeper Issue)
AN INTRODUCTION
WHEN MIND-CONTROL VICTIMS WITH EATING DISORDERS FIRST COME IN CONTACT WITH THERAPISTS
EVALUATION FORMS
PURPOSE & SHORTCOMINGS
SAMPLE QUESTIONS IN AREAS OF INQUIRY
EARLY WORK
FEAR, how to handle
FEAR, what f. issues do victims have? (f. is an initial issue for victims)
PROBLEMS FEAR CREATES:
HOPE
Multiplicity, understanding
Panic attacks, suggestions
Understanding programming
START WITH THE CORRECT ATTITUDES
REMAIN FLEXIBLE
TAKE NOTE OF WHAT TYPE OF VICTIM YOU HAVE
HOW THE MIND CREATES A PROGRAMMED REALITY
THE VICTIMS POWER ENDS WHERE FEAR BEGINS
GIVING THE VICTIM HIS OR HER IDENTITY BACK
TYPICALLY A VICTIM HAS PROGRAMS:
Protection, spiritual
 

When our system first began doing collages as therapy, the third collage we did of our system was this one of the Gems, the Grand Druid Council hierarchy, the daisy chains and the fairy, and yet it was one of the last to be understood. When our deeper alters got done with the collage, our front alters didnt understand what they had done. It took several years to learn what all the pieces in the collage meant. What the picture shows are the deeper workings of the system, which are run by early splits. In the background is a veil. In front of it are gems, and diamonds. There are two kinds of gems. One are the gems which link to the computers, and the other are the diamonds in the rough, the clean slate alters which have yet to be programmed. A diamond in the system (pyramid) acts as a radio crystal to receive direction and energy from Satan. The energy is then distributed via the crystal and the gems to the system. This diamond is encapsulated within a gold womb-shaped crystal.

The gems in the system (ruby, diamond, topaz, onyx, emerald, sapphire, opal, amethyst, obsidian, turquoise, etc.) are linked to the book of Revelations Heavenly City. The 12 gems send out signals according to their color coding, which are then transmitted by the correct color of ribbon to the correct colored coded alters. Their messages, the scripts, are acted out on the stage of life, which is portrayed behind the erect gold or platinum statue (AntiChrist figure). Gold represents divinity in the Illuminati. In front of that is the clock with the hierarchy. The clock is a crystal pyramid representing the pyramid in the middle of the Grand Druid Council (aka Executive Control Board). Its 12 hours are the 12 positions of the Grand Druid Council which link to their 12 job responsibilities or characteristics and the 12 colors. The 13th number is Satans, and it is color coded platinum. The Grand Druid Council like the Knights of the Round Table sit around a circular table. The pyramid is meant to have 13 stairs to it. The daisy chains were used to link our early parts to their master. Our Daddy would make daisy chains for us.

Most people would never suspect something like this being mind-control reinforcement. These daisy chains were delicate and very sensitive to touch. We were not to break or touch the daisy chains. Our internal daisy chains link to small 3 year old child alters. The daisy chains represent soul ties and the artificial programmed love they wanted us to have toward our master. A severe pain in our head, like a hole being drilled into our head, was refrained by the programmers as being a hole for the sun to shine through to raise daisy flowers for Daddy. Flowers are important family links in the programming.. The bud protects a daughter. The root and stem the mother figure. The soil ceremony protects the grandparents, and is grounded in the earth. The Fairy alters are involved in the hour glass and are the creative force within the system. Here Whisper (Tinkerbell figure) sprinkles Star dust on the light side. The yellow brick road, like a whirlwind that pulls the vehicle, leads to divinity, a mother goddess figure. A gold crown rests upon this stone statue. A tree runs through the entire situation. Those who are familiar with the trees in the system, realize that they are used to hang all the programming. The willow and oak roots run through the collage. Although it is somewhat difficult to notice, off to the right side of Satan are 9 chambers, which represent the various chambers on the Cabalistic tree of life. Interconnected bubbles are interconnected worlds and galaxies in the system. The numerous butterflies are a ring of light that lay at the base of the neck.

Page 315
p_cisco.jpg

Page 316
p_daisy.jpg

Page 317 …

The Daisy World (previous page)

We have a special world of devotion to our master called the daisy world. An entire world of alters who love him make up this world. The picture looks some what reminiscent of some of the Fantasia scenes. The unicorn takes us into this magic world. The waterfall cleans our minds of the trauma memories.

A BOXED, SINKING DISCOURAGED SENSE ABOUT LIFE. p_box.jpg (next page 318)

One of the traumas is to take a child, put him in a trunk and dump him into water. The trunk fills up and the child passes out, and then is rescued in the nick of time before it dies. This is a common programming trauma. It is this type of trauma that is attached to programming. Feelings come in all shapes and sizes, and it is O.K. to have feelings. When the system did this an alter wrote, “The way I feel, locked and sinking, red sails in the moonlight.”

The ROLE of a BETA-DELTA TEAM OF ALTERS. p_beta-delta.jpg (overleaf after next page 319)

The hour glass controls the system. Its balance in relation to the clock and compass is crucial. The robots stand in military ranks ready to serve their national leaders. The piano cords at the left are codes for some alters. Maybe the reader will be able to figure out what some of the images mean on their own.

Insert Table of Contents ………………….. 320
Page 321
p_warning.jpg

Page 322 …

INTRODUCTION

WHY should we bother struggling to save victims of mind-control?

Why should we bother with working with victims of mind-control? We can think of a number of excellent reasons. First, if we as a people do not stand up to the World Orders mind-control, then we are giving them a green light, a free ticket to keep on doing it. And if victims of mind-control do not see people wanting to rescue them, then they will not fight the mind-control, and if they do not fig/it they will not get free. Its that simple. Each of us by only trying to rescue one or two persons is opening the door to freedom for all victims of mind-control. Do we want the door left open, or the door to freedom shut? It is our choice.

Second, the person you save from mind-control may have been someone who would have been used in some secret operation to seriously hurt someone else or to seriously damage the fabric of a free society by smuggling guns, or dope or laundering money. By helping victims of mind-control you are making life a better place.

Third, by helping a mind-control victim you will learn who you are, what gifts God has placed within you, how the human mind functions, as well as having your own weaknesses exposed so that they can be worked on. There is nothing more powerful than watching God Almighty answer prayers of desperation with miracles. Bottom line, you will be a better person for helping those who are in such desperate need. Fourth, by learning how the mind-control operates and exhibits itself you will be able to prevent others from infiltration by damage agents, and to prevent parents from unwittingly allowing a day-care center or other institution to program their children. In other words, we will be in a better position to prevent the myriads of harm that come from the wide-spread customs of mind-control. Intellectual awareness of how the mind-control is done is not the total solution, but it does act as a buffer to help us fight this mind-control madness.

We still have much to learn, but we hope to pass on what we have learned to others that we might all make the soonest use of the best help available for mind-control victims. If you know Almighty God, then you know that His strength is perfected in our weakness. He will take our few loaves of understanding, and multiply it.

THE HARVEST OF WEEPING

Be not deceived: God is not mocked: for whatsoever a man soweth, that shall lie also reap. For he that soweth to his flesh shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that soweth to the Spirit shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting.” Galatians 6:7-8

The mind-control that has been carried out secretly in this 20th century on such a vast scale has left us with a harvest of weeping. The children of this dispensation cry after the virtues and the oneness within the family unit. Their hearts have become broken through the lack of knowledge, and instability of not knowing the security of a fathers love. Within this rising generation, many children walk in a famished land where there is no real love. They receive only the remnant of broken homes and relationships, and overworked parents.

When the heart has gone out of the family, broken lives become as fragments of broken glass. For many children feel as though their hearts have been washed away in the silent tears of their incompleteness. Having no voice within the kingdom to say “peace be still they suffer from the scars of emotional abandonment. In bondage they are unable to see their way through the journey of life. Where do they go when they feel theres no place to turn? Who do they talk to, when theres nobody who wants to listen? Who do they lean on when theres no stable foundation?

The Spirit of Darkness soon covers this generation with shattered dreams. In this pool of contamination, parents rise against parents. Brothers and sister become pulled between their loyalties within the family, causing a severing within the heart of the family unit. In the turmoil of confusion and uncertainty comes a brokenness wit hun the hearts of the offspring, which causes the soul to bleed with the emotion of inner loneliness. Through a grieving process, the scars of neglect turn in rebellion, screaming with a voice of PLEASE SOMEBODY LOVE ME.” In planting of a bad harvest, come the reward of “I looked that I should bring forth grapes, but I broughut it forth with wild grapes.” For when the kingdom has fallen and the hedge is gone, the harvest will be overtaken and trodden down. The landscaping and cultivation will be a thing of the past. There will be briers and thorns in the vineyard and the harvest will cease to produce fruit of quality. Woe unto the man thiat has rewarded evil unto his children. As the extortioner is in the land, so the young will turn in sorrow and in anger and know him not. He made me not, he had no understanding, I do not love him. As the children of yesterday and today were overthrown in the wilderness, so will come the weeping for the fathers, for mans glory becomes his shame. Our leaders have planted pain and sorrow, and now we have a harvest of weeping. We think of the countless child victims who waited for the parents to come, who waited for love and acceptance, but were never good enough for the programmers. I want to weep for the humaness that hias been stolen from so many child victims of mind control. I weep for every scream that was never allowed, and for each child that could no longer fight for themself or their own mind. I weep for the silent tears that were not allowed. And I grieve when I think of how grieved Almighity God must be. I grieve that the cycle continues, and that there is no voice for the new cycle of victims, the new generation of victims who are receiving sophisticated high-tech mind-control that has been perfected over centuries and in the Nazi concentration camps, universities, hospitals, labs, and secret underground facilities. This book is meant to be a voice for those victims who have no voice.

But this book is not only concerned about what has been stolen from the victims of mind-control, but also about the sacrifices that sincere therapists and support persons have endured. This next section is written in hopes that it will help therapists in their struggles. We make no claims that this information will work for therapists, we are merely passing on what we have learned from one friend to another friend. Best wishes, and may God bless your work

An overview of what the support team faces

When the victim first comes into therapy it will typically be for some other problem, such as an eating disorder. An astute therapist will notice the clues which signal that mind-control is very probable, & then will follow up. There are four areas of therapy that should not be neglected:

a. safety issues
b. helping the victim get to know themselves,
c. building positives such as love, care, the Word of God into the recovering victims life.
d. dismantling the PDE (the primal dissociative experience), along with the programming foundations.

As a little method to remember these things, we came up with the word S-I-N-C-E-R-E, which stands for Safety, Information, and, Creating positives, Ejecting, erasing, expelling, the PDE & internal computers, R realizing, Emancipation. Each of these areas are essential for success. What do we mean Realizing Emancipation? When we are talking about mind-control, freedom is a state of mind. The victim must free their mind from the control of the world and realize who they are as God intended and planned. It is not enough to erase the bad, one must realize ones identity and birthright in God that was stolen. In fact, as our book points out, a mind-control victim will not let loose of their mind-control unless something better is adopted. We sincerely pray that those victims who want out will find Jesus Christ, and realize the emancipation that is found in Christ Jesus. Let us recap the four essential areas of work. If the victim is not totally SAFE, then very little work of substance will take place, even though the client might display a great healing (which is a cover program.) If the victim, does not get to know who they are, what has happened to them, and what mind-control is all about, they will likely go into denial and leave therapy.

If the programming is not worked on, and dismantled, it will torment the person until they are too beat down and too tormented & intimidated to continue. If the victim is not given positives and positive reasons to live, if they do not experience love, they will not value themselves, and will not be motivated to work through the horrendous work that must be done. They need to have positive worthwhile goals to work toward. This book is not the final word on this subject. This book will give the reader the most indepth look into the therapy of trauma-based mind-control to date. There are only a few therapists who have worked with PDEs. These are dangerous, & it is hard to present the successful techniques on how to break the deeper programming without giving the other side the knowledge on how to prevent such therapeutic work. May God grant the strength & courage you need.

ACCESSING

Before the support team and the victim can work on accessing issues, they need to understand HOW a mind-control slave can be accessed. Allow us to give a summary of some of the more usual methods of accessing, that is making contact with a mind-control slave. (In fact almost all of these were standard methods used on the author.):

MEDIA: access codes/colors/story schemes/pictures in the newspapers, television, Christian television, ads, radio, and news events that are broadcast in all fashions.

PERSON TO PERSON: Eye winks, eye blinks, hand signals, body gestures, clothing, colors, words, karaoke song selections sung, other victims of mind control, taps such as 3 taps, and the arrival of particular persons, ones children, ones boss, ones relatives.

TECHNOLOGICAL: Sounds in morse code, break lights done in code, head light flashes, gunshots in area such as 3 gunshots, blank telephone calls, recorded messages left on answering machine, telephone tones, late calls from master, airplanes flying certain patterns in area, helicopters flying certain patterns, and lights on helicopters.

ITEMS: Keys, business cards, certain tokens or certain bills, letters such as chain letters, colors on cars, statues at sites, signs, houses, and colors on houses, buttons.

SPIRITUAL: Astral projection, telepathy.

(Students can refer to our other books for more information on accessing methods and codes.)

As the casual reader of the above will realize, it is almost impossible for a victim of mind-control to be isolated from being accessed. This is why it is essential to remove the victim from their ordinary environment and get them to a safe place where they are secure and can be worked with, without interference. Up to now, only a handful of victims in history have ever received this, and then only temporarily.

Because it is so difficult to isolate the victim from everything that might be a code, a few knowledgeable sincere therapists have resorted to desensitizing the codes, and putting safety mechanisms that cause the victim to get angry if someone tries to access them, and allows them to block out the codes. However, this is only part of the answer, because if they physically get a hold of an ex-victim, they can traumatize that part of the mind that is resisting the codes and destroy it so that they break the safety mechanisms.

The first step in desensitizing the codes is to look at them with the alters, to go over it consciously and know that it is a trigger. Once the conscious mind knows something is a trigger, it is harder for it to work. Most of the triggers, codes and cues work at the subconscious (or unconscious mind). I write unconscious–because they hit the mind at a very deep level. These codes are not something sitting close to the front of the mind. A skilled victim that is undergoing therapy, may want to play along with the abusers so that the Illuminati do not have a clear idea of where the system is rather than bucking the system cold turkey. Again each situation for each victim is unique & calls for some clever responses. Running from the abusers rather than confronting them when they publicly try to secretly access the victim may send the wrong signal that the victim fears the abusers. The abusers love to see fear; fear only encourages them. Hopefully, the support team can develop their own strategies, without us having to spell it all out, & then having someone mechanically “do it by the book.” As a final note, we encourage readers who want to understand the subject of accessing better to review various related parts in our books. For instance, there is also some information in our twinning article that might be helpful.

BOUNDARIES & ROLES

Because the therapists speak a special language, and are recognized as experts, they have exercised a monopoly on providing information on mind-control. People want to believe that the experts have answers, and therapists have played the part. The public may have underestimated how much they have wanted their image of their therapists to be true, and how reluctant they are to admit the shortcomings of their experts. We are calling for a re-evaluation of the treatment of programmed multiples, and suggesting the formation of support teams to assist programmed multiples in gaining their freedom from mind-control.

Dr. Frank Putnam, one of the most famous psychiatrists who is recognized as an expert by the psychiatric community and who worked as part of the DSM-IV Work Group on Dissociative Disorders, wrote in his book Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, pp. 133-134) “Very few of us have had any formal training in the diagnosis and treatment of MPD. Although some therapists become instant experts upon seeing their first case, most feel that they do not have the skills necessary to treat these patients.”

While having self-doubts about their abilities, the professional therapists have been very resistant to admitting to non-professionals their shortcomings. For instance, in 1995, one of the leading professionals told our co-author, who wanted to share the material of our Vol. 2 and this book with the therapeutic community that “you have absolutely nothing to teach us.” Maybe a good place for all of us to start is with humility and a spirit of teachableness.

It is probably safe to assume that if you are reading this book, you already have the desire to learn. We believe that the climate for learning has changed, and that the initial frosty reception that our material received many years ago will not be repeated by those who are sincerely interested in helping victims. This section contains some valuable suggestions on how to begin working with a programmed multiple. Some therapists/ministers are under the misconception that they do not have to work with “alter personalities” to help these victims of mind-control. What they do not comprehend is that the person they know and see (who is the host alter) IS also only an alter. They generally work under the misperception that the host personality IS the person, and that other alters are “the alters” (which these misguided therapists/ministers perceive as “the problem”). So rather than work with any alters, they work with the host alter. Their misperception, which leads to such unwitting contradictory behavior on the therapists part, would be hilariously funny, if it were not for the gravity of the situation.

Host alters can be extremely resistant in admitting that they are multiples. In fact, rather than argue and debate the issue with host alters, skilled therapists come in the back door, by simply relating matter of fact, what all the other alters have been doing during therapy. The accumulation of evidence over a long period of time will eventually convince the host alter through the back door that they are part of a multiple system. On the flip side, many less visible alters may carry anger toward the host for the host alters denial of their existence. Do not expect straightforward evidence of a transcript of a session where several alters of a multiple appear, or a camcorder tape of a session showing different alters to automatically convince a host alter that he/or she is a multiple. Host alters will often study the available literature about DID (MPD), and will often challenge the therapist to debates to prove to the therapist that they are not a multiple.

Even though the therapist has witnessed the multiplicity, it will be hard to “prove” anything to the doubting host alter. Remember the doubting philosopher who after long thought finally realized “I think, therefore I am”–if a person is emotionally invested in doubting something, the mind has an amazing ability to think up reasons to doubt obvious facts. The support team for a multiple will need to be skilled in getting the multiple to see things via “back door” techniques rather than head-on debates. It is a traditional therapeutic practice to establish contracts with Multiple Systems. Generally, therapists attempt to establish a contract with as many alters as possible. They will endeavor to explain in the language that the child alters understand what is being agreed upon when a contract is negotiated between the child alter and the therapist.

The primary area that the therapist is concerned with is “hurt” by the Multiple to anyone else or the Multiple Systems own body. The American Psychiatric Associations contract reads at one point, “I will not hurt or kill myself or hurt or kill anyone else, internal or external, on purpose or accidently, now or in the future.” The other major area of concern is setting limits regarding the treatment. Traditionally, the therapists have limited the clients time to their help, the number of phone calls they are allowed to make, etc. This works fine for the therapists. However, the therapeutic community is in denial or under its own delusions that it is making significant progress with the programmed multiples that are coming in for therapy. By and large, the therapists are simply working with the front worlds of very deep and complex systems of alters. The cults are continuing their use of essentially all slaves that are undergoing therapy today. The time has come to turn that situation around and get genuine help for these suffering slaves.

The therapist will become the parent image for a mind-control victims alters. Is this good or bad? Should the therapist fight this transference issue? Please understand the dynamics. 99% of the alters in an Illuminati system are child alters. Granted, that some professionals report working with alter systems that they claim are 100% adults, but this only shows the limits of their understanding of their clients alter system.

These child alters have NEVER had a parent. They have had cult figures who oversaw their mind-control. They have had big giant adults in their life who have manipulated and used them, but they have not had a genuine parent. The therapist can and needs to perform the role of a loving parent for these child alters so they can grow to maturity. The intense desire of many therapists/ministers to integrate all alters again shows their limited understanding of the situation. Hopefully this book (along with our other books), by providing the details of what is going on, will encourage relatives and outsiders to have more patience with therapists who are not coming up with instant micro-wave-speed answers.

Most of the heavy programming traumas are done to the victim when they were a child. Obviously, thousands of dissociated pieces of the mind which have had no chance to experience life day-to-day as the host alter(s) has, have had no chance to grow up. Integration of an entire system of child alters who have not grown up is only asking for problems. Integration of the real core with child alters is asking for problems. The overall situation that trauma-based mind-control places the victim and therapist in, is extremely complex and difficult. The victim will transfer their feelings for their abusers to the therapist and support team. What else can they do? As past traumas are uncovered, the victim may even hallucinate during a drug memory abreaction and see the therapist as the programmer.

The therapist may say or wear things that also trigger transference. Depending upon how the various alters handled abuse, may determine how the different alters then act when they perceive the therapist as another abusive person. Again, this presents another reason why support teams are worthwhile.

Traditionally, therapists have set spoken and unspoken limits to the time they will give the victim. Therapists have limited time in two ways, one is the amount of time per week, and the other is the length of treatment that the therapist will devote to the victim before dropping him/her as a client. If the client perceives that the overall treatment time is limited, they will not raise the deeper issues. Because most clients with mind-control only see their therapists for short periods of time, they also can get by with letting the therapist only work on surface issues.

After having interacted with numerous mind-control victims and therapists, the authors of this book have seen firsthand that most therapists do not see a clear picture of what they are dealing with DURING THE THERAPY TIME. Putnam admits in his book Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, (1989, p. 149), “I have discovered, much to my chagrin, that many of my patients are very different out in the world than they appear in my office.” In fact, the real secret sides of their clients are far more profoundly shocking than most therapists up to now have been willing to imagine. The therapists encourage the superficial approach mentioned above, because many of the best professional therapists will not deal with anything except the issues that the host or presenting alter brings up in the therapy session.

In other words, many professional therapists REFUSE to guide the therapy. The client is then double-binded. The client is somehow supposed to know the issues that they are programmed not to know. Its a “patient-diagnose-and-heal-yourself approach”. Amazing result do occur, because the mind doesnt want to face its problems. The mind comes up with superficial solutions, declares itself better and moves on. (Unfortunately, the mind-control continues, only now it is simply better hidden.)

A great deal has been written about how clients sabotage therapy and double-bind their therapists. The books that have covered this subject have not even begun to cover this subject. Books could be written about this. But an even less understood problem, is how the traditional therapeutic methods double-bind the client. The traditional therapeutic/& ministerial methods are double-binding the clients from escaping the mind-control.

For instance within the Christian deliverance approach, if a client fails to get an instant miraculous healing during a deliverance, then they are told they lack faith, and they are told that without faith they cannot heal. In other words, they must deny the problem if they want the solution. Are the therapists (or support teams) willing to put as much effort & attention into the victim as the Illuminati or other programming cult? Except for minor exceptions, therapists have NOT been willing to spend the same amount of time as the cult spends.

The Illuminati have Grande Dames that continue ongoing guidance for the adult slaves. They also are willing to have their best programmers fly in from Europe and other locations to reprogram a slave with the best equipment and technology available. The commitment level by the Illuminati to their slaves has up to now been many times greater than any of the professionals. Dont kid yourself that the slaves dont recognize this. That is why only superficial issues are being dealt with. That is why so many slaves appear to be getting better from the professionals, but the professionals are not being eliminated from practicing.

The original Mother-of-darkness who works as a programming assistant with the head male programmer is putting in trees internally that are designed to last for the entire life of the slave. Thats a long term commitment on the part of the programmers and their programming. The fruit (programs) that are placed upon the trees (which are used as programming file systems), are to last the life of the slave. The slave knows that the fruit has been given his internal worlds for his lifetime.

An example of a healthy productive role the therapist can take would be the following: The therapist assures the mind-control victim that they will have as much commitment to examining and taking off the fruit, as the other side has of keeping the fruit in place. The victim doesnt know what the issues are, so the therapist uses the back-door approach to let the victim learn about themselves. The therapist asks, “What do you think about trees? Would you spend the next week(s) drawing trees, talking to me about trees, and going out and talking to trees. Please journal what you talk to the trees about.” The client may come back and say, “Trees are very important to me. I dont want to talk to anyone about trees. Trees are very sacred to me, and they are deeply rooted in my mind, I am their caretaker?” Then the therapist continues the backdoor exploration, “What do you mean you are their caretaker?” Eventually, the mind begins to unravel. The journaling can be an important vehicle to track the unravelling of the mind.

Due to the heavy infiltration within the therapeutic community, some disinformation has been assimilated into the beliefs of therapists. One of these is that victims of mind control (who they call “survivors”) shouldnt spend time together. Actually victims are able to understand each other and trigger important information. They can be very helpful to each other, once the host alter has done some basic stabilizing.

Another myth that the therapists hold to, is that the therapist will be perceived as a benevolent caretaker by the victim and the Illuminati will be perceived as abusers. Generally, it is quite the opposite. The Illuminati have the ability to give pain, but they have the ability to take it away. The therapist has the ability to give pain, but seldom the ability nor the time to take the pain away. There often is little closure to the mess therapists start, and most victims are very silent about the struggles they go through, in part because they blame themselves for problems. The master or handler is generally seen as a benevolent dictator, a wonderful god, and a friend all rolled up into one. The therapist, in order to maintain their aloof therapeutic role, does not want to be a friend to the victim. They like to stay emotionally distant, perhaps puffing on their pipe. The therapists are still missing an obvious given, which is that most multiple personalities have parents who are multiples.

COMMUNICATIONS ISSUES

Communication issues come in all shapes and sizes. The first that must be dealt with, and which will never fade away, are the issues between the victim and their therapist. The victim and therapist do not start this marathon to communicate at the starting point. They must work hard just to get to where most people begin. This is because the victim has been betrayed by every important person in their life. Trust is the foundation for communication, and before the therapist can establish a shaky trust in the victims mind, little deep communication will occur. The victim must establish internal communication lines. This is equivalent to trying to get a city of people to all like and talk to each other. The answers to how a multiple can communicate with so many diverse people should be used to help society at large. The same answers that multiples have been discovering for their internal work, could help society at large.

Along with developing better internal communication is the task of developing common goals and learning how to control a systems internal switching. Common goals and control over ones switching are major positive steps. Initially, an alter system will not have these. To develop cooperation in switching will also relieve some of the tension that comes from alters competing for the body.

The next area of communication problems is in the area of what alters present themselves when the therapist wants to work, and which alters does the therapist work with. The temptation is to get rid of troublemaking alters, but sometimes the troublemaking alters are the ones the therapists really needs to work with. The standard hour-long therapeutic session does not promote communication with an alter session. Traditionally, alters will appear as the session is closing, perhaps subconsciously hoping that their important appearance will force the therapist to extend the therapy time. Many therapists stick to their time schedules, and simply advise the alter to appear at the next session.

Many opportunities to develop lines of communication are lost due to the limitations of the traditional one hour session. Many alters only show up at special occasions, so a support person who is around the system for long periods of time is in a strategic position to really facilitate some good communication developing. The programmed multiples system will almost overwhelm the therapist when they find out that they have a listening ear. The therapist will have an entire city of people wanting to give their opinions and to voice their concerns. The needs of the alter system are so great, that it is no wonder that many therapists have terminated their clients because they feel overwhelmed at the systems need to be heard. What is breaking is a dam that has held back in silence decades of severe abuse. In the best interest of the overwhelmed therapist and the overwhelmed victim, we suggest support teams deal with programmed multiples, because the issues really demand that much help.

DENIAL, how to deal with the therapists or ministers

A popular question with ministers who have not worked in the area of programmed DIDs is, “Why doesnt God have an instant miracle for these people?” There are many parts to the answer, but before getting into the answer, perhaps these ministers should ask Almighty God why he has not chosen simplistic answers to so many things in life. If a room full of smokers are prayed for by any minister, how many will no longer be smoking in a months time? Smoking is a trivial mild addiction compared to the programmed of a complex programmed multiple. Those ministers who ask this question need to ask themselves if God is so powerful and they know how to pray, why havent they themselves cleared out this nations hospitals.

The traumas that have put people in hospitals are generally mild compared to the programming traumas. While most licensed therapists are in denial that the systematic programming of thousands of infants is going on in this nation, and that SRA exists, if they look at history every element of the programming has been carried out and historically documented. Should we automatically dismiss any suggestion that those in authority may occasionally conspire to obfuscate the truth?

Consider this, most people can barely make it through the day at work without engaging in what are effectively low grade conspiracies. Perhaps they tacitly agree with another coworker not to report the co-workers misbehavior to the boss. So why should we expect things to be different in the corridors of power? (addresses and locations) and think to ourselves how many millions of people are practicing witchcraft today–doesnt it seem incredible that the FBI doesnt believe any of these witches are capable of killing someone for their religious beliefs. Christians, Moslems, and Jews are capable of killing for their religious beliefs, but somehow the FBI thinks witches are incapable? Doesnt that smack of a cover-up?

The victim doesnt have time to deal with bull-headed counselors who are in denial. The denial could be a sign that the therapist are mixed up in the world-wide satanic conspiracy him or herself. The victim should not try to convince the therapist about what is happening, the victim should find a listening ear, and take their needs for help somewhere where they will get real attention. Every major and most minor religious group in history have had members that have killed other humans. And yet the FBI officially claims that SRA doesnt exist. If we look at the list of thousands of covens (and our co-author Fritz has many of their

DEPRESSION (initial client complaint)

Depression is mentioned, because the original complaint of many victims of total mind-control is a depression that they cant figure out. Depression comes in different types. What the therapist wants to identify is a. what kind of depression is occurring and b. what are the causes of the depression and c. what kind of treatment modalities can be applied.

Often depression will be experienced as a feeling of defeat, or a feeling of a loss, or a feeling of no hope. Sometimes depression is a symptom of programming going off of a total mind-controlled slave. If this is the case, unless the client is well into therapy for his or her DID (MPD), the client will rarely have a clue about the real source. Some drugs have the effect or side-effect of causing depression. These include codeine, high-blood pressure medicines, indomethacin, steroids, and tranquilizers. The client should mention what medicine they are taking, and the side-effects of these noticed.

Sometimes clients with depression can get involved in physical activities and get involved with others and this will clear up a depression. Sometimes clients can determine the underlying spiritual problems and significantly help their depression by working on root spiritual problems or doing a deliverance. A few proper questions will soon discover if there are root spiritual problems causing the depression.

If the person had a breakdown of communication with their parents, this will eventually, if not corrected, lead to open rebellion, and then several steps later this will lead to a suicidal depression. The original sequence of events was created by the lack of trustworthy communication by the persons parents and needs to be addressed at that level to pull it out by the roots.

Sometimes depression is simply a reaction to a sad event. This is not likely to cause someone to come to a therapist, but such a triggering event should be ruled out if other causes are to be treated. One of the most effective ways of dealing with depression is to realize how it is a lack of faith and a selfish self-focus and a sin toward God, who will provide just what we need in life. If the client is open to seeing that depression is a sin, then this sin can be confessed, and all spirits attached to it delivered from the person.

If the client is a total mind-controlled slave, the front alters may get some relief from such a miniature deliverance, but will still need to address the deeper problems. The therapist can administer to the client a dissociation test, to determine if the client may have been a candidate for total mind-control. If the client tests positive, then the therapist will need to do follow up work. Causes for this depression may be very deep rooted & take some serious long term investigation and work. The therapist can also serve in the role of listener. If the client gets some of his pent-up emotions & problems out, he may feel some relief. If the client sees that someone cares, that can also have a positive effect. The client can also be encouraged to talk about the situation to another trusted person. The therapist will want to find out what kind of support system (team) can be used to help the client.

depression.jpg

DETECTION OF MIND-CONTROL

The therapist, the victim and others have several avenues they can use to detect mind-control. One avenue in diagnosing mind-control which has not been touched upon by the professional psychiatric literature is to look at the subjects role in life. The reason that the professional literature is unable to discuss this avenue, is because the professionals have had very little understanding about how the World Order is constructed and ran. In fact we were thankful that God brought into our life, one of the few outsiders that had a grasp of how the Illuminati controls the world.

An understanding of how the Illuminati uses front organizations, what those organizations are, how they interlock, and how control over the various sectors of life is managed by the Illuminati would greatly help therapists identify people who have to be Illuminati members. It is an extremely high chance that Illuminati members are multiples, and an even higher chance that they are under some form of mind-control. Even John DuPont, who recently was head of the DuPont family, was plagued by implants.

To identify people under mind-control see if they are people with specialized training. Next, identify if they are in a highly structured job, where there is no room for grey–everything is black or white. Multiples do very well in positions that call for black or white, structured thinking. Look for educators in principal positions, reform schools, catholic and military schools, boy and girl schools. These are places that the Illuminati control in order to use them for auxiliary programming centers.

Many of your porn stars, some of your movie actors, almost all of your brain surgeons, some of your CPAs, many of your politicians, all of your CIA field agents, and most of your religious leaders are under trauma-based mind-control. If you actually have the subject come in for an interview, ask questions about the persons personal history. The host alters of multiples have some very typical methods of handling personal history questions. Dont expect the host to make it easy for you to determine that they are a multiple. What you can expect is that you will have a difficult time with most multiples of getting a coherent history of their life. You may discover contradictory information in what they tell you.

For instance, one multiple that we interviewed said his father was a. a nazi submarine captain, b. a jewish scientist that worked on the Montauk project from 1941 onwards. The information was obviously contradictory and contradicted what his ex-wife said about his father. The personal history contradictions of many multiples wont be this dramatic, but they might be.

When the host personality remembers the details of their life they may say, “they tell me that… Frequently, a person wont remember if a detail happened before or after another event in their childhood. If you find chronological problems and frequent inconsistencies, then you can highly suspect DID. But you must continue. The MPD really is apparent, when there are lots of specific differences between the therapist and the subject in how they remember what the client has said. The different episodes are hard for the multiple to remember although they are confident of their perception of the event. The dissociative thinking makes it very difficult for the multiple to see the differences, and they will be very convinced that the therapist is trying to deceive them. The experience can be frustrating for both parties, but it is one more red flag that indicates that mind-control is likely present.

Multiples will frequently explain their lack of detailed memories on having a “poor memory”. They will often say, “I dont remember”, which is truthful, and is better than the occasional situation where some multiples try to invent something to say to hide their lack of personal information, or to placate the wishes of the interviewer. They are also great at saying nothing but sounding like they have said something, and another trick multiples have is saying something that appears to be one thing but is another. Some multiples have figured out their multiplicity, but are secret about it, in fear that others will think that they are crazy.

Over the years, probably many more times than not the professional psychiatrists and psychologists have misdiagnosed MPD. Some of their favorite disorders to use when misdiagnosing are: Adjustment, Affective, Anxiety, Bi-Polar Affective, Borderline, Drug Abuse, Eating, Histronic, Organic Mental, Paranoid Schizophrenia, PTS, Psychosis, Schizoaffective, Somatization, and Transient Amnesia.

When multiples takes an MMPI, they have historically answered the same way a schizophrenic answers on items 156 & 251. (At least 3 studies have documented this.) These two questions elevate the Sc scale which has been taken to indicate schizophrenia. Some of the tipoffs that a person is misdiagnosed in a mental hospital is that they interact a lot with the staff, but have erratic behavior, that generally leads to the staff being upset. They may be responsible for a while and then surprise everyone by not being able to function or handle a responsibility.

Typical questions that help the therapist expose the programmed DID include questions about whether their school grades were erratic, whether they have gaps in their memories of school days, if they remember getting test results on tests that they dont remember taking, and a grade-by-grade year-by-year history of their life. Bear in mind, that the programmers are trying to fine-tune the programming by layering in cover memories. Still an experienced therapist should be able to see through the shallowness and the confusion of cover memories.

Mind-control comes in many appearances. With the more recent victims, implants are being used to distract victims from realizing their DID (MPD). The detection of MPD (DID) underneath the incessant manipulations and voices of the implants is a challenge. The “noise” created by the implants is a strong dissociating mechanism.

There are strong natural defenses of the mind that the programmers count on to keep the mind-control hidden. For instance, the victim has been bonded to the programmer/master. To admit mind-control is to experience abandonment, and even death (because many alters self-identity is wrapped up with the perpetrator.) It is not easy to kill oneself, which is often the minds perception of what admitting mind-control is.

Detection of trauma-based mind-control by the therapist will usually encounter strong denial mechanisms by the victim. The therapist should ask about flashbacks. If the client reports flashbacks that are not drug-related flashbacks that is a good sign that MPD may be present. However, most flashbacks do not begin surfacing until the programming and dissociation begins crumbling. Some undetected adult victims of mind-control, when they are having sex with their spouses get intrusive flashbacks and images that scare them. This is another red-flag that the person may be a victim of mind-control.

Victims of mind-control will often have all kinds of issues around relationships and sex. Another red flag is when a person reports abilities or information that they have no idea where it has come from. For instance, all of a sudden one day they could understand someone speaking German, or all of a sudden they got the words to a song, or all of a sudden they just intuitively knew how to play a piano, etc.

The opposite of this also hits DID mind-control victims. They may have an ability that somehow strangely disappears. It takes time to realize that these are co-conscious alters. Victims of mind-control have great survival mechanisms. They are experts at changing the conversation to hide what they dont want to talk about. If the therapist has the skill at being gently but firmly assertive in getting what they want, the ability to be gently persistent can pay off.

The therapist needs to become acquainted with detecting alter switches. This involves eye shape changes, eye color changes, eye movement changes, blinks, body posture changes, voice pitch changes, word usage changes, perception and value changes, mood changes, etc. Upon detection of this, the therapist may gently ask, “Do you ever feel that there is another part of yourself that comes out and does things that you would not do?” “Do you ever feel that when you are alone, someone else or some other part of you is watching you?”  Any answer except a definite “no” is a red flag, that reconfirms the switching clues, and other clues that the therapist has assembled. Not all victims of mind-control have extensive alter systems. In our previous books, we have covered situations when this does not occur.

Another way that therapists can determine mind-control would be to interview people close to the victim, and to visit the victims work place and home. Some victims of mind-control surround themselves with objects that pertain to their programming. For instance, the therapist may find a man who has a passion for Mickey Mouse objects, or a woman who loves white rabbit figurines or star trek objects.

EATING DISORDERS (as an Initial problem, and as a Deeper Issue)

AN INTRODUCTION

Eating disorders exhibit themselves as initial problems for victims coming in for therapy. For instance, they may find themselves having an irresistible urge to overeating followed by vomiting or purging, or they may be starving themselves, or have phobias around certain foods.

Eating disorders also may develop as problems as the system of alters work through their memories and programming. These eating problems do have the possibility of becoming life-threatening. Many victims of mind-control suffer from eating disorders. There are certainly many factors which cause mind-control victims eating disorders. The more difficult disorders which resist treatment are often created by multiple factors. This section will make an attempt to provide the therapist some of important factors behind eating disorders of mind-control victims.

Eating disorders are not limited to victims of mind-control. However, many individuals who are referred or on their own come in to therapists for bulimia or anorexia, are actually suffering from the severe effects of trauma-based total mind-control. For some therapists, the first primary complaint of mind-control victims will be their eating disorder. They will be totally oblivious that anything else could be wrong. Researchers who like to work with statistics have noticed that there is a high incidence of people with eating disorders who have problems with abuse, depression, and self-identity. Since mind-control will bring with it abuse, depression and self-identity problems it is a given that the mind-control victim will have some eating problems at some level of their being.

Modern American culture as well as many of the slave handlers are obsessed with females being thin. The pressure that females feel from society and their handlers that they are “a “dog” unless they….” makes many slaves identify thinness with overcoming their self-esteem problems. Unfortunately, if the host pursues starvation thinking that it will overcome low-self esteem, they almost always are disappointed that it doesnt help, and if anything, starvation, only exacerbates the original low self-esteem. On the flip side, in order for the host alter to feel that she has some control over just one thing in her life, she may resort to starving herself to regain some sense of power over her own body.

When striving for freedom, the mind may think that starvation gives at least a fraction of power over their body, after it has been stripped of choice, beaten, and raped, and electroshocked. One reason why some bulimics and anorexics have eating disorders is that they have difficulty identifying their feelings, and have little confidence in their ability in relationships. They feel they must do the right thing to avoid disapproval and rejection. They have an artificial idealized image of what they should be. For instance, one teenage girl was frightened that she was changing from a girl to a woman. Others due to their abuse have a hatred of their body, as well as a fear. There are some young altars that may not want to have breasts and hips. Another person felt that they were naughty if they ate, and she became increasingly disgusted with herself as she ate.

WHEN MIND-CONTROL VICTIMS WITH EATING DISORDERS FIRST COME IN CONTACT WITH THERAPISTS

One way victims come in to therapy is that they are referred by someone for their eating disorder. Anyone who gets a referral should explain clearly why the person is in for a consultation. If the client is living at home, it goes almost without saying that the support team should explore with the client the possibility of someone supportive from the family participating in the consultation phase of things, so that a more complete evaluation can be obtained.

Another frequent scenario is when a female mind-control victim is raped during the normal course of life and it triggers their mind to remember previous sexual trauma. This may kick off an eating disorder, which may drive the person to come in for therapy. Because the problem is not really an eating disorder, the person doesnt have a clue as to what they are stepping into by asking for therapy.

If someone is trying to trick a person into coming in for treatment, experience shows the tricking will quite consistently backfire in the long run. Rather, than scheming behind the victims back, the therapist should see if there are good support groups in the area. After the victim or the victim & their family experience a support group, they are often more willing to come into therapy. Depending on the situation, getting the victim in to work on their eating disorder may even be perceived by the slaves handler as a positive, rather than a threat to his control, because it may be helping to stabilize a problem within the slave. The patient with an eating disorder is often going to be resistant, embarrassed, and apprehensive. The therapist can establish rapport by being warm, acceptable, honest, empathetic, and interested. Different people will click with different therapists, for instance, teenage girls often prefer female therapists.

This is where teams are beneficial, where one person can act more as a consultant, which the therapist who has rapport can deal with the person on a longer basis. (Therapists can establish report by using the language of the person, mirroring where they are at, etc.) If the therapist is going to try dealing with only the eating disorder, there are several approaches that can be taken. However, whichever path the therapist goes down, it would be advisable to gather an understanding of what is going on. Whether it is bulimia or anorexia, the therapist will ask the person to describe their eating patterns both during the week and the weekend.

There are ways to get information from people which use the “back-door” so-to-speak. For instance, if the person has been referred for binge eating but wont openly discuss it, the therapist might ask, “When people go on a diet to lose weight, they sometimes feel so hungry that they are tempted to eat a whole lot. Have you experienced that?” If the person is not forthcoming about vomiting, a gentle back-door approach might be, “Have you ever tried to lose weight by any other means?” It is important to track the details around the episodes–such as how often, when, the most common times they occur, how long they last and the types and amounts of food eaten. It is also important to note what thoughts and feelings were attached to the various episodes. Dont be surprised if the person doesnt say, “I dont know why I did it.”

The therapist can ask, “How do you view that particular food?” It could be that the cool-aid triggers the mind to think of blood. It could be that raw meat triggers the persons mind to think of sacrifices. It could be that certain smells relate to certain traumas. Vomiting may have a cleansing effect on the mind of person coming in for therapy.

The therapist may also ask the person about their thoughts and feelings related to sex, and whether they are interested in sex. This may provide some significant clues as to what one is really dealing with.

What is the image of the person concerning her or his body? Later, as one deals with more than the host personality, this will continue to be an issue. With initial clients suffering mind-control, the therapist will need to ask the full range of questions, such as asking about symptoms of depression, low motivation, panic attacks, sleep problems, feelings of suicide and hopelessness, and feelings of being trapped or worthless. The full range of initial intake questions will need to be dealt with such as levels of dissociation, compulsive behaviors, addictions, psychotic thoughts, etc. Therapists can save time if they want by using some of the standard evaluations that other professionals have developed for interviews. For eating disorders there are for instance:

Garner & Garfunkels Eating Attitudes Test,
Johnsons Diagnostic Survey for Eating Disorders
Structure Clinical Interview according to the DSMs section on eating disorders. Therapists may also want to use such interviews as
Diagnostic Interview Schedule for Children by Costello et. al.
Becks Depression Inventory

It almost goes without saying that Eating Disorders come from a complex array of factors, including such possible problems like structural brain illness, an infection, or endocrine malfunction. It is not possible for this book to provide detailed information on these other possible causes. The therapist needs to get a feel for what is happening, for what the therapist is qualified to do, and if need be, get the client to someone who specializes in what the client needs help in. What this section can help with is in providing insights into eating disorders as they relate to mind-control victims, and their programming, their programming-traumas, memories, and the general side-effects of a life-time of abuse.

EVALUATION FORMS

PURPOSE & SHORTCOMINGS

Evaluation forms are nice crutches in some situations. In a formal therapeutic situation where time is of the essense, forms can be given that will decrease the time that the therapist needs to begin gaining a feel about the new clients situation. We have provided an excellent form on the next page that will take approximately 5 minutes to fill out. It is a non-threatening “Getting to Know You Better” form, which can help lead into deeper discussions. The therapist could make a cup of tea for the client while the new client fills it out. Another way that forms might help is where a non-professional counsellor or friend is trying to get some better clues as to what the subjects problems are. Another benefit of forms is that it desensitizes questions that otherwise might make the subject feel defensive, because the subjects mind can see that the question is simply a standard question on a standard form, and not a personal attack.

In dynamic counselling sessions, a good therapist will be sensing and asking questions in a dynamic manner that is responding to the cues and clues that the subject is providing. Obviously, the dynamic approach when done by an experienced person who knows what he is looking for is much quicker, much more appropriate, and better tailored for the victims situation. If you were interrogating a P.O.W. which would be more effective? to go by a list of questions in a book, or to ask questions in a dialogue between the interogator and P.O.W.? Likewise, an interview on television by Barbara Walters will be well thought out, but will still have an element of dynamic interaction. Likewise, there is no substitute for a live dialogue between a therapist and their new client. In a dynamic evaluations, the entire procedure is a skill. However, there are several areas that will be probed.

NAME ___________________________________________________

Address ___________________________________________________

Fill in circle on items that pertain to you

o Abused as a child
o Adopted
o A failure
o Anxiety attacks
o Army brat
o Auto accident
o Bad habits
o Black & white thinking
o Blackouts
o Class President
o Compulsive activities & behaviors
o Depressed
o ESP
o Erotic dancer
o Ex-member of a cult
o Extrovert
o Feelings of being choked
o Feelings of being isolated
o Forgetful
o Flashbacks
o Genius in family
o Good grades in school
o Great faith in God
o Have a twin
o Have an imaginary playmate
o Have several close non-sexual friends of the opposite sex.
o Headaches
o Inability to believe in God
o Insomnia
o Intelligent
o Interest in the occult
o Irrational anger
o Knew what you were going to be as a child
o Little trust in other people
o Love Disney movies
o Love Star Wars
o Love to collect (or hoard)
o Loving
o Minister for a father (or mother)
o Moody
o Multiple Sclerosis
o Never dishonest
o Nightmares
o Panic attacks
o Participant in a religion
o Perfect father
o Phobias
o Physically attacked
o Premature sexual development
o Restlessness
o Rich parents
o Secretive
o Serious Health problems
o Single
o Skipped school
o Strange clothes in closet
o Strange pains with no explanation
o Strange voices
o Sudden attitude changes
o Supernatural experiences
o Tonsillectomy, emergency
o Tried narcotics
o Trouble learning in school
o UFO abductions
o Unable to enjoy sex
o Unexplainable things in personal life
o Visions
o Very vigilant
o Work for the Government

SAMPLE QUESTIONS IN AREAS OF INQUIRY

For instance,

  •  “Have you ever lost time?” The counsellor is careful not to define time, and will see how many examples the person provides. If the person doesnt provide examples, the counsellor might say,
  • “By losing time I mean to look at the clock at 9 oclock and the next thing you realize is that its 4 oclock.”

During periods of boredom or extreme concentration most people will lose track of time, but in the case of multiples they often have frequent lost periods of time. However, we want to remind the reader that back-up amnesia (you forget that you forgot) will cover much of the time lost.

  •  “Do you remember calling yourself other names or having other people call you other names?”

Another area that can be probed are questions around depersonalization and derealization, such as

  • “Have you ever had the feeling you were looking at someone else in your place [or at yourself from a distance]?”

Another area is to ask specific questions about their family history, such as

  •  “Tell me about the first five years of your life, the significant things you remember such as your home life, your friends, your relatives, and starting to school. Be very thorough and give examples of how you interacted with the important people in your life.”

This is to determine how fragmented their memories are. The Illuminati are trying to give people cover memories but these cover histories are still not as tight and real as most peoples.

 “When do your memories become continous?”

Inquiries can be made to see if the person has been connected to any of the groups who were exposed in Vol. 2 or any of the bloodlines exposed in Vol. 1.

  • “Did anyone in your family ever belong to a government agency, or the Freemasons?”
  • “Do you know your familys background or genealogy?”
  • “Do you sometimes hear voices in your head, or does someone answer you when you talk out loud when alone?” Such questions are so direct that the host alter may deflect them, rather than open up.
  • “Are there certain times of the year which feel unsafe for you?”

EARLY WORK

Some of the better therapists, when they suspect MPD, like to make their initial question and answer session lengthy, in order to wear the host alter down and make switching a sure thing. An alter system can prevent switching over a short period, but over a several hour session, the skilled therapist will work with the system enough that switches will begin to occur. After getting some history from the client, the skilled therapist can teach the client how to put memories on a screen and then can go back to a significant early point in the persons life and begin working dynamically with the event.

FEAR, how to handle

Fear can be triggered by senses, such as smelling smoke. There is a powerful spiritual dimension that works with the mental dynamics. Thoughts are powerful things, if thoughts of fear are allowed to take root they will grow and spread. The spirit of Fear paralyzes many victims and many support team members from dealing with what needs to be done. Fear can be compared to dandelions in a yard, they spring up everywhere and they are so hard to weed out and to dig up by the roots. Fear clouds the mind of person, so that the higher areas of thinking shut down. Before long, the victim of fear is making unwise decisions and becoming a wimp.

One of the best reasons for a person to dump their fear is that the enemy watches for fear and tries to give exactly that thing that the person fears. The fear becomes a magnet attacting the very thing that the fearful person is dreading. (The abusers are trained to key in & identify fears.) The Spirit of the Lord brings boldness and a sound mind (cf. 2 TIM 1:7), but the Spirit of Fear brings a curse. Fear has at its foundation, the preservation of life. But we are warned in scripture that if we attempt to save our life we will lose it, but if we give to God what we can not keep to gain what we cannot lose, then we have made a wise choice. In other words, fear has at its foundation death.

The ancient wisdom of Prov. 18:2 1 says, “Death and life are in the power of the tongue; and they that love it shall eat the fruit thereof.” Some people choose death and call in the spirits that support an agenda of death. Fear is on that death team. Fear creates a mental bondage. Fear is often the underlying reason behind many of our bondages, such as cigarettes, drugs, overeating, and stealing. People think, “If I dont do this, then such and such will happen to me.” “If I dont steal, Ill starve.” “If I dont do drugs, I wont be able to mellow out and face life.” “If I dont smoke cigarettes, I wont stay calm and thin.”

Secular therapists do not want to hear that fear is a spiritual problem. But recognition that it is a spiritual problem is important, because the answers to fear which is hope and trust are spiritual answers. What gave the shepherd boy David the courage to face Goliath without fear? Was it because he was hypnotically worked on by a therapist? Did he visualize and through self-hypnosis convince himself that he could beat Goliath? No, he defeated Goliath because he had a spiritual reason to confront Goliath, “…For who is this uncircumcised Philistine, that he should defy the armies of the living God.” 2 SAM 17:26

The cold hard facts of the matter is that Fear is a lack of trust in God. God certainly cuts us a great deal of slack. But if you are “in Christ” you are in His protection, and He has promised that “I will never leave or forsake you.” HEB 13:5 Doubts about God lead to fears. Because fear is a lack of faith, Fear opens a portal, a legal foothold for Satan to bring what we fear into our life. God must respect this free will choice on our part to doubt His grace. God can spiritually protect us, but when we fear, we remove by our own free will Gods protection because we have called into question His Word.

We can see this spiritual law working clear back in the oldest book of the Bible, Job 3:5, “For the thing which I greatly feared is come upon me, and that which I was afraid of is come unto me.” When Job feared, Satan used that to go before God and petition for the right to torment Job in those ways. God was only respecting Jobs freedom of choice, when He allowed Satan to torment Job. But God did turn that negative into a positive, because even though Job had some fear, he was a righteous man. Each person must resolve not to be in bondage to fear again. It is one thing to be have foresights and concerns, but when we speak of fear, we are speaking of when the survival part of the brain clicks in, and the higher parts of the brain start shutting down. Understanding how deeply God wants to help us, the magnitude of His abilities & promises to help us, will help us refuse the Spirit of Fear.

FEAR, what f. issues do victims have? (f. is an initial issue for victims)

Traumas are applied as a base to lay in the programming. They work because of the victims fear. The more types of programming, the more types of fear. Victims, who have the older programming or excessive programming will exhibit more phobias than the normal person. Victims of mind-control will, for instance, often fear water (drowning tortures), heights (torture over cliffs, & down wells), fire (fire tortures & traumas), noises (from programming tortures), black birds (from their programming significance), red kool-aid (from ritual programming events), etc. The victim must also fear their abusers.

These fears concern issues such as: being reaccessed, being reprogrammed, receiving a traitors death, losing someone close as punishment, being publicly defamed & losing their occupation. The victim will quite often fear losing the approval or “love” of the abuser if he/she faces the truth about the abuse. The victim will also fear their own mind: the fear of the unknown, the fear of knowing the truth, the fear that they wont differentiate between tricks, cover programs, false memories laid in by programming and what actually happened, and the fear of the never ending pain.

The victims alters who want to move toward health will fear the internal programs, the mazes, the vortices, the traps in the mind, as well as alters who are abusive to the body & alters who have internalized the roles of the abusers, such as judge alters. The victim will also fear the heavy demonization that controls their lives, as well as experiencing the heavy fears that the demons instill within them. The victim will fear their support team, because they have only experienced betrayal from their past significant people. The victim will fear that he will not be believed, that he will not be loved, that he will express too much fear, anger, or strange happenings and be rejected. He may even fear that the therapist will lock him up if the truth comes out.

Because of the way a system of alters is created, the front alters may be able to dissociate from some of these fears, & put on a very good front. Once the therapist scratches below the surface, he will uncover lots of unresolved issues & tidal waves of fear that roll through a system of alters. Many victims of mind-control fear there is no hope. This fear incapacitates them. This fear has been developed in the victims mind by programming scenarios where the Network makes the slave feel they are always being watched, and that any thought or action of betrayal will be immediately known by the abusers.

FEAR robs the victim of moving toward freedom, working on issues, learning from their internal world, working with their support team in a positive manner, and of enjoying life. Perhaps the largest thing FEAR robs from victims is HOPE. While God & His perfect love cast out fear, fear has a way of driving away the work of God in a persons life, incl. an unhealthy fear of God. Fear is the opposite of faith & trust in God. To deny ones problems does not equal faith. Neither fear of problems, nor denial of problems is faith. Both are a lack of faith. Faith means to believe that there are answers and to continue pressing on until answers arrive or are discovered. Faith is directly connected to our trust that God is good and will reward good things to His creation. God will prove Himself to those who trust Him. “Oh, taste the Lord and know that He is good.” In the previous article fear was dealt with as a spiritual issue, which it is primarily. However, it can be treated from other angles too. For instance, the book Kicking the Fear Habit by Manuel J. Smith (Dial Press, NY:NY, 1977) treats fear as a Behavior Mod, problem.

1. ASSOCIATIONS with BAD MEMORIES (TRIGGERS) which could include fear of: water, heights, fire, noises, animals, foods.

2. Things the ABUSERS might do, which could include the fear of: rejection, reprisals, reaccessing, and reprogramming.

3. Things the VICTIM will do to him or her self, which could include: falling into internal mind—-traps, failing to get the truth, finding out the truth, never getting rid of the pain or guilt, having to be subjected to demons, having to go into the unknown.

4. the SUPERNATURAL, which could include: Almighty God, demons, aliens, & what they consider to be their destiny.

5. the FUTURE, which could include: the coming New World Order, that there is no hope, that there are no answers, & the fear of an alien takeover.

6. the SUPPORT TEAM, which could include: the fear of not being believed, the fear of not being understood in the complexity of a programmed multiple, the fear of betrayal, the fear of rejection, and the
fear of hurting others.

PROBLEMS FEAR CREATES:

1. INCAPACITATES the Victim to work on issues.

2. MAKES IT DIFFICULT for the support team.

3. ROBS the victim of the joys and pleasures of life.

FEAR interlocks with many other issues that will be discussed in this book. It is a pervasive problem that interlocks with many other issues. It is not a single issue that can be easily cast out like a trick knot that can be undone by a clever pull, but is a serious series of emotional knots that will take persistent undoing. There are so many fear issues, that this is one reason it is imperative to get the victim to a safe place to reduce their fears to a working level. Along that line, a safe place is best which has the minimum of fear triggers in their life. Sometimes it is helpful for clients to understand the dynamics of fear. There are fear reduc-tion therapies that can be applied to specific phobias which may allow the victim to function freer.

HOPE

“How can I get better?” Its the common question. Even deeper is the question, “Can I get better?” There are plenty of people who are willing to offer false hopes. If we are to discuss HOPE, we must also be willing to be honest and frank, and not offer placebos. Victims of mind-control have been lied to enough, they dont need to be given false hopes.

There are two types of mind-control victims, those who have their humanness totally snuffed out and are simply robots that function in order to survive, and those who have a tiny spark of their original life still tucked away somewhere within themselves. For us that tiny spark or original humanness would show itself when we secretly prayed to God that he would save the victims we were assigned to program.

We gave tiny mustard seeds to those that we helped program in hopes that that mustard seed of faith would free them some day. We tried to weaken the programming with those who were strong minded enough to possibly break free someday. We did our job, but quietly within us, was still a spark of humanness (or one can also call it hope). It is that spark of hope that the Illuminati try so hard to snatch. If they can accomplish killing that residual spark of hope, then they will work hard to keep their victim alive, because they know that they now have a robot.

The humanness (the hope) has died, or at best is totally apathetic. The child himself becomes apathetic, and quits looking for hope. It only functions in order to survive. In our experience in the Illuminati, there is no doubt that God was there with some children. Most everyone is aware that Jesus Christ came to destroy the works of the devil (1 JN 3:18). Our life is testimony that the power of Christ to perform miracles is not dead, no matter how much the Illuminati scoff at it. With some children it seemed God had drawn a line, and Satan could not go past that line. Some child victims had as much as three God-given guardian angels. God has kept a spark of hope alive in some of the mind-control victims out there, in spite of the incredible amount of sophisticated torture and mind-control that they have had to endure.

Our system would define hope for a mind-control victim this way: hope is when a piece of the child has not sold out to the Illuminati. God will take that piece and even though the victim is in darkness, God will take that spark of life and He will work with it. If there is any light, God is in a position to raise that light up. When God brings a person into a victims life who sincerely cares, and loves and is committed to helping the victim, somehow an appreciation for that love and commitment reaches down deep into the persons mind, and helps that spark of hope grow into a flame. Even though the victim does not understand what is happening, they will grab ahold of that help with a strangle hold.

The person who wants to help can encourage the victim to tap into that survivor instinct, that strength that they have to survive, that survivor spirit that they had to have to endure the brutal trauma-based mind-control, and apply that spirit of survival to their fight for freedom. Go back to the hope that kept them alive. Without hope, the victim is not going to fight the pain and the programming to get free. The victim has come from a world with little hope. If the victim can not consciously see hope, the support person can keep their hope safe for them, and help them to see that there is a tunnel and the tunnel has a light at the end of the tunnel. We can pray that God will reveal to us the roots of our slavery. We can pray that Almighty Gods spirit would breathe the life-giving medicine of His Spirit of Life into us.

We know that God can seem awfully distant and aloof. We know the fear that comes from looking in the mirror and on one hand seeing an old person and on the other seeing a young person. Reality seems such a drag. All the trivial headaches add up to one big pot that is boiling over. This is where a prayer for an inner transformation of joy can bless a person. The realization that God does care, can lift a great deal of the burdens of reality. This is where a walk out in the sunshine through a park, where we experience the beauty of creation can remind us that life does contain many beautiful things. If a person is in a pitch black room, groping for the door handle in total darkness, it is very easy to panic and believe that one will never get out.

Once the person has reached the door handle, even though they do not have it opened, there is a way for that door to open. If the mind-control victim has reached someone who cares and understands how to help them, then they have reached befuddled therapist is going to help them.

There is a creative power for good in this universe, call it what you want, but know that this power comes from a good Creator that loved His creation, and that He has put time limits on how long evil can exist. There is coming a time when evil will be abolished. Until that time we can know that Almighty God has the power to turn any evil into good, and one of the proofs of this is the life, death and resurrection of Christ. God has high hopes for us. His disciples were so excited about this good news, they were willing to die for it. We are excited about giving hope to others, enough that we are also willing to pay that final price. that door knob. They need to hang on and know that when that door swings open, it will surprise everyone. The door seems stuck, but it can open. When we are in the dark, let us call out to the God of Comfort who can see us in the dark. A victim of mind-control when he or she regains freedom has a noble and powerful ministry available to them. Who else can listen to and look at another survivor of mind-control abuse and convey deep empathy without saying a word. God has great things that He wants to do with your future. We must not let the enemy steal our hope, as he has tried so hard to do over the years. We spoke up before a conference of therapists and gave our testimony that Jesus Christ brought us freedom. We want to encourage therapists to see that a victim needs to have a hope that a power stronger than themselves and stronger than the

INITIAL QUESTIONAIRE

Does the client have?

a. dissociative behavior (see checklist pg.
b. intrusive thoughts
c. physical complaints with no medical reasons
d. relatives in any intelligence organization
e. relatives associated with perpetrator groups (see list Vol. 2 pg.) ——– IF NO TO ALL OF THESE, LOOK F0R SOMETHING ELSE
f. memory lapses unexplained by ordinary forgetfulness
g. UFO or alien experiences
h. the presence of childhood traumas in ones life
i. feelings like there is more than one person (or voice) inside

IF YES, GO ON TO THE QUESTIONAIRE BELOW

Has the client?

a. ever lost time
b. found strange items in their closet
c. heard words by others associated with mind control
d. uncontrollable behavior despite strong efforts to control it
e. relatives who belong to Illuminati or elite bloodlines
f. unexplainable scars (when examined under a black light)
g. heard voices
h. a feeling of being possessed by some power, or a living, dead or evil person.
i. unexplainable bruises
j. been adopted, lived in a foster home or orphanage

YES
Are there?

a. strange reactions by what seem to be total strangers
b. unexplainalbe fluctuations of skills and abilities
c. intelligent parents with a wide disparity of abilities between them & the client
d. times the client feels suicidal

YES

Is the client?

a. missing most of his/her childhood memories
b. engaged in espionage, professional sports, exotic dancing, psychic activities,
Delta forces or any other profession that might link the victim to mind-control
c. a member of the Catholic Church, Jehovah’s Witnesses, Mormons or
Charismatic Movement

IF SOME OF THESE ARE YES

Suspect Total Mind-Control & Implement Actions for Mind Control

The issue of insomnia is a major issue in terms of deprogramming. Therapists have typically neglected the impact that lack of sleep has on the victim, as well as the positive impact a well-thought out program to provide sleep & to create new improved sleep habits. We cant tell you what will work for you, we can only tell you what has worked for others. A good sleep will help counter the effects of mind-control, unfortunately good sleep is a rare commodity for victims of trauma-based mind-control. It is very common for their support person to have to hold them and comfort them night after night as the programming breaks down & the horrible memories begin surfacing.

Good sleep will also have a domino effect on improving other areas of your life, such as personal relationships and productivity. Victims of mind-control have a terrible time getting decent amounts of sleep. The reasons for this are many, including heavy programming not to sleep more than 3 hrs/night, body pains, chemical imbalances, anxiety, panic attacks, & surfacing memories.

For such a difficult problem, the most powerful over the counter medicine that some victims have successfully used is a combination of ibuprofen and Chlorpheniramine Maleate. Ipuprofen can be obtained in – 200 mg. caplets and Chlorpheniramine Maleate can be obtained in 4 mg. tablets (or 8 mg.-time release tablets.) The combination of 400 mg. of Ibuprofen with 6 mg. of Chiorpheniramine Maleate taken together is the most powerful (yet surprisingly gentle for the power it packs) medicine we know of.

Those who have used this found that after a period of time, like with all drugs the effects begin to wane, and they would up the dosage slightly. Perhaps what is most effective program over the long haul is to have more than one method to get a good night sleep, and to intermix the various methods so they all remain viable and healthy methods. The liver produces lysozyme to protect itself against all foreign chemicals. The increasing presence of lysozyme enzymes is how the body increasingly destroys the effectiveness of any foreign chemical. The high rates of lysozymes in the liver are very hard on it. After about 3 weeks, a person taking a chemical has pushed the liver to about the maximum that is prudent. The person must then back-off from the chemical intake in a slow withdrawal lest they trigger a reaction in the body-mind. However, the extreme sleep problems that victims of mind-control have, usually seem minor to the side-affects of drugs to help them sleep. Medical science warns that a long-term use of any drug for insomnia will eventually intensify the problem it initially cures. This is why we advocate an attack against insomnia from several different directions, and that the different solutions be intermixed at different intervals. A prudent practice is to consult a reference book such as Drug Handbook (pub. by Springhouse Corp.) in order to find out the interactions, the nursing considerations, and the contraindications of a particular drug. Pregnant women are especially limited in what they can and cant take. The therapist and the support persons should be aware that the victim may well be programmed not to accept any meds, and it is counterproductive to scare the victim about the dangers of drugs, because that will only play into the fears that are already there. People react differently to meds and the goal is to calmly and wisely find what works for the victim without increasing their programmed resistance.

In terms of herbs, Calms Forte (valerian, aka garden heliotrope) can be helpful to relax a victim. Valerian even comes in tea-bags. Some of the over-the-counter newer sleep meds are gentle, and have been effective for some victims. The advantages of taking something that induces a mild gentle (not drugged) sleep state is that it gives the victim a chance to recuperate and to begin to pull out of whats called the “alpha state” that their minds constantly exist in.

An alcohol-induced sleep prevents REM sleep from occurring, and some of the symptoms of hangovers are simply the direct result of REM deprivation. (See below where REM sleep is discussed.) Bensodiazepines such as Valium are sleep-inducing drugs that should be given under a doctors supervision. They will only provide a short term solution, but again as many victims of mind-control will agree, the severity of the crisis is often such that such meds are welcome even if they are only going to be temporary relief. Any short R-and-R is better than no R-and-R in the battle for freedom.

The body produces it own chemicals to induce sleep. These are released by the body is relation to how much physical work the body does. A good day of hard physical work will certainly assist in the body chemically putting its own brain to sleep. When the victim remains in their normal highly aroused state of fear, with its high production of endorphins, it is hard for the body to relax and sleep. Young or physically active victims of mind-control can do aerobic exercises to counter the chemical arousals in their bodies, to improve their bodies natural ability to sleep. This is one of the safest long term approaches, if the recovering victim has the physical makeup to safely exercise.

The victim should try and pick a comfortable position to sleep in, because the less one moves around in sleep the less the brain is stimulated and the better one sleeps. If no position is comfortable, pick the best choice, and lay as quiet as possible. The fear of insomnia is as dangerous as other fears in preventing sleep. Self-acceptance and acceptance of life are positive ways to relax better and to get to sleep. The support person can talk to the victim prior to the time they retire and let the victim experience acceptance and love. This will encourage the victim to let their mind dwell on unconditional self-acceptance, which will encourage the mind to relax and sleep well.

A great deal of mischief can happen during sleep hours. Cult-loyal alters will wait until the other alters have gone to sleep, and then they will snatch the body and try to contact their master, or “go home” to their master. As the trauma memories surface, hundreds of new dissociated pieces of the mind float to the surface. If a young new child alter finds itself in a strange environment, their instinct is to run. If the support person is there to simply say, “its O.K., everythings going to be O.K., relax…”, then the support person may greatly prevent small alters from running out of the house as they look for something safe, and actually getting the system into trouble.

A great deal of therapy can actually be done at night, and in relation to the sleep state. This again is an area that is greatly missed by the traditional hour at the therapist. In fact, experience has shown that most DID clients who initially go into therapy will not open up and explain to the therapist why they get poor sleep. The therapist needs to be competent enough to draw out this information. Initially, before deprogramming, the victim will most likely be able to get to sleep, but will sleep only three hours, and will have reoccurring “nightmares” and flashbacks. Once the victim begins deprogramming and working on issues, they will often like to sleep in because they sleep best in the early morning hours. Again, we have seen this to be common among recovering victims of mind-control all over the U.S.

Many alter systems have a few alters who specialize in sleeping well. For instance, Presidential models as they fly to foreign countries to deliver messages may have an alter who is proficient at sleeping during the flight. During time periods when good sleep is needed, the system may be in a position to pull up alters that sleep well and let them hold the body, so that the body gets rested. During periods of intense deprogramming it is good for the system to get good sleep. Poor sleep weakens the victim physically and mentally. Poor sleep inhibits the problem-solving abilities of the mind, which is the very thing that victims need to resist the handlers. It will also over a period of time deteriorate the victims health, (but understand the people who use slaves could care less about their health, they often use people like they would a straw from a fast food restaurant. The handlers also know that a healthy slave means a higher risk that the slave will rebel.)

Normally, a sleeping person goes through 5 sleep patterns (called stages) in sequence and then the sleeping patterns repeat themselves (although stage 4 may drop out after the first cycle, and the person goes through the progressively deeper stages of sleep 1-2-3-5.)

These stages are

STAGE 1: about 5 minutes
STAGE 2: the first stage of deep relaxation, lasts about 45-50 minutes.
STAGE 3: a short stage where the brain waves slow down
STAGE 4: the stage where the brain produces delta waves, sleep walking and nightmares occur in this stage.
STAGE 5: REM (rapid-eye-movement) sleep, most normal dreams occur during this time, which in a normal sleep pattern would last 15-30 minutes, the body doesnt move, but there may be sexual arousal during this period of sleep, the muscles in the ear act as if they are listening intently. The REM dreams are mainly a right-brain product. The mind protects the body from acting out the dreams, by shutting down the body. Knowing this will help the victim realize that when they are thrashing about in a memory in bed, they are not in a REM sleep dream.

This process will then recycle once or twice again as the night proceeds. Interestingly, the mind develops sleep habits, just as it develops habits for other habitual tasks. If a person develops poor sleep habits as a fretful child sleeper they tend to carry these habits with them into adulthood. This means that victims of mind-control are having to break long-term habits. Readers can refer to what Fritz wrote on cognitive demon processes in Chapter 4 in order to understand how the mind develops relationships in its “cognitive demon processes in order to relegate repeated tasks to unconscious mental processes (habits).

The therapist may also have to do some work around fear of sleep. Victims of trauma-based mind control are very fearful to lose control of their minds by going to sleep, and they have a fear of nightmares and other horrible things, such as ghosts appearing etc., that all add up to create a terrible fear of sleep. The victim wants to remain vigilant to protect themselves against whatever might happen at night. This is why an alert support person is needed in the vicinity to help calm the victim, so they can relax at night from their fear that something terrible is going to happen. This also means the support person must be vigilant during the night to help protect the victim.

If the victim can begin to break down the irrational automatic thought processes that have been programmed into the mind, by using and strengthening the rational logical parts of the mind, they can begin to regain control over their own lives. Automatic thoughts that have been programmed into the non-rational part of the mind will attempt to control the mind. Gradually, the hierarchy of irrational thought processes will be challenged and their power taken away. This will give the mind a chance to regain its natural composure, and will help the victim regain their own mind so that they can relax and begin to have healthy sleep habits. The use of journals, where the rational parts of the mind can be brought to bear on the irrational thought processes, can be a help in regaining self-control. This will also help the victim regain the ability to have proper sleep. Some victims have had success in reducing their mental stress by journaling for 30 minutes prior to attempting to sleep. Worrying doesnt resolve itself if left to rattle around in the brain unattached to anything solid, but once our worries are put onto paper, they have been dragged through the rational part of the brain and can be organized and challenged. When disturbing thoughts surface, the outline that can be used for journaling is this:

What are the WHO, WHAT, WHERE & WHY, & HOW?
What THOUGHTS COME AUTOMATICALLY?
What are RATIONAL THOUGHTS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?
What are the FEELINGS ASSOCIATED with these thoughts?
What are the THOUGHT ERRORS or DISTORTIONS IN THIS THINKING?

WHERE did these thoughts come from?

One little known fact, is that the fear of not being able to sleep can create such a strong fear pattern that a five-second arousal during the night, that would normally not threaten a persons sleep, causes the fearful person to wake up and stay awake. If you do wake up and are fearful of not sleeping (or fearful of going to sleep)–the best advice is to leave your room, do some other quiet activity until you feel sleepy again and then go back to sleep. Dont lay in bed and allow your mind to fuss and to internally fume. This will create a negative association in the mind between the bed and fussing and fuming in fear of sleeplessness, and will only aggravate the long term situation. Dealing with spiritual problems, not just surface issues but deep issues will also help a persons sleep. Learning to let go of issues is also beneficial.

L-Tryptophan is an amino acid that aids the brain in the manufacture of serotonin, and serotonin is used by the brain to reduce the brains feeling of stress. Bedtime fats and milk actually reduce the amount of L-Tryptophan in the brain. Food does cause blood to go to the abdomen, and reduces blood in the brain. Vitamin E causes restlessness in some people if eaten within short periods before sleep. Saltine crackers have been found to be the overall best snack to encourage L-Tryptophan levels. Each individual is a complex array of processes. It may be that a nice snack calms a person down, even though it subtracts from the L-Tryptophan level.

In review, we have suggested a multi-pronged assault on insomnia. This assault can take the form of: direct temporary drug intervention by over the counter or prescribed meds, specific tasks that a support person can perform before & during the sleep period to help the victim deal with a variety of issues, specific tasks that the victim can perform spiritually, in terms of diet, in terms of attitudes, in terms of dealing with internal fears, in terms of which alters sleep and which stand guard, in how to journal so that issues are resolved for the mind to rationally relax, and a number of other positive suggestions. If these suggestions are followed in a concerted fashion, they will reduce the problems with insomnia, and help the victim destroy one more aspect of the mind-control.

p_demons.jpg

This artwork by author Cisco Wheeler from the 1980’s portrays images that came when we began to get parts of a memory protected by demons. In the centre of the picture is a tree upon which the child is connected. The tree is a standard programming image upon which programs are attached. The tree itself has strong roots, and feels like death. The mind wants to go further but the demonic comes to the foreground and blocks the memory.

p_demons2.jpg

This author’s artwork shows how boxed in a victim feels. Observe that the house and the environment is trapped in a girl which feels like a fence boxing the trauma-based mind-control in. The house is breaking up. Things are drawn shattered and in fear. The light would like to come out but it is blocked by spiritual darkness. The home is shattered, and is off any foundation, just like most typical abusive family situations are where such mind-control takes place

Page 353 …

Multiplicity, understanding

When an entire alter system is looked at, it appears very much like a city of people. A city of people will divide itself into different tasks. If a city lacks a plumber, someone will fill that nitch. If a city lacks a judge, someone will fill that nitch. Joe may know everything about Charlie, but Charlie may know little or nothing about Joe. Sue and Sally may converse and share their lives with each other. Some people in a city will know each other well, know of someone else, but by and large most people will be strangers.

An altar system is structured. In many countries, such as Russia, a city is also very structured. The people do not change jobs very frequently. A therapist may observe a particular job and behavior pattern of an alter and forty years later observe the same behavior. Alter systems have families of alters and generations of alters, just like a city of people would have families and several generations. In fact, as most readers already realize, a structured multiple will have teachers, libraries, castles, rivers, houses, jails, airports (runways) and many other things in their internal worlds that correspond to what a city would also have. If an alter itself could be examined under these two authors “psychological-processes microscope”, it would be possible to see how an individual alter before therapy is a complex set of mental processes that responds to life as it was designed.

After therapy, the alter begins to reflect some mental processes that the persons brain has chosen to incorporate on its own. If the brain is thought of as a machine, it is a machine that has billions of pieces and is incredibly intricate in its capabilities and design. The brain makes complex machines look very simple in comparison. If survival of the mind means compartmentalizing trauma memories so that these memories dont interfere with everyday life, the mind is quite capable of the task. It is quite capable of attaching memories and trained behavior patterns and habits to those dissociated parts of the mind.

The programmers work with the mind. They program alters according to their natural bent during the trauma process. In order to function, the brain automatically develops several items. First, the brain develops K-lines of processes (which are called habits). The brain also develops a self-image(s). When the mind is fractured, each piece can be given its own self-image and its own habits. But it is important not to lose track of the larger picture. Just like a person in a city is not an island unto himself, an alter is part of a system. A person in a city may find himself called for jury duty, drafted, taxed, monitored, spied upon, and other things. Likewise, an alter will have to function within the larger context of the alter system and its programming. Even the front alters will be tainted in how they perform in their daily lives by the side effects of multiplicity and their own programming.

A multiple will not know anything but the world that they have been programmed to see and the role they have been programmed to function in. But therapy will begin to break down the programming. Yes, alters can learn and can change. The mind can change the programmed “habits” of action and thoughts of an alter, just like it can change the habits of any person. The difficulty lies in the fact that habits take time to change unless hypnosis is used to by-pass the minds natural build-in mechanisms of stability. An alter can learn a new behavior. The therapist should know the history of an alter so that he or she knows the platform and scripts that the alter works under. Then the therapist can change the way that alter works within their role. For instance, a sexual alter can be given a new way of looking at sexual boundaries so that the alter changes its behavior within that sexual role. In other words, modify a habit of thought or action, rather than rebuilding from scratch. “You can take the boy out of the farm, but you cant take the farm out of the boy”, is a common expression about how hard it is to completely remake the thinking of a person. It will be difficult to remake the thinking of an alter. The foundation (the platform) upon which they were created will continue to serve as the framework of that alter. Either that framework is painstakingly collapsed by joining (integrating) that part with another part that it was associated with, or the framework is built upon to change the ways that alters acts and thinks.

To make an analogy, it is harder to get a man or woman to quit thinking like a man or woman, than to recognize a behavior and modify their behavior in more productive direction. This is what successful marriage counselors are doing, for instance in the book Men are from Mars, Women are from Venus. Perhaps someday someone will write a book Gatekeepers are from Uranus, and Mothers of Darkness are from Saturn.

Rainbows are important, for many alters only live over the rainbow in a world of make believe. These alters were created with a foundation of imagination and psychosis. In this case, these alters need deep therapy. They live in trance, and it is silly for Christians to think that these alters should not have hypnotic help, when their thinking is always hypnotic thinking. Some alters because they are a special purpose alter come out and take the body with “exaggerated” behavior–they are very shy, or very aggressive, etc. It makes only good sense that if a particular alter is dangerous, the people who live around the multiple should identify how that dangerous alter is triggered and then refrain from triggering it.

Panic attacks, suggestions

Panic is when one loses control of ones fear. The brain must struggle to regain control, so that reason prevails rather than an out-of-control response. During a panic attack, the mind-body-and soul are all living in the panic attack. The therapist might experience the client having a panic attack by a series of numerous repeated calls. The victim might experience a panic attack as the need to cut themselves to feel pain to prove to themselves that they are real.

For recovering victims of trauma-based mind-control, panic attacks bubble up into the conscious mind on their own. They may even surface during the dream state. So what do you do? If the panic surfaces, remind yourself that it has always been there, nothing has changed, its just surfaced into the conscious mind. Relax, its always been there, waiting to be triggered or pulled to the surface. Nothing has changed but a persons awareness of the panic. Next, remind yourself that panic represents knowledge and that knowledge represents understanding. Panic represents an awareness, whether physical or mental, that something has taken place. If we want to understand that awareness, we cant stand in it. We must encompass that panic. We must take our control back. We dont run from it, we address it. If we address the situation, we stand a better chance not to reshatter.

How can we address the situation? If it is a memory, put it up on a screen. (Go to the section on avoidance of abreactions.) If the panic concerns a real life situation, the mind must be prepared that anytime an emergency triggers panic, that the rational mind must be given back its drivers seat. The mind should be trained to give the rational part of the mind control, if panic begins. This is the training of the mind. Perhaps a logical alter can be found to hold the body during such times, while others work with that logical alter to help keep things calm. If one knows that one will be approaching a situation in life that will panic certain alters, place them in protective sheltered rooms, or put them to sleep. In fact, fear of an upcoming situation can be a trigger for a panic attack. Support persons need to realize that panic attacks which begin with one alter can spread through a system. An activity that a front alter thinks is going to be fun, may trigger panic in little child alters. The panic will be so overwhelming as it leaks back into the awareness of the front alter, that it distracts from the fun of the activity.

Panic is not always programming going off. Panic attacks commonly occur when the victim finds out that they are a multiple, and when they have to face “You mean someone abused me?”, “You mean someone carried out mind-control on me?” Another aspect of panic, is that the alter which is panicked may likely switch. One of the common tricks of deeper alters and internal programmers, is to panic an alter with coded memories that surface upon a code being thought internally. This is an easy way to move alters that are holding the body out of the way, when deeper cult alters want out.

On the flip side, a good Illuminati programmer never allows the slave to have uncontrolled panic. He will allow controlled panic. The programmer will watch for splits from panic, because the survival fear that goes with such splits will make a good warrior alters for ceremonies.

Understanding programming

START WITH THE CORRECT ATTITUDES

It almost goes without saying that the commitment by the members of the support team (therapist, guard, deliverance minister, friend, etc.) has to be that the victim is the center of concern, and the center of importance. We of the support team must endeavor to make the cure less painful to the victim than the problem. A Christ-like commitment to lay down ones own life for another person needs to be felt. This does not mean that the support team must destroy themselves to save the victim, on the contrary, by being Christ-like and employing their skills the members of the support team can find great joy, satisfaction and purpose in life. Programming has gone on for centuries, and its only been in the last few years that significant progress has been made to deprogram, so lets not lose hope just because the evil side continues to progress.

REMAIN FLEXIBLE

In dealing with mind control as a support team member it is important that you understand there is a variety of mind-control techniques, for instance DID, implants, and skull manipulation. Because there is such a wide-variety to mind-control and programming, nothing is routine in delivering a person from mind-control.

For many years, due to the heavy infiltration within the fields of psychiatry and psychology much of the information put out in this area has been disinformation. The support team needs to erase any myths they have picked up from the mainstream of these professions, and focus on what they discover from the client. Hopefully, some of the guidelines and criteria provided in our 3 books on mind-control, especially this section, will be helpful to obtain the correct diagnosis. When a therapist has used only one approach and reports consistently getting 100% success-rates, that may be a tip-off that this therapist (or minister) is exaggerating his/her success rate.

Until you can watch a victim 24 hours a day, 365 days out of a year for several years, and you can confidently say the person has fully integrated and has no alters working on the astral plane, nor any alters involved in any other way with the controllers, then there is no sure way to pronounce a victim fully recovered from the mind-control. And even then, if the victim has implants, it may simply mean that the implants are temporarily not being used.

When the reader has studied this book and the Vol. 2, he will have discovered that some mind control is done via a variety of techniques such as: ELF waves, some by implants, some by genetics, some through peer pressure, some by skull manipulation as well as other techniques. Common sense will tell you that one method can not provide the solution to such varied techniques. This is why this books co-authors are stressing the need to assemble teams of people to work with victims. Some victims of mind-control during initial therapeutic screening have had their memories, mind control, & programming rejected as being false because it didnt fit with what the therapist had already encountered. The victim endures a great deal of pain to have their lives and programming probed, so it is beneficial if the therapist is aware of some of the various types of mind-control and their combinations that the therapist may encounter.

As the therapist picks up tell-tale signs of one particular type of programming or another, it will make it easier to understand what the overall situation might be. There are similarities between the programming of the 1940s and 50s and even into the 60s, but as time progressed the programming sophistication has grown by leaps and bounds. One change over the years has been the level of specialization which the programmers have developed. When a particular type of personality is identified within a child, the programming has become very specialized and sophisticated to work within the natural makeup of that mind-set.

The last few decades has also seen the introduction and perfection of sophisticated mind-control technologies that allow the trauma-based mind-control to be fine-tuned and then hidden behind more obvious technologies such as implants. There seems to be a trend, at least for some types of professions, that less splitting of the mind is carried out today than was done in the 50s and more fine-tuning and high-tech used. This appears to be done because it results in more stable individuals, which due to the improved superior abilities of the more modern programmers, are still just as reliably responsive to orders. The goals are to produce slaves that produce better results with less maintenance and supervision by the handler. Computers are believed to be the key to modernization. Still there are principles that define how the mind works and hopefully therapists that understand those principles can continue to discover ways to help the more recent victims.

TAKE NOTE OF WHAT TYPE OF VICTIM YOU HAVE

At the lower end of the victim-caste-system are victims who are brought into this nation from South or Central America and who are programmed to be expendable slaves. They are only treated as slaves, and never experience a good life. Beautiful white women taken to Saudi Arabia at times fall into this category, where they are kept hidden in slave conditions and are as expendable as a piece of furniture. The victim may not even know who they are, they may be “Dorothy” all the way down the line.

The next level are victims who are not members of the Illuminati, who are allowed to function in everyday life as common people. They suffer greatly, but often have what appears to be a common life, albeit somewhat strange to those close enough to them to notice the strangeness to their lives. These are people used as guinea pigs, as spies, as assassins, and sexual slaves. Often their abusers are branches of the government.

The top level slaves are going to have their pride attached to the Illuminati. They will be allowed to share some power, they will have an elaborate belief system that makes them feel superior to those on the outside of their elite special group. They will be given peers and “twins” who are programmed like themselves to make them feel like they belong to this wonderful group which has some wonderful charismatic leader. The group will validate their identity that comes from being a member of this elite group. The leadership may wine and dine this slave. The leadership will share some power (actually delegate, they hold the final strings) with the victim. For instance, the victim may have a magic wand and a staff. The victim will be allowed to merge with the great leader through sexual rituals. The group dynamics will alleviate the guilt that an individual might develop on their own. This is the description of someone who has been part of the Illuminati hierarchy. You can expect your Illuminati victims to have pride in their elite status. You can expect them to tell you about banquets, and limousines, and masked balls. Their abuse will be covered over by manipulative love, status, and pride.

The Illuminati are skilled in knowing how to cover abuse with love. The loving parent that is reported by a child to be “able to do no wrong”, may well be the childs primary abuser in the worst way. The foundation for all the “good benefits” for a hierarchy slave is PURE DECEPTION. The charismatic leader will only be a image, a fantasy. If the victims will stop to remember the details, they were coerced on threat of the penalty of death to join the group of people they belong to, they are not allowed to really have real relationships to their sisters or brothers in the cult, and the cults supposed new light and deep teachings are simply a collection of ancient babblings of lost and confused people that have been repackaged as powerful new revelations.

In review, it might be said that the expendable non-hierarchy mind-controlled slave is held in place without the trappings of grandeur that are given to the hierarchy victims. The Illuminati lay great stress on the victims joining of their own free will. Sometimes that does occur, but often the victim has been so stripped that they no longer exercise free will. You as a member of the support team can point out that the victims support for their abusers has been constructed on a foundation of deceit by the abusers. Rather than denying that the slave was wined and dined, show how everything was done for purposes of manipulation. Every gift came with a price tag.

HOW THE MIND CREATES A PROGRAMMED REALITY

The idea of consciousness vs. subconscious are difficult to describe but are fundamental to how the programming works. What mental activity is occurring in the mind of an individual? Most mental activity is unconscious. Many of our activities in life are done unconsciously. If our attention is directed somewhere else, we can perform an activity without a conscious awareness.

Some mental activity surfaces from the subconscious. Day dreaming has been recognized as beneficial in a persons well being. Delinquent teenage boys have been found to seldom daydream. The mental activity of thoughts, emotions, perceptions and memories are all embedded into the mind. The structures of the mind are built by thoughts and emotions. A chaotic jumble of impressions is organized by the mind into something cohesive and useable. Our minds fabricate a reality from our thoughts and emotions. The programmer steps into the picture and makes that reality designing a team activity.

Emotions, hallucinations, moods, phobias, sensory perceptions, trances and visions are not part of cognitive conscious data-based knowledge, but are more like the ROM memory that runs a computer which is permanent and untouchable. These are important foundational structures of thinking. They lay in the subconscious. The subconscious mind is like a cess pool. The subconscious mind accepts whatever has been allowed by the mind to reach it. Once something is accepted in, the subconscious mind doesnt evaluate it. That is why hypnosis and illusion are so powerful. Using hypnosis, the programmer can place an idea into the subconscious that would take long periods of time for the mind to naturally screen and then accept into the subconscious.

Briefly described, thoughts and emotions create the minds reality. The programmer wants to be able to tamper with how the minds reality is created. The front alters, who hold the body day-to-day, will have to face the shortcomings of whoever is their systems programmer, cult leaders, or handler. For some slaves, say for instance, Anton LaVeys or Michael Aquinos, their programmer is their cult leader and their handler– all three wrapped up in one individual. The victims front alters will experience the shortcomings of their controller. Rather, than fight against what the mind will see and hear, the programmer will reframe it. They want the front alters to see the human aspect. They want them to see the “faults”, but accept the weaknesses as a normal function of the humanness of the person. The faults are refrained as merely human frailty and negative external circumstances. Lets give an example:

The victim is encouraged to think: Yes, he drank, but so what? He was a social person and of course he had to drink…. Yes, he made a mistake, but it was someone elses fault. The negatives of the programmer are refrained as natural positives by the programmer. The victims mind will feel very comfortable with these rationales. This is an example of how the programmer has tampered with the minds perception of reality. This tampering is part of the subtle hypnotic programming. Do the programmers do this type of subtle programming? Yes, it is a standard thing to place this refraining in to protect the father “Daddy” and Mother Programmer images. As Illuminati programmers, we were taught to use thoughts, emotions, comfort and discomfort to mould the minds reality. (The mind decides if it is in a state of comfort or discomfort. At some extreme point, the mind can do a reversal and decide that pain is pleasure. In such a reversal, the mind will move in the direction of comfort, i.e. pain. In our example, we are not describing such an extreme situation. It is quite normal for the mind to whitewash its image of an authority figure; this is an in-born natural comfort zone.)

Now lets say that a therapist wants to tamper with that programming. The therapist can attack the programming head on by saying, “Your programmer was an evil man.” But this approach plays into the hands of the programmer, whose manufactured reality will resist such a head on approach. The therapist may want to use the back door approach to side step the resistance. The backdoor method prevents triggers. A backdoor approach might be:

THERAPIST: “What would you have liked to have seen in the life of [controllers name]?

SLAVE: “I wish he would not have drank so much?”

THERAPIST: “How did that affect you?”

SLAVE: “I didnt get taken care of.”

The backdoor approach frees the victim from having to make a judgment call that the controller was right or wrong, good or evil. It makes the issue into an “I issue”, “I would have liked…” The victim doesnt have to step out too far from the minds comfort zone.

THE VICTIMS POWER ENDS WHERE FEAR BEGINS

At the point the victim begins to fear is where the victim gives the programmer power. This is a basic principle well known by Illuminati programmers. The programming is built upon this. Some children actually intuitively grasp methods to not fear the programmer. If the child does this, the child becomes harder to program, because A Persons POWER Ends Where FEAR Begins.

At the point of powerlessness and fear, the world around the victim becomes more like a dream. Eventually, fear becomes a comfort zone for the victim. A visual representation of powerlessness is the teddy bear, who has no genitals, no hands, or feet. (The Teddy Bear finds its way into our Illustrated Guidebook. Some therapists have found the visual images of the Illustrated Guidebook helpful.) In the previous example, the victim at first will feel strange and uneasy to question their life. They are moving out of their comfort zone of simple existence into the life of choices. Many alters need help as they take their first wobbly steps toward freedom of thought and action. When FEAR enters the mind, perceptions of reality are altered. Fears can be conditioned into the mind.

The programmers know how to introduce fears. FEAR taps into the death circuits of the brain and activates “death related reflexes”. The programmer is like the conductor of a symphony of fears, at one point orchestrating one area, at another point bringing another fear to a crescendo. The programmers know how the mind protects itself. The free will of the brain is orchestrated out of existence to the “tune of dependence upon the programmer”. The natural flow of how the mind perceives reality is drowned out under the influence of fear. The programmer can interrupt natural perceptions of reality by introducing fear. The fear creates fragments in the mind, and denials in the mind. In the end, the victim of programming has pieces of reality that appear out of nowhere and seem unconnected and like a dream. Is fear bad? When a person is stripped of trust in God and man, where do they turn? Fear seems comfortable to the victim, who cannot say “nothing ventured, nothing gained, Ill walk right through this situation.”

The instinct of the brain is to run toward its image of comfort, fear. How does the victim rise above the fear? There are ways, but they generally involve the victim getting outside help. The therapist will want to stay one step ahead of FEAR. Different people will have different kinds of fear. Males are born wanting to be protective and strong. They are designed to face the outside world and lovingly protect. The programmers break their male identity. They are stripped of it when they see that they are powerless to protect other children and powerless to protect themselves. They further feel unprotected by their mothers when they are tortured as infants. This brings in a strong sense of rejection. They know they are weak and helpless. Their in-born desire to want to lovingly protect is destroyed, because they develop the subconscious attitude that love cant protect.

Because LOVE CANT PROTECT, these men become hardened. At the root of their hardness, is the fear that they cant love (accepted by the subconscious through their inability to lovingly protect) nor are they worthy of love (built in by their feeling rejected of their moms loving protection). Once the subconscious attitude is accepted that they cant love nor be loved, they die emotionally. They run from emotions because of a subconscious awareness of the trauma. When men run from their emotions, they find it natural to tap into their intellect.

In summary, the male is born to have strength to protect what it loves. When traumatized, the male feels helpless, and develops a fear of love and emotion. Love becomes a negative to subconsciously run from. The programmer only needs to tap into the minds own methods to protect itself. The mind will protect the programming much better than the programmer ever could. After FEAR is well established as a foundation, the programming team will layer in with repetition the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR messages over and over. They will repeat “DO NOTHING TO HURT THE FAMILY [family means the Illuminati, or at times another cult].” If left to its own devices, the mind has the ability to sort things out, and right itself. The programmers are fully aware of how the mind might right itself, and pull itself out of the programmers lies. The Illuminati teach their programmers “not to let the conscious become conscious, not to let the intellect become intellect, and not to let love become love.”

What this means is that what consciously happens in external reality, is not permitted to be internalized as conscious reality. The programming tricks to prevent this could fill a book, and many are mentioned in our Vol. 2 Formula book. Love becomes love when the self knows the true self. Therefore, the task of the programmer becomes to HIDE THE TRUE SELF FROM THE MIND. Some of the greatest philosophers have said that the greatest goal of life is to KNOW THYSELF. The goal of the programmer is to make sure of just the opposite, that the victim does not know themselves. They are trained in techniques to do this.

If we understand that the programmer is trained to program the mind TO FORGET ITSELF, then of course it is clear that the therapist needs to help the victim to REMEMBER who they are.

GIVING THE VICTIM HIS OR HER IDENTITY BACK

Countless therapists and ministers have trapped mind-control victims within their programming by advising them to let bygones be bygones, let the past and the skeletons of the past be buried, forgive and forget, etc. etc. This traps most of the victims mind in their programming. Of course this feels safe for the front alters. After all, who wants to discover the horrors underneath them, that their mind has forgotten? It would be helpful if ministers would remember that God encourages self-examination in numerous scriptures. “Whoso loveth instruction loveth knowledge, but he that hateth reproof is brutish.” PROV 12:1. “The spirit of man is the candle of the Lord searching out the innermost parts of his being.” PROV 20:27 “If we would judge ourselves we should not be judged.” (1 COR 11:3 1)

In other words, if we want to be more than animals, we need to examine ourselves and love to learn. It is Gods candle for a man to examine his own innermost parts. And when we find problems with ourselves, we are to deal with them, and then God wont have to. The therapist needs to reverse what the cult has done. Give the victim his or her identity back. Equip his or her consciousness with what a persons mind would normally be conscious of. Give the person back the intelligence that belongs to their entire mind. Equip the person with a love for Gods plan for their life and an appreciation for Gods design of things. Give the person their life back by letting them know themselves, and if possible, by letting them join into the whole person they were intended to be by the real God in heaven. Interestingly, the programming is not able to snuff out the persons original personality entirely.

The programmers prefer to work within the natural abilities of a mind. This is just good common sense. Horse trainers do the same. The trainer uses a standard bred horse which has been bred to pull carriages to pull carts & buggies, a draft horse to pull farm equipment, & a pinto to ride. If the victim has abilities, he can rightly take ownership of those abilities. It is much more likely that the programmers have suppressed many of the victims abilities in order to control them. Rather than creating the slaves abilities, the programmers have simply exploited their natural abilities.

TYPICALLY A VICTIM HAS PROGRAMS:

to tamper with the senses: to confuse or stop the senses, make the senses feel like they are in some drugged state, to destroy ones sense of balance, cause pain, a sense of hot or cold.
to tamper with the spirituality of the victim, to relieve their guilt, to destroy their humanness, to get them to subscribe to occult or atheistic philosophies, to hate God, to lock demons into place,
that are codes using alpha-numeric words, colors, music, rhymes and sounds.
that tamper with memory, cover programs, false histories, hypnotic surgeries,
that control with the emotions, so that they can be triggered to be happy, sad, angry, tired, guilty or afraid.
that control actions, such as anorexic no-eat programs, no-talk programs, assassination programs, mute programs, no-cry programs, return-to-cult programs, sexual programs, specific assignment programs, suicide & self-mutilation programs, trigger other slave programs.
that control the mind, such as memory flooding, phobias, go insane program, be confused etc.
that control the body: such as heart rate programs, body temperature programs, to prevent helpful medicine from working programs.

For a good list of the different programs see the Universal Function Codes on page 80 of our Vol. 2 Formula book.

These programs can be triggered several ways, from both internal and external triggers. By learning that an emotion, thought, or action is a program, the victim gains conscious control over what is happening. The cue may still cause the subconscious desire to fulfil the program, but the victim is beginning to take back his/her life. It becomes harder and harder for the programs to work, when the conscious mind is aware of what they are, and the conscious mind does not want to submit. Memory work on how the program was laid in, and desensitization work will also assist the victim to regain some power.

Charting (notetaking) about everything that can be observed about the victim, will assist the support team in the long run. This is nothing more than what was done while they were being programmed. The doctors and programmers during programming expect every little detail to be charted. Charting will also assist with mapping, which is discussed later. Charting will assist the therapeutic team to build a frame work to the puzzle they are working on.

Dont expect the victim to be able to explain their programming. The mind-control programming team has traumatized a child victim enough that by the age of 3 1/2 they will cease asking “why?” Instead they are taught that everything outside of fantasy is bad, the outside world is bad, they are only to do what they are allowed by the programming team to do. From then on, most of the victims alters (if not all) will lack the freedom to ask and discover the complexity of what has happened to them.

As the reader has seen, programming is designed to manipulate the actions, the body, the emotions, the memory, the mind, the programming, the senses, and the spirituality of the victim. This is why we have decided to call it “total” mind-control. This type of trauma-based total mind-control will cause shattering and much damage to the soul (mind, will and emotions). The therapist will have to deal with lots of distortions and fragmentation in this area. It will cause lots of medical damage to the body, for instance weak bowel and bladder control. The medical damage can only be addressed by trained medical persons who are sensitive to the needs of a victim of mind-control.

Considerable damage is done to the spiritual life of the victim, and the victim will have to take a bath in the redeeming blood of Christs atoning blood. Many of the words and symbols of Christianity will be difficult for the victim to hear. For instance, the words sealing, blood, and Jesus may have totally different meanings and emotional content to the victim than to non-victims. This can be worked around by experimenting with workable terminology. They will have to relearn who the real God in heaven is, rather than the cults imitation god that the cult talked about, as well as their misrepresentations.

Finally, the support team will have to deal with whatever structured and programmed DID is present in the victim. Is it easier to see why we are advocating support teams rather than a lone individual to help the victim? If the spiritual part of the programming, which is the most secret part, which we referred to as Gamma programming in our Illust rated Guidebook, is not addressed, then complex MPD systems will not make much headway against the programming. Many complex MPD systems have worked hard for years and then give up hope due to the slow progress and the lack of any end in sight.

Other complex systems have seen dramatic results when deliverance methods freed the deeper sections from demonic bondage. The new freedom allowed them to progress on the other issues that they had gotten bogged down in and made no progress on prior to the deliverance. Obviously, not all programming is the same, it is determined by what group is programming, who their programmer is, what the dissociative abilities of the victim are, and what talents the programmers are wanting to create or exploit.

Sometimes a programming cult does not get all the time they desire to carry out the programming. In this case, the programming will be limited. However, in most cases the programmers have as much access to a victim as they want, especially if both parents are in the cult. In cases where the victim does not hypnotize & dissociate easily, their systems will be far less complex. It has been correctly determined by various researchers that a persons ability to be hypnotized is a gauge to determine how much a person will dissociate. However, front alters will be heavily programmed not to allow themselves to be hypnotized, so the gauge will not always work for determining how much splitting the programmers have done. The two abilities, dissociability and hypnotizability, are simply different aspects of the same thing. It does hold true that if the victim is predisposed to dissociate, that the programmers can build more complex structures. If a skilled therapist can get some handle on how dissociative his client is, he can get an early guesstimate on how much splitting and structuring the Illuminati or Illuminati front group may have done to the mind-controlled slave.

Protection, spiritual

Before one can see the value of spiritual armor and those things that would protect a person spiritually, one has to be able to understand what is being protected. This book has dealt with how Satan builds his structures within his mind-controlled servants, but what does God build within His people? Satan is a corruptor and an imitator. Knowing that will give the reader a clue that what Satan has designed is a corruption and in part an imitation of the structures God builds. The spiritual armor that God directs godly people to employ are designed to protect the structures that God creates paradise out of.

At this point it would be worthwhile to display the basic structure that God builds within both a person and His Body of Saints, in comparison to the basic structure that Satan builds within a person, as well as society. These structures are basic patterns that reproduce themselves at different levels, the macrocosm and the microcosm of the spiritual world. The programmed multiple will have a justice system (judge alters), it will have values (satanic and occult knowledge and wisdom), it will have possessions (such as its birthright, their illusion of health, their titles, etc.), and it will have its false truths (the programming).

The leadership of a system will provide a miniature state with a hierarchal structure run by Lucifer and his internal Grand Druid Council. – Within Gods children, He builds Truth and Life. Gods true ministers are life-givers. That is why Christ said he came to save people, not to judge people. By building consistency in a persons life, God is fashioning that person not to be double-minded, not to be a hypocrite, not to be wishy-washy, not to be undependable, but to be more like Himself. God is unchanging. He is the same yesterday, today and tomorrow, and therefore he treats all people equal, it rains on the just and the unjust; or in other words God is EQUITABLE. He doesnt really play favorites, but because He is God, He doesnt explain what seems like arbitrary decisions to us. God will build order, justice, life, truth and equity into His servants. These elements (diagrammed out for the reader on the next page) make up the elements of Paradise and the attributes of God as described in the Word of God. These are the elements, the spiritual structures, that the armor of God described in Ephesians 6 are designed to protect.

Some people think that spiritual protection comes from prayer. But if we look at the word of God–and also learn from great spiritual warriors, we discover that the spiritual armor that God describes–TRUTH, FAITH, SALVATION etc. are great tools to protect us. For instance the truth does set a Monarch victim free. But it isnt enough to have “the Truth”, the Word of God says only the love of the truth will protect us. (see THES.) For a mind-control victim to know that they have salvation, gives them great leverage to defeat the attacks of the enemy. If a victim has a alter or alters who can have total faith in God, and can move forward in that faith, that faith will literally become a force-field around them that will move the enemy out of the way, and cause them to back off or surrender. Prayer is not the answer in itself–but prayer built upon the structures that God builds in a person, prayer built on love, prayer built on faith, and hope and life and truth–these prayers will have power. From the great reluctance of many church going people to learn the type of truthful information that our books are revealing, in spite of the horrible truth that these issues affect their lives in big ways, shows that many people do not realize the spiritual protection that truth gives its holder. We are born into a world full of deceptive symbols. It takes a conversion to begin to break away from the deceptions that trap humankind, but many of the churches take their people right back into the same mind-traps.

Page 365

Elements of the world-system & its satanic inspired quest for Utopia.
Ordo Ab Chaos
Pyramids even with 3 equal dimensions have a bottem and a pointed top. Top rules bottem; bottem supports/protects top
Pyramid with a mirror image = basic satanic structure
p_365-1.jpg p_365-2.jpg
Elements of God’s paradise are the attributes of God which sustain the Universe
Four true offices are pillars to this structure

– God is the Spirit of Truth (He serves as the light of New Jerusalem)
– God is the Life-Giver (the water & trees of fruit of New Jerusalem)
– God is the Law-Giver (The New Jerusalem has a great wall & order)
– God is Love, our Friend (the New Jerusalem has its own glory , warm sun and worship)
– God is a consuming fire, a Judge, (The Great White Throne of the New Jerusalem)
– God is unchanging, the same yesterday, today, and tomorrow, treats all equal, it rains on the just and the unjust, in other words, He is equitable.

STABILITY (a cube is solid and balanced)

Page 366 …

The Belt of Truth mentioned as spiritual armor in Ephesians 6:3 is like a girdle that pulls and holds things together. Belts or girdles held things together for the ancient warrior, as well as holding the scabbard. The Word of God says, Gird up your loins…” which means to pull yourself into the wholeness and integrity of God. The Belt of Truth is more accurately described as the Belt of Integrity. Integrity means being stable, without being double-minded. Satan divides and conquers. He uses division everywhere to defeat the godly person. Integrity means an individuals private life lines up and equals his public image. There is no duplicity, no division of purpose in this Belt. It means the wearer of this belt is solely one-minded toward God. The Belt of Truth defends Gods ORDER of things. The Sword of the Spirit is the Word of God. The Spirit reveals to us truth, both the truth of Gods scripture and the truth about other things of Gods creation. The Sword of the Spirit protects the Bible from being misunderstood. We are to pray that the Spirit of God reveals and teaches us TRUTH. The Sword of the Spirit then protects TRUTH. God is truth, so if we seek God, we will find Him where truth is. No wonder it says that the Truth shall set you free!

THE UNIQUE POWER OF THE TRUTH, “YE SHALL KNOW THE TRUTH AND THE TRUTH SHALL MAKE YOU FREE”

In any type of bondage, if the full truth could be understood by the right persons who need it in that situation, it would make us free. In Romans 1:16, Paul states, “The Gospel is the power of God unto salvation to the Jew first and also to the Greek”. “Salvation”, and being made “free”, basically have to refer to the same condition of deliverance from bondage. Jesus Christ is “The Way, the Truth, and the Life, no man cometh unto the Father but by Him.” The “Truth” and the “Gospel” that says “Jesus saves to the uttermost, those that come unto Him by Faith,” are mutually inclusive and if you really know one, you will also know the other. Is the truth impossible to find? In Romans Ch. 1 we are told that we are all without excuse because God has given us in nature enough evidence of His power and Godhead that we are automatically responsible for the way we seek after more light or hide in the darkness. The Word of God says that men hide from the light because their deeds are evil. Living in the dark makes it easy for the “enemies” of God to capture the servants of unrighteousness who have yielded their bodies in one way or another to the desires of the fleshly nature with which we were all born. If we didnt die to our old life when we were born again, we are like Marys brother Lazarus who was raised from the dead, but had to be loosed from the grave clothes in order to walk and carry on life. Some people are still bound in grave clothes and need to be set free. It takes obedience to the Gospel to be set free, and it takes some people months or years to understand and accept all the terms of their pardon as purchased by the precious blood of Jesus, and they live in bondage to the extent that they fail to claim all of their spiritual inheritance, and the gifts that come with them. When they learn the whole truth, they find they are set free.

OTHER ITEMS OF PROTECTION

This article has just touched briefly on two of the spiritual armors that the Word of God says will protect us, the Belt of Truth and the Sword of the Spirit. The Shield of Faith will protect the victim of mind-control from the worship of idols, from worshipping the wrong things in

Page 367 …

our life like our handler, and will protect our true love for Almighty God, our real creator. The Helmet of Salvation will protect the victim, when the accuser of the brethren tries to heap guilt and insecurity upon us. It will also help the victim to protect their birthright given to them as a child of God. Each victim as a child of God has a wonderful birthright to some great things, but the enemy will steal it if they dont protect their godly birthrights. Some victims ignorantly given their birthrights away like Esau. As a born-again believer the victim has a legal position IN CHRIST that makes the person a joint-heir to the resurrection (ROM 6:3-11, EPH 2:1-5) and a joint-heir to reign with him (2 TIM 2:12, COL. 3:4). The Breastplate of Righteousness will protect the victims relationships with their support team, and the world in general. It will mean that they will treat their fellow man correctly in financial dealings, legal dealings, and any other dealing where fairness is involved. The Breastplate of Righteousness will defend justice and equity. Equity, which is fairness, means treating people equally. This will encourage the programmed multiple to treat people in the same fair way that they want others to treat their system.

We have just briefly touched on these spiritual protections. We hope that this will stimulate the reader to search and learn more about these spiritual weapons and how they can protect the victim from the attacks of the enemy. Now for instance, if the reader listens to a sermon where he is told that spiritual warfare calls for him to reject false values, repent of sin, and resist deception, he will realize the minister is managing to hit upon 3 of the substitutes for the 5 elements that make up Gods structure.

SPECIAL SITUATIONS WHERE SPIRITUAL PROTECTION IS NEEDED

As internal work is done, spiritual protection will be needed to protect the system from the warfare and counterattacks of the internal forces.
The victim of mind-control will also need protection from astral projections of their master. This protection is provided for, by a support person using the principles of the spiritual world to slam the astral
body back into its physical body.
Spirits of fear, mistrust, contention, suicide and despondency will try to attack the victim on a regular basis. The victim and the support persons need to be aware of these daily attacks and develop a mind-set and a determination to spiritually refuse these spirits. The support person should be gentle but firm in assisting the victim to dislodge and cast out such demonic attacks. All prayer should be grounded upon the structures of God, which are life, order, true love, justice, equity and truth.

God is the life-giver, the creator, the healer, the savior, the father, the peace-maker, the consoler, and the sustainer. Our prayers to Him should be grounded in the reality that He is all these LIFE-GIVING ROLES. This may help you understand what it means to ground our prayers in the structure of LIFE. We are called to imitate God & also be life-givers in the fullest sense of the word.

WHERE WILL THE ENEMY COUNTERATTACK AFTER PROGRESS IS MADE?

The enemy will send in false teachers (1 TIM 4:1-3), or hell try to give a false reputation to the world by slandering the person before men & before God (JOB 1 & 2 as well as other scriptures), he will attack the persons confidence, their beliefs, their relationships, and their walk with God. In other words, if one looks at a cross, one spoke is prayer to God, one spoke is our walk (righteousness) before God, one spoke

Page 368 …

is our witness to others, and one spoke is our fellowship with others. Satan will attempt to weaken anyone of these 4 arms of the cross. He and his forces (demonic and human) will generally look for and attack the weakest link in our defense. If we think things through it makes sense that if Satan were to attack Gods people the best place to attack them is in their churches. A fierce war is being waged in the churches today to destroy all true believers. This war is very well conceived and well coordinated. It is not happening by accident. One of the major weapons that the enemy uses is religious spirits of judgement. Judgement brings death. It is one thing to expose evil, so that healing can occur, that is godly. But the religious spirits that judge are out to hurt and destroy. These judgemental religious spirits are out to divide, so that Satan can conquer. We feel safe in saying that until our books came out, including this one, the Christian churches were totally ignorant about multiplicity and what it entails. We have watched many multiples suffer from judgemental spirits in the churches. These religious spirits are not from God, so dont let them hurt your relationship to God. But why can Satan attack? There are a number of spiritual reasons WHY. First, is that the programmed multiple is traumatized and programmed during their life time to create footholds (legal loop-holes) that give Satan the legal right to attack. Eph. 4:27 says, “And do not give the devil an opportunity.” The word opportunity in the greek is Topos, which literally means “foothold”. These footholds are also referred to as strongholds in the mind (2 COR 10:4) which are like fortresses that Satan keeps operating in enemy territory that allow him to attack vulnerable lines. They are like secret holes that serpents can live in to crawl out of into your nice garden.

The spirit that crucified Jesus was the religious spirit of judgement. It will attack you with a vengeance. The victim and the support team must not allow themselves to become subject to these religious spirits. The judging religious spirits are trying to provoke the person who is the target of their attack. These evil spirits want a reaction from their target. The godly person can do exactly what Jesus did, let these judgemental spirits rant and rave and after all these antics keep ones peace. The reaction will be, arent you going to do something about this? Just say, its a moot point, its not relevant. I dont give it credence and move on. Each victim must seek life-giving answers for their own situation. Dont let the religious spirit of judgement steal you of your chance for life. Just remember Jesuss words, “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! For you shut up the Kingdom of heaven against men; for you neither go in yourselves, nor do you allow those who are entering to go in.” The Pharisees of today will find all the right answers to justify their position. You as a victim must seek truth, you must seek life, you must seek love. Forget these religious men that bind big burdens upon people and strain at gnats. You as a little child, and what programmed multiple isnt mostly a child, are what the kingdom of God is made of. If you retaliate against the Pharisees then you have lost, because that is what these religious spirits want, is to get you into a battle on their territory. Even if you win that battle, youve lost, because you had to leave your territory–the peace of God, to enter back into Satans domain. Dont fight religious spirits, they are a sly trick of Satan to get you to step back out of Gods domain into Satans boxing ring. At that point, you will participate in the lie that the boxing match is the real contest. Dont trust in yourself, even if you can win in that boxing ring. If you know that God is with you, stay with Him in peace.

Page 369 …

SAFETY ISSUES, of slave

This section is an attempt to coordinate information scattered in many different articles and chapters, as well as discuss ideas that come under safety that are not addressed in other places, such as how to work with child victims of mind-control. Other articles that pertain to safety include:

The Accessing article deals with safety from the abusers contacts.
The Triggers article deals with safety from all the programming & memories that activate irregardless of whether the original abuser is around or not.
The Self-inflicted harm article deals with safety issues that derive from the victims own threats to themselves.
The Communication & Trust articles deal with the safety of the therapist-recovering slaves relationship.
The Deliverance & Salvation articles deal with the spiritual safety issues.
The Surveillance article deals with safety issues concerning harassment and continued cult interference in life.
The Mazes and Mirror articles deal with the safety issues of tackling particular programming.

Safety tips will be discovered scattered through all of our books on mind-control. The abuse of a victim is ongoing, unfortunately it was not just yesterday, but is here today. That is why this books two authors have made a point of referring to victims of mind-control as VICTIMS, and not as “survivors”. The word “survivor” is very popular among therapists, and the word “victim” will cause some therapists to go into convulsive uncontrollable rage. The word is not popular. But the word “survivor” comes along with all the denial and whitewash of the establishment therapeutic community, that somehow this abuse happened to a poor helpless child and now that the child is an adult, they have survived this abuse. First, this ignores completely that the Illuminati continue to access and use essentially all mind-control victims that are trying to get therapeutic help, and it also ignores the fact that 99% of the alters have no concept that they are an adult, but if anything still see themselves as children. The high percentage of child alters is never realized by novice therapists, because the adults protect and hide them. A safe house is a place where a victim can go to stay from dusk to dawn in safety or even better a safe place to live. Generally, when safe places have been discussed it has been the goal to keep plans discrete and only on a need to know basis. A safe house will not take the place of a hospital, but the option of placing victims in hospitals is a very risky last resort. It would be great if safe houses could be set up with qualified therapists and trained volunteers who recognize the unique safety needs of victims. This would give recovering victims an opportunity to gain strength as they fought the internal lies and the dissociation. Such issues as How much does it cost?, What does the victim bring?, How does on keep a victim from acting out programs?, Do you force the person to stay if they want to leave, Do you have inhouse rules?, Who handles the medication? Can the victim receive visitors? and who and when? What kind of special dietary needs does the victim have? A safe house can not possibly cover all the safety needs of a victim. The Illuminati have traditionally threatened their families, their pets, their reputations and their jobs. The author has seen the Illuminati make good on some of their threats, but generally they threaten and intimidate more than actually act. A major issue is feeling abandoned and alone. A support person will achieve the best calming effects if they can maintain a constant

Page 370 …

presence with the recovering victim. When the support person or therapist is absent, life becomes a terrifying experience, and the fear the victim lives in while alone can make a few hours seem like eternity.

THE SAFETY OF CHILD VICTIMS

Fritz & this author Cisco have had to resist the opportunity to help some young victims of mind-control because we knew that helping them would put their lives at great risk. There are certain ages that if the child or teenager has not progressed to the point that they are expected, they will be killed by the Illuminati. Children who are multiples have treatment needs that are different than adults. The first problem that must be faced is that the childs parents or caregivers should be involved in the treatment, but the odds are extremely high that they are dirty and part of the abuse, no matter how well or to what extent they deny it. It goes without saying that the therapist needs to be able to handle the emotional trauma of helping child abuse victims. It may be harder than working with adults, because the therapist is face to face with the helplessness of the child, who is confronted with a powerful evil system of enormous magnitude. The skilled therapist will study the childs interaction with others, on the playground, with other children, at home, and when the child is alone. They will watch for strange aberrant interaction between the parents and the child. The therapist will also watch the childs eyes to see how they interact with other people, or if the child tries not to look at adults. The child may have a dull apathetic dissociative look to their face, or simply a blank look, or a glazed look. Check to see if they have puffy bags or dark eye circles. When the child has suffered the abuse of the trauma-based mind-control hallucinations, a desire to hurt themselves, and disturbed responses to heat, cold, pain and enclosures. A multiple will have erratic grades and abilities, their grades may be low compared to their 1.0. And they may be tired or hyper in school. Popular cover stories to cover programming sessions for children are tonsillectomies, esp. emergency tonsillectomies. Also sending the child to specialists may be a cover, or taking the child to a “funeral”. The child will be shown funeral pictures and told that it was there. They like to isolate the child from playing with other children too. The poor child victim of mind-control will not have the words to sort out the coexistent feelings of love and hate for the victims abusive parents. They also do not have the language capabilities to describe their feelings and emotions. Guilt may simply be expressed as, “It just doesnt feel good.” If the therapist is going to help a child victim of mind-control they need to communicate to the child that as a big person they will be gentle but that they have the unchangeable strength to protect the child and care for the child. “I will help you be O.K., and I will protect you.” The therapist should also convey to the child that “I know it was not your fault.” “I am able to hear what you have to say without being wiped out or shattered.” “We will do this together.” “I know you are going to be O.K.” If the child realizes that he or she can be safe with the therapist, the child may begin to warm up to others too. As the child feels valued, it will feel safe enough to talk about things a little.

Page 371 …

SAFETY ISSUES, of support team

During the many years that your author Cisco has observed people trying to help programmed multiples, we have seen a range of counter-attacks by the World Order.

PRECAUTIONS

Find out how the Network operates and what organizations are part of it. Fritz has some excellent information on this. Do not trust law enforcement. We have seen victims get conned by seemingly “well intentioned” law enforcement people who deal with cults as part of their job. If you feel like our warning is hysteria, then you are welcome to “reinvent the wheel.” An example of how victims of mind-control will be treated is told in the front of Mark Phillips and Cathy OBriens book Transformation of America. In the front of their book they provide the business cards of some of the law enforcement people who were dirty and stabbed them in the back as they attempted to get her daughter free and to get justice. Cathy and Mark travelled all over this nation in search of justice–it isnt there. We will not provide a long litany of horror stories, for no amount of proof will convince those who are still trapped in their own mind-control that the our judicial system still works for the people. The Illuminatis Network is victimizing America at will. Do not trust the establishment media. They are great at manipulating stories to discredit the truth. The institutions that America has trusted in have long been subverted by the Illuminati.

THE BAD NEWS

Typically, the Network (what the abusers call themselves) will try to publicly discredit anyone who opposes them. Today, a popular way to do this, is to infiltrate a programmed multiple (who is programmed with an ulterior agenda) into therapy and then take the therapist down with the cry “false memories were implanted”. The victim needs to be worked with in such a way that they recover their own memories and the therapist has this validated. Several conferences around the country have gone into detail about the ins and outs of legally protecting oneself. Fritz & this author provide our assistance to victims gratis. We suggest that others might consider simply doing this. The therapist may get their office files broken into, and in a few extreme cases the therapists have actually been murdered. Some support people (incl. therapists) have had their personal lives disrupted. Their spouses leave them, they are poisoned (such as what happened in L.A. as well as other places), their automobiles break down (sometimes with obvious signs of tampering), and they find opportunities in the world shutting in their faces.

THE GOOD NEWS

The persecution of good people exposes to the world what is going on. Recently, a person who only half believed our material showed it at the university where they taught. The immediate & overwhelming negative persecution that came was so obviously an overreaction if the material had been false, that the persecution made a believer out of this truth-seeking person. Every time the enemy exposes himself to persecute our side, he exposes himself. In a war, the enemy exposes his position when he shoots at you. You can fool some of the people some of the time, and some of the people all of the time, but you cant fool all of the people all of the time.

PROCEDURES for an Assassination The Illuminati members must get the

Page 372 …

Grand Druid Councils approval for an Illuminati assassination of one of their slaves, etc. Therefore, the Illuminati handlers often get other groups like the Mafia to do the dirty work. In other words, the Illuminati is not just running wild wiping people off the face of the earth. Their control is very planned out and systematic. Up until recently, they had never lost a slave to freedom, so they still dont really consider our side to be a viable threat. While our side painstakingly rescues an individual here or there, they continue to program tens of thousands. They have stayed ahead of their opposition, and even created much of their own opposition. They will take advantage of a persons weak points. They will put a great deal of study into where a person is weak, and take him or her down at that weak point. They will also look for routines. A routine is something that is a natural setup for exploitation. They will also try to divide and conquer. If they can separate a person out and isolate a person, they will go in for the “kill.”

BALANCE

The support team needs to develop a strong spiritual walk where they are not a leaf in the wind to every scare tactic the Network carries out. The Illuminatis Network thrives on scare tactics and fear. On the other hand, the support team needs to have a well-informed understanding of the capabilities of the other side. There is nothing to be gained from being reckless. Prudent precautions are worth a great deal. The saying a ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure is very accurate. If the support team is negligent or sloppy just one day out of the year, it will be that day that the victim is reaccessed. The Illuminati will watch for months, waiting for their chance to grab the victim. Most people dont realize that they will exercise that much patience. The therapist & victim figures if they havent been bothered for a while that they are out of the woods. The support team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped of their ability to see danger from their abusers. This is so important it bears repeating: The support team needs to realize that all victims have been stripped of their ability to see danger from their abusers. Those on the support team should not let their guard down simply because other victims dont seem to have to protect themselves. First, the few victims that are public may not be telling what happens to them. And second, if victims are not telling about constant surveillance, constant harassment, and constant attempts at reaccessing and reprogramming, then please draw the obvious conclusions.

Page 373 …

First, it should be recognized that every victim of mind-control has to make a choice whether to fight for freedom or not. If they do not make this choice at some level, they will not have the commitment to try and counter the powerful self-destruct programs that are layered in. Freedom for a mind-controlled slave can only result from total commitment to the slaves freedom by the therapist and a strong commitment on the part of at least a few alters within the system. Neither the slave nor the therapist can do all the work. Therapists are often totally surprised at how intense self-destructive system-persecutor alters will hate the host alter and how determined and intensely they will inflict harm upon the body. This is because they are still not realizing how almost all DID victims are programmed structured MPD (DID) slaves. Nor have most therapists come to grips with how intense the programming is that created these “system persecutor” alters. The “system persecutor” alters believe that they are protecting from greater harm, and in that sense they are more accurately described as “protectors. Most protectors are simply frightened children who are filled with rage. They may also surface with obnoxious belligerence, for instance, they may spit in the therapists face. The therapist or support team member must simply stay calm. Try to “bore the protector alter to death” with your calmness. The therapist needs to dig deep into their surplus of love and compassion and realize that this is just a wounded, hurting programmed child. The therapist needs to validate their role, and their feelings. They are not designed to hold the body for great lengths of time, and will get tired holding the body for long lengths of time. Many protector alters if they are allowed to surface, and ventilate their thoughts, and work through their feelings, fears and programming can return to the internal world with their destructive programmed behavior defused. If the therapist makes the mistake of trying to lock such an alter up, rather than negotiate and work them through their programmed destructive misbehavior, then a serious power struggle and a bigger mess could result. Sometimes if they are allowed to act out, for instance, a cutting alter is allowed to cut–but with dull plastic scissors, they can feel like they have done their job and go back inside. The protector alters believe that they are doing their job by protecting secrets. This lie can be exposed when working with them. Because they may have strong demonic elements attached to them, they will usually need some spiritual deliverance. Many therapists have asked their systems to make contracts “I will not hurt myself…” It is important that the therapist establish groundwork, a platform upon which to work from. Contracts have been more successful than not having contracts, but the therapists need to go beyond simply making contracts. Contracts only work with the front of a system, and the host alter is usually very dissociated from the deeper part of the system. First, the therapist needs to work with the front, the host personality, to make them aware of the self-inflicting-harm programs that will go off. It is important that the host personality learns his or her triggers, learns how to help identify protector alters within the system, and to help creatively discover methods to negotiate with the protectors. The host or therapist might ask, “Do you really think you need to inflict harm? Are you really bad or have you just been told that? Do you know that even [clowns, rabbits, kittens, horses…] do not hurt themselves?” Try to find the human part of the person. It is always there – even though it may be very remote. Work with the survival instincts of every alter. “Did you know that kittens dont hurt themselves?” Try to get them NOT to act like the cult, but to have new behavior. Try and reframe the abuse cycle,

Page 374 …

so that they see it in another light. The little protector alters may present a hard outer shell, but deep down are just fearful little special purpose fragments that are doing the job they have been trained by behavior modification to do. The entire support team as well as some of the alters can cooperate in repeating triggers so that they can be defused. It is important that triggers are not found out the hard way. What will be automatic triggers? Across the board, the programmers have put in heavy-duty protector alters and self-destruct programs to protect the victim from dealing with all past mother and father issues, in other words from really seeing their childhood. As long as the host alter stays in the here and now, they are “fine” in terms of not triggering the self-harm programming. This is so that the host (front) alter will not go down through the layers. Two other important areas that have lots of protectors are the core, and the no-talk programs. Of course, the abuse will create many of its own natural “self-hate” problems for alters. One way to defuse the self-destruct programs is for the therapist to take the victim down to a level 4 trance or deeper and use the Universal Codes that were given in Vol. 2. Those are the actual universal (standard) codes, but they only work if the therapist has the alter deep enough into trance. The programmers have built in a wall that will bounce the codes off, if the alter is not deep enough into trance. (As far as we know, these universal codes havent been changed. This is part of the problem with giving answers, is that before the therapeutic community picks up on the answers, the other side has had time to react.) The programmers create jokers and scrambling alters to insure that code words said above a level 4 trance never have effect. The code words become merely garbled words, that bounce off the system. When triggers do go off, they trip off a domino effect, so that soon whole groups of alters are immersed into all kinds of self-destruct programs. The therapists need to understand that when a single trigger goes off, there is likely to be several self-destruct programs triggered. Most therapists are not aware of what happens deeper in the system. Internal and external abuse is often triggered on a regular basis by the work that is being done, and the therapists and the host personality are generally oblivious to it all. The host may be so dissociative they do not know why their leg or foot hurt. They may not realize why it hurts to urinate. Female slaves often cut their vagina up. Male slaves often simply shoot themselves. There are few male slaves that survive the suicide programs, due to the cold logic of their programmed minds. Front alters may not know there are suicidal parts, they then fall asleep, out pops a suicidal alter and the system may die of a heart attack. The potential for self-inflicted harm is present across the board in everything the victim tries to do. The victim will sabotage their credibility, their therapy, the love and trust of others, and their own successes. The therapist needs to be prepared for such things happening and not let them side-track the therapist from what needs to be done–WHICH is to show love, and care toward the victim. The therapist may feel like this is calling for superhuman endurance, and sometimes it does, so the therapist needs to learn new behavior–how to endure in the face of repeated failure, and keep on keeping on. When fresh memories surface, and when new alters surface, the programming has the same fresh power as when it was originally put in. The stronger alters need work done with them so that they will be prepared to handle the burden of the power of new self-destruct programs hitting the system when new material and new alters are revealed. The few strong front alters can create safe places internally where they can nurture

Page 375 …

more vulnerable “weaker” alters. These safe places must be deep enough so that they dont trigger whoever is holding the body. (To get to this point, pre-supposes that the therapist has a few strong front alters that can help out in therapy.) The feelings of abuse and anxiety of the new alters can be placed into a box while they are in the recovery room. The recovery room system can be similar to how hospitals take the person out of surgery into monitoring rooms, and then finally to their hospital bedrooms, and then finally they are let out for outpatient observation. The internal recovery room can have pillows, and other gentle things within it.

SPIRITUAL ISSUES

There are numerous Spiritual issues that confront the victim, and many of these issues may be the most critical factors in the improvement and healing of the victim. However, it has been hard for most people to separate religion from spirituality. One of the most powerful tools of the Illuminati for controlling people are the various religious fronts that they have created. The mainstream religious groups are but fronts to control people. Within religion you will find controlling spirits, judging spirits, spirits of denial, spirits of guilt and shame, and spirits of obesity. Not all obesity is from a spirit of obesity, but obesity (gluttony) seems to be the sin that is used to substitute in for the other things that are rejected as sin. Gods creative force works within the universe. We are meant to be like God. He gave each of us some creativity. We can creatively take responsibility for our own lives and our own walk with God and our own spiritual growth. God gave each of us free will. Sad to say, but these important gifts, are often surrendered by religious slaves to whatever organization controls them. They give up their creativity and free will. They seem to think God wanted them to be a little puppet. The puppet mentality likes black & white orders, and black & white thinking, because it removes responsibility for the puppets actions away from the puppet. Again God made it clear, He was going to make each person accountable. There is no one else who can answer for you, when you face God. Religion can be one of the best covers to hide the stench of trauma-based mind-control. Under the guise of religion, the pressure to look good–to look like the organizations “approved solution” conspires to cover up the truth, real feelings, failure, and sin. Religion can be so stiffling it becomes a pressure cooker. In order to make reality fit the religious mold a great deal energy is put into fantasy and denial. A great deal is done in the name of God that has nothing to do with Him. A great deal of how the Illuminati keep their slaves in place under their control is that they overlay the deeper levels of mind-control with the absolute control over the front system by one of their numerous religious denominations, such as the Catholic Church, the Mormon Church, the Watchtower Society, many Pentecostal groups, authoritarian New Age groups, and other religious groups too numerous to mention here. These groups emotionally strip their victims, and create a dependence within their members upon their church hierarchy. Christ came to set the captives free, and from his ministry it is clear that many of the people he set free were captives to religion. One of the greatest spiritual steps is to take back what God gave you and use it like He intended. Many mind-control victims cant move forward toward freedom, because the religious group that controls them wont give them their basic God-given freedoms, abilities, and free-will. The Illuminati doesnt have to depend solely upon the mind-control programming, their religious groups will do the day to day work for them all in the name of God.

Page 376 …

STRUCTURING, how it is done, its consequences and its treatment (an intermediate issue for helpers)

It is important that the people helping a victim of total mind-control understand that the slave has had his or her mind and thinking totally structured. Structuring means that the persons mind is complex. Illuminati slaves usually have thousands of alters. Usually, therapists play around with the surface alters of a front world, who even after a decade or two of therapy will have very little idea of the full story of how their body and mind is being used. Structuring is the bracing that holds the programming structure in place. If the programs are the plywood, tile, shingles, and the other material, then structuring is the engineering, the design, the bracing that puts the materials together in a firm workable manner. Another article “Multiplicity, understanding it” will deal with aspect of understanding the parts that build the house. Structuring means that each alter has its script or way of thinking. Everything is cut and dry, black and white. If life challenges the alters thinking it will either a. dissociate the information it cant reconcile with its script, or b. switch to another alter who can deal with thoughts. The switching is so ingrained within the mind, that it is hard for the mind to prevent it, but the mind can be trained to stay in place; not dissociate and learn material outside of its script, but it takes effort and time. This is why is good to journal, map the system, and keep other written records because the mind of an alter of a slave has a powerful tendency over time to continue dissociating whatever is not part of its script. The black and white thinking makes it difficult to deal with complex issues. An example of that would be for instance, a critical comment by a therapist on one tiny aspect of work which may be interpreted by the victim as rejection of their work. Structuring means the victim (the victims alter system) is not allowed to know or see anything but what they are to know and see. The concept of Multiple Personalities is difficult enough for the therapist to manage, let alone the puzzle of a labyrinth system of alters who are entangled in thousands of secret scripts that all work as one vast interconnected machine. In understanding the structuring, therapists should be aware of dual and triple functions. The external function of an alter will not coincide with the internal function. The alters will relate to each other in a complex way, similar to the complex ways a city of persons relate to each other. Each system will have its own internal political setup, and sometimes internal politics as alters begin trying to change the structure. Everyone hates to be stereotyped, even alters. Even though alters are programmed and structured, so are most people in the external world, and no one likes to be told they are programmed and structured. But just as a mother acts like a mother, and a prostitute acts like a prostitute, different alters which are common features of all systems will be recognizable. And although the host alter will quickly be known, often the host alter is actually several co-conscious alters, who will emerge with their own identity during treatment. The host may be one of the hardest alters to get to admit to the MPD (DID). One of the primary bracing devices used in structuring is FEAR, for instance,

Page 377 …

fear of being found out and considered insane or a criminal, fear of remembering the traumas, fear of the pain. Another primary bracing material is the dissociation from ones emotions. Without the emotions around a memory, the memory is a stale fact with no more impact than some statistic about Outer Slavakia, and the programming remains intact. When the affect (the emotions) return to the alters when they do memory work, it re-humanizes them. Humans have emotions, and that is what the alters need to regain. Emotions make the memories real. During the structuring, alters that had to have special responsibilities in the outside world, or had to have special cult responsibilities have had to have special programs tactics done so that they will not have emotions. The mother cats will have special shadow alters that take their emotions. The alters that take the affect of the trauma, are not but to sleep, because they need to be handy to continue siphoning off the emotions of any new experiences. The emotions must be kept separate by the Programmers so that there are no weak links. The spinners will have absolutely no emotions. Deep down in the spinner area each cat family will have some emotion alters carefully hidden. The alters systems are structured not to have emotion. Logic (luciferian logic) is a great stabilizer. Much of the beginning structuring to remove emotions from the alters begins in the cages, where the dehumanization starts. The child in the cages (this trauma is described in several places) is deprived of everything, isolated, whipped, shocked, prodded, raped, etc. After that period in the cages, the child moves on to the next stage where they are caged near animals (such as cats) which are treated wonderfully. The child is encouraged to act like a cat. The child is behavior modified to become a cat. This early part of the programming is designed to split off the emotions and take the alters back to their animal survival instinctual level of thinking (that means thinking with only their reptilian brain.)

In order to regain their emotions, memories may have to be seen with their emotions from a great distance, and reviewed on an ever-closer screen many times, until the alter(s) are desensitized enough to the memory to look at it close up. To get in touch with ones emotions, will cause alters to be suicidal. The therapist will have to separate out mirror images, and the false memories that have been laid in. (Unfortunately, memories usually surf ace with a lot of baloney.) Then the therapist will have to encourage the feeling parts to come up. The feeling parts weep, sob, have broken hearts and much suffering. They may have anger, fear, and panic. The hurting part may be a screamer. It may not have a name, or might even be called screamer. It is probably a small child stripped of its identity. This small child has never had a chance to express itself. It probably feels that if it expressed itself. it would drown the world in tears. The structuring is designed to incorporate anything that will help create a feeling, an atmosphere of helplessness. If the therapist can give power back to the alters, this will help them take responsibility for themselves rather than looking to the master.

Page 378 …

Without a doubt, people who have been subjected to Illum./govt. mind-control have suffered and continue to suffer. Its no surprise to find suffering in these peoples lives; they are masters at suffering. They often have very high pain tolerances. The fact that they are continueing to suffer, creates a multitude of spin-off problems for the victim. Rather than deal with the spin-off problems, the therapist or helper may want to deal with the issue of suffering itself. The Word of God says, “Many are the afflictions of the righteous.” PS 34:19. Therapists & ministers should be careful not to blame the victims problems on victim. Ministers need to be reminded that not all suffering is the result of personal sin. Much of what happens is simply the result of living in a fallen world. In real life, many of lifes stories do not have a happy ending. Bitterness toward God is dangerous, because it leads to all types of problems emotionally. The therapist & victim should avoid blaming God. If the client wants to delve into having a deeper understanding of why evil & suffering exists, then they should by all means be encouraged to find a book that answers this, or to contact this books authors. In the beginning God described everything as “exceedingly good”, but the fall of man has echoed down the centuries. A deep understanding of Gods justice will explain why suffering exists. A deep understanding of Gods love explains why God allows suffering and pain. We can not assume to know the answer to each tragedy or pain, yet we can still help alleviate the suffering. Today, pain clinics teach people ways to cope with pain, and so does this page.

First, dear therapist, treat the person who is suffering as you would want to be treated if you were undergoing what they are experiencing. Unfortunately, few therapists have had much inkling of the extent of the trauma & suffering that their clients who were victims of trauma-based mind-control continue to experience. This is very evident, because until recently, therapists have had little concern for the safety of their clients once they have stepped outside the therapists office. Ongoing victims of mind-control have been popularly labelled “survivors of SRA” by the therapeutic community, and yet so far neither Fritz nor this author, Cisco, has ever seen someone who is past having to suffer. These are not “survivors” of some past abuse, they continue to be ongoing victims, and not of their own choice. The helper should evaluate the suffering, its causes, its purposes & benefits. Although all things work together for good to those who love Almighty God, not all things are good. It is not wise or benevolent to lecture the sufferer on the edification he will receive from the pain he is experiencing. In the long run perhaps the victim will see that the suffering can bring joy, enhance ones future glory, yield greater wisdom, produce true humility and true comfort. If the victim is a devout Christian, they may already be able to see the silver lining to the cloud. However, the helper/ therapist wants to find ways to alleviate the emotional suffering & lesson the pain. Ignoring or belittling it, or heaping more shame or guilt upon the person is like rubbing salt into the wound. Once the suffering is identified, the therapist should free the victim from their shame. After Adam & Eve sinned & got their lives into trouble, God still made clothes from skins to hide their shame.

Page 379 …

SUFFERING (client complaint)

Allow client to express his pain.
Treat the client as you would want
to be treated in similar circumstances.

Let the client confront their own pain.

DO: a. allow people to express their pain. b. let people confront their
own pain, c. be with the sufferer in silent caring. d. be a cheerful heart,
give kind words for the health of the body, mind and spirit, e. free the
client from the shame of suffering.

DONT: a. assume you know the answer to every tragedy or pain,
b. lecture the client about the blessings they will receive from the
suffering, c. shame the client.

FINALLY:

Point the person to the goodness and strength of God, for: IF THE
LORD DOES NOT BUILD THE HOUSE, THOSE WHO LABOR BUILDING IT LABOR IN VAIN. No client can resist the suffering in their own strength, they need the strength and consolation of a higher power, God.

Page 380 …

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

Suicide is an ongoing threat to ALL victims of total mind-control. All victims of total mind-control have strong suicide programs that are activated if they learn or talk about anything that has gone on in their life, except what the programmers want the victim & world to know about. Therapists have greatly underestimated how suicidal victims of mind-control are once they begin moving toward freedom. Most alter systems are designed to have a calm front. The front alters can be very calm and stable, while all hell is breaking lose on the inside. Nor do the front alters have the ability to see what is happening behind/under them. Threats of suicide can be broken down into immediate threats that require immediate intervention, & long term therapy. Because all victims of total mind-control are suicidal 24 hours a day once they begin work, therapists should assume that ALL VICTIMS are always a few thoughts & seconds away from suicide. This is why a support person should be around a mind-control victim 24-hrs a day to support the client & to protect the client from his own suicidal tendency. Suicidal thoughts & suicidal alters are programmed into a slave. These pose an ongoing threat. BUT there is another threat that can overwhelm the victim. This is the accumulation of all the horror & trauma that the mind is dealing with. The victim must also deal with his own guilt, with the abuse cycle which kicks in & says, “Its all your fault.” Suicide may a fear of living, a feeling of hopelessness. When it comes to suicidal thoughts, sometimes mind-control victims display the same clues as non-victims. These clues might be the verbal clues such as “life is not worth living”, “Im in the way”, and “I would be better off dead.” Indirect talk of having a friend who wants to commit suicide might also be a clue. They might also have the behavior clues of being depressed, buying a gun, drugs, or a rope. Another clue might be writing a will while depressed. The victim of mind-control will also display in their handwriting a number of clues showing depression and suicide, such as a higher than norm frequency of “xs” throughout the letter formations. The immediate response of some therapists is to place the mind-control victim into a hospital, but hospital settings usually back-fire & trigger even stronger suicidal behavior, due to many programming/memory issues involved. The hospital should be a place of last resort, and then only under the most ultra-extreme cases. Hospitalization has its own set of considerations to be taken into account for the victim. During an immediate crisis, a suicide alter can be given something in which to act out their suicide desires, such as a plastic gun to do russian roulette, or they can be dealt with so they feel they have done their job well enough without actually killing the body. The therapist/support person needs to have the love to listen to the victim, & show genuine concern. The support person can determine what pressures (prog., emot., work, financial, memories, etc.) have built up to cause the suicidal tendency & see if some of these can be diffused. If a non-suicide alter is contemplating suicide, they can be temporarily distracted until the crisis is over by asking them to genuinely help the support person with something. This alters self-esteem should be encouraged, because the alter is probably tapping into all the negative images they have had drilled into the systems head.

Page 381 …

SUICIDAL THOUGHTS (early client complaint)

IMMEDIATE SUICIDE THREAT
Genuinely listen to the person with love and concern.

Is this a suicide alter or a despondent non-suicide alter thinking about suicide? YES
Deal with this special purpose alter by getting it to restrain from killing the body and to return inside the body. Be sure to praise this alter, who is most likely a highly programmed child purpose alter.

NO

Size up the situation:

Listen for verbal clues to suicide
Look at how much agitation & stress exists
Watch the persons communication for goals, for feelings of rejection, or guilt
Ask about behavioral clues to suicide, such plans & equipment
Ask about pressures that could have built up to cause the suicidal thoughts, incl. med. pressures and drugs.
Brainstorm how you as a support person can bear this persons burden (GAL 6:2) & how others might help relieve some of the pressure driving the person to suicide.
If inspired pray, if nothing else give HOPE.

Give:

Hope & emotional strength & praise
Positive encouragment
Positive distractions, such as ask for help from the victim.

LONG TERM WORK

Work on:

Dealing with hurting, rejected or crying parts
Learning how to cope with whats been done
Seeing what is behind the suicidal depression
Untangle the confusion of feelings
Pace the disclosure of traumatic material
The no-talk messages and the no see messages.
Seeing programs and memories via journaling, art, etc.
The many fears, esp. the fear of ones own anger.
Rage issues, trust issues, denial issues, spiritual issues.
Realize that the suicide thinking can be helped more by ones attitude than hoping to change the external situations of life.
Find the positives, “Its a positive that Im taking this little step.” Live minute by minute.
Dont worry about tommorrow. If you make it thru today, then its a. good chance youll survive tomorrow.

Page 382 …

SUPPORT TEAM, organizing one

The ESSENTIALS OF SINCERE HELP

S Safety
I Information
N And
C Creative
E Eject, erase, eliminate, expel the PDE/computers
R Realize
E Emancipation

ATTRIBUTES of a SUCCESSFUL TEAM
T Together
E Easily understood goals
A Attainable but challenging goals
M Measurable goals
G Good solutions
O On the spot rewards
A Applied creativity & risk taking
L Loytalty to team & goals

The slogan “If you want to get something done right, you have to do it yourself reflects the independent spirit of Americans. In some situations, the rugged Rambo is the best solution. The overwhelming needs of a programmed multiple who has not just cities but worlds of alters are too much for a single support person. The overwhelming needs of the multiple to stay safe 24 hours a day are too much for a single support person. The skills needed to tackle the challenges soon wear out a single person. There is great wisdom is setting up teams (whether formal or informal) to work with programmed multiples. Fritz and I have done this quite a few times in therapy. The rewards have been extremely gratifying. We still have a great deal to learn. Fritz and I are working as a team on this book and on this article. Other people have assisted us too. Fritz brings his skills and I bring my skills and together our contributions are worth much more than if we each worked separately. Teamwork brings varied experiences and complementary skills together. The mix of skills and insights enriches the therapeutic process, and adds flexibility to the process. Teams can respond to a changing situation far better than an individual. Over and over we have seen that one person catches a clue to what a victim is trying to say, while another team member is mentally distracted or fails to catch the clue. A team is not created to create a team. A team is created as a means to an end. A team needs a goal and needs to perform. A team can handle one victim at a time. One thing that we have seen work well was to make a large banner of the goal for the victim during a particular session. For instance, when work was done with our gatekeepers who were locked up in heavy programming the goal was “To discover the true self.” When goals are chosen they need to be results, not activities. The victim and the team will perform best if they have goals. When working on a goal, seek quality rather than deadlines, because the foundation of the team is performance. If the team performs, it will build everyone up, and foster more team spirit. If the team doesnt perform its very reason for existing is in question. When setting goals, perhaps the goal can be defusing a particular type of programming. Or perhaps the goal is to uncover the multiplicity of the victim. The team members need to be given a chance for personal growth. The team should share ideas. The team should have fun together. The team can switch roles, or help each other learn. Each person on a team needs to be given some status. The alters of a system also are part of the team. Each individual is valued for what they can contribute. Dont forget to assign each team member a significant role, and to assign meaningful significant goals for the team. Divide up job responsibilities so that success can only result if everyone pulls together. As time goes on responsibilities can be rotated so that personal growth between

Page 383 …

various specialists occurs. One person on the support team can reward the alter system when they achieve a goal. A trip to an aquarium, or to a park, or something special that the alter system has never been able to do may be a significant reward. The therapy should be fun. When teams work around the clock, they need to be very wise & careful about how hard they push, and when stopping is too soon. (When one is in the middle one has to continue to a breakthrough.) An alter system can only process so much so fast. After several days to accomplish a goal, and a day to reward the goal, then a break should be taken before hard work again. The recovering victim may also be able to find a situation where they show to themselves their new growth. At present some therapists are working several days alone to achieve major breakthroughs, at least this is what has been reported. However, we have never heard of any follow-up for these victims. Without proper followup and long term protection and long-term work, we seriously doubt that much will really be accomplished beyond an impressive yo-yo effect. The Mungadze Association (817-354-1389) & Care, Inc., are 2 groups using Christian principles & support teams & safe houses to help programmed multiples. The two groups are some of the best examples of what has been done. Who is qualified for a team? The most important criteria is commitment to the goal. If someone is seriously committed to contribute toward a common team goal, then they are worth having on the team. But Americans (including the American churches) tend to want short term answers. Short-term patchwork jobs just do not hold up in deprogramming slaves. We need to have concern for the long term for anything effective. That takes commitment. A programmed DID does not want to “expose their guts on the operating table if the doctor and nurses are going to walk out in the middle of surgery.” If a team member is seriously committed to the goal, they will work harder to overcome the barriers and obstacles in working with other team members. When the team overcomes an obstacle, a natural outgrowth of that is team spirit. Team spirit isnt artificially made, it is a by-product of a successful team. To focus on “building a team” is the wrong goal. The commitment (strongly willed) is to the therapeutic goal. Teams that are highly committed to each other personally are the best high-performance teams. Too often we have focused on the head (talents), or the hands (work produced) and not seen the heart (spirit). The love and good spirit of a support team are really the best leadership qualities that can be brought to a team. Dont misunderstand, a team will invest in creating an ongoing committed well-skilled group, but they dont make the team an end in itself. Bring together team members who have deep trust and respect for each other. Bring together a female mother-figure therapist and a male father-figure therapist. At some point team members must have some type of discipline and accountability. There has to be some type of structure. (A team member cant do a job half-way and then decide that they are finished. Nor should other members try to push other team members off the team before the goal is achieved.) That doesnt mean the structure cant be flexible. A team should be what is needed for the job. Numbers are not important, commitment is. Of course the therapeutic team needs to take into account that the spiritual dynamics, the psychological dynamics and the safety needs of the client need to have specialists who will be committed to these jobs. The most successful team will be one where there is no rule “Dont do anything wrong.” Everyone on the team will make mistakes, but that is O.K. because those mistakes can be learned from and can promote personal growth. The team needs to promote

Page 384 …

the personal growth of its members too. The team should not waste time on small risks, but go for the gusto. Be creative. Create an informal environment where everyone is relaxed. Take risks, but dont be foolhardy daredevils. The team needs to be committed to new innovations. Pride in what a member knows will go before the fall. Programmed multiple systems are full of surprises. What if team members argue? Get them together immediately and ask them how this conflict is going to help the victim? “Lets work together. The victim needs to see the people she looks up to being committed to the victims freedom, and not some non-relevant viewpoint.” Competition between the team members will be counterproductive. The team is not being assembled to win a contest or a race. The victim will contribute lots of ideas, and a great deal of sensitivity and patience needs to be forthcoming from the support team to allow the recovering victim to be the center of the teamwork. However, an alter system is not set up to help itself, and it will need some external input. Devote time to what is successful. Brainstorm alternatives. Ask team members how they feel they can contribute to a goal. Ask the client, “What would you like to do that we arent doing?” If the place to work provides a nearby spot to relax, it will provide the client and the rest of the support team a chance to relax and diffuse some of the tension. The means creatively looking for good safe houses or good offices to use for therapy. Treat each other on the team with equality. This doesnt mean that a persons skills are not to be respected, it means that all have a shared sense of mission and all are important. The example of team work and cooperation will also be beneficial for the alters. It will give them examples to build on, that they can apply to creating internal cooperation. Somehow the team needs to give space so that members can vent their concerns. Some of the problems therapeutic teams can develop is when concerns are stifled. This means others must be restrained from interrupting. Practicing a forgiving spirit between team members will also give alters a good example to draw from. The team needs to be as open as possible without any secret agreements between people. The recovering victim needs to see that they are part of the process. In many cases, it is very difficult to speak about particular therapeutic paths, when that will only trigger resistance and programming prior to the onset of a session. For this reason, goals can be stated but particular methods are best devised as the process unfolds. It is not productive to make the recovering victim feel powerless. On the flip side, some alter systems will entertain a spirit of control, and this spirit will have to be firmiy and gently rebuked. As the team works on their goal, they will have to navigate through the following rapids, how do we deal with differences of opinion?, What do we do when one is upset?, What do other team members like? How does one handle feelings? In the end, these are all issues that alter systems have to work out amongst themselves too in order to succeed. Remember the four essential areas of help: Safety, the Victim getting to know themselves, Building the positives, and dismantling foundation programming & the PDE. The support team needs to determine how the victim can establish safety 24 hours a day, 365 days out of the year. Make sure that all the helpers in this area are very aware of what the safety issues are. One victim had the Illuminati come directly into a Christian safe house and take the victim out with them, without being stopped. Fritz & I hope that we have stimulated you to investigate forming a support team for your general geographic area. We welcome your comments and questions in this area.

Page 385 …

TRAUMAS, FOUNDATIONAL TRAUMAS, How to master understanding what has been done to your mind-controlled client

An Olympic athlete wants to learn every detail about his sport he or she can. There is a fine line difference between success and failure, and each understanding we gain brings us closer to the expertise we want. There is a big difference between playing war or watching war on television and being on the front line. There is a big difference between hearing about the birthing process and giving birth to a child. There is a big difference between reading about an eskimo and being one. Numerous therapists have commented that they were totally unprepared by their training for the depth of horrors that their programmed DID (MPD) clients have experienced. How does one bridge the gap? Most mothers will tell you that you can read all the books you want on giving childbirth, but experiencing a childbirth as the mother is the only real teacher. This book (and our two previous books) have laid out the horrors of the programming for several reasons. One is to help you get in touch with the victim you want to heal. While this book can not transmit the full depth of the horrors of trauma-based total mind-control, only a survivor of that trauma has the possibility of knowing–and in most cases it was too horrible even – for them to remember–this book (and particularly this section) can GIVE YOU THE UNDERSTANDING to prevent clumsy therapeutic mistakes that stem from a shallow understanding. One principle of success in life is to plan ahead. If a carpenter were going to take out a wall in your house, he would know how to use his tools, he would know what the wall was made of, HE WOULD SHORE UP THE REST OF THE HOUSE so it didnt all crumble when he took out that wall. Time and time again, programmed multiples find their therapists “experimenting” on them. In other words, the person whose hands they have placed their life into, doesnt know the tools, what the situation is, nor how to shore up the other parts of the house before they do major destruction on their programming structure. Many clients are irrevocably damaged. The last two decades of therapeutic work with programmed multiples is littered with the failures of “experiments”. We shouldnt make excuses for these failures, nor do we need to brood with guilt, life is full of failures; we simply need to come out of denial about the high percentage of failures, and make the corrections needed to succeed. Generally, the victim, who has been victimized by the experimenting is further victimized by being blamed for the experiment failing. So the therapist had best plan ahead, and this section is written to help the therapist do just that.

Two foundational pillars upon which the programming works is dissociation and fear. In order for the traumas to work they need to be as severe as possible. The worse the trauma, the better the dissociative walls needed for programming. These traumas are so severe that they splinter the mind, they are not ordinary traumas. Such traumas are so severe that to describe them creates automatic denial mechanisms within the listener. In fact, most victims prefer to live in denial too, which is more comfortable. Going back to our carpenter analogy, there are issues that the carpenter must know about and other issues that arent important. For instance, “is the insulation in the section of wall being pulled out good or not?” is not an important issue. Likewise, too much emphasis is put on whether the trauma memories were real or staged, or put in with hypnosis. Unfortunately, most of these disturbing memories are

Page 386 …

probably actually took place. But whether they took place exactly as remembered or not is not an important issue. The issue is that they exist as reality for the victim, and they need to be dealt with. We are dealing with the mind and its programming–that we can change, we can not change what historically happened. We must identify what the mind thinks and deal with that; and remind ourselves we are can not tamper with the past no matter how it happened. If the therapist has a hard time coming out of their denial, perhaps they are not suited for this work. The therapist needs to work with the reality of the memory in the mind–rather than trying to make a judgement call on what happened. There is a place for making historical judgement calls, but it is not the important issue in working with a victim. Those who have suffered the traumas know that others can not understand them. Only by living the birthing process does the mother fully know the experience. Only by being on the front lines does the soldier know the horror and stench of death. So the therapist is going to help the client work through repressed memories. These memories are like BOILS OF THE MIND. They rise from the subconscious to the conscious and then they are “lanced” so-to-speak so they can heal. The root of that boil is FEAR. When the trauma is embedded, it is covered over by love. This is intentional on the part of the programmers. It creates the double binds that they are so famous for. REJECTION OF THE PERSON feeds the boil, that is rooted in FEAR and hidden by the DOUBLE-BIND OF THE PROGRAMMERS LOVE. (If the reader feels unsure that he or she totally grasps this, no problem, it will be clearly explained as the reader progresses through this section.) The mind-controlled slaves mind is like a deep vault holding information and

trauma memories. The victims soul carries intense deep grieving, and their body carries body memories of trauma. The deep vault of the mind goes back to the traumas that took place before the child victim was verbal. The fears and dissociation which provide the foundation for the mind-control, were responses by the mind to PROTECT itself. Some Christians are trying to cast out alters as demons, when the fracturing and dissociation was a gift from God that allowed the victim not to lose their mind when faced with overwhelming trauma. The little child to protect itself from the threat and fear of death, the lies, the double-binds, the guilt, the shame, and the confusion of drug states guards its mind by building its structure of dissociation. When the therapist sees a structured DID (MPD), he/she should equate that with “intentionally done.” At some point, the victim needs to see their structuring as something INTENTIONALLY DONE. It was an intentional crime against everything they were – an intentional crime upon their entire being, body, soul and spirit. A little child is born pure and clean. The betrayal of what that child was, is embedded deep in its thinking. No child can withstand the full impact that comes from realizing the extent of the betrayal of that child by humanity. After years of protecting itself by dissociation, there is no way that a programmed multiple can face the COMPLETE AND FULL IMPACT of a trauma memory without resplintering the mind. Before the dissociative wall is pull out, the therapist needs to place in methods to allow the victim to bring up memories without the full impact. Journalling, art work, mental television screens holding the memories at safe distances, etc. are some of the bracing equipment that successful therapists put into place to prevent the full impact of the memones. DEATH speaks to everyone. No one is an island to himself (themselves) when it

Page 387 …

comes to the subject of death. It is an undeniable fact of life, that most people try to stay in at least partial denial of. The MYSTERY OF DEATH reveals itself in many forms. The therapist needs to understand that he/she is facing multiple kinds of death. A study of Trauma-based mind-control could be renamed a study of Thanoteros. In fact, the man reported to be the worlds present-day best programmer has a degree in Thanoteros. After experiencing several types of death, many victims of mind-control prefer death over the reality of life. Your job as a therapist is almost that of a resurrection. You must give life, where there is only death. This is why we believe that victims need life-giving godly people in their recovery. The mind-control victim may experience death in a grave. The victim may find it in a death, burial, and resurrection programming ritual. It may be experienced in the cages where the mind was split, it may be found in the isolation of a well or closet. It may be found when a child is setup to watch another child or pet that they identify with, and then be made to feel responsible for its death. Death may be for the godlike programmer to die, or for the programmer/master, to whom the victim is trauma-bonded, to turn his back on the victim and walk out of the room. Death may be to find oneself in a strange hospital room with white masked strangers and a strange doctor hurting you. When the important people in a childs life reject its life as important–howls the child to value itself. It is taught to value only that life that the master gives. The therapist needs to show the victim the value of life, so the victims will want to take back what was devalued by the programmers. Death brings GRIEF. The survivor is dealing with different kinds of death which are shrouded in mystery. The therapist is not dealing with normal grief. The therapist will be dealing will overwhelming grief when the memories are birthed. The programmer has worked to take the child victim to a place beyond restitution. He has also built in a base of fear with layers of fear, shame, guilt and grief. The therapist can save herself and the client difficulties if the client isnt put onto the defensive. Dont attack what the client is saying and make the clients parts defend what they are saying. This will only result in them avoiding the issue. Whether the therapist agrees or disagrees, a judgmental attitude will insure that the deeper alters will go into hiding. They will close up tight, and these alters will take the path of least resistance and they will stay silent. Silence is what their programming is demanding that they do. And the programming will feel safer than challenging both the therapists skepticism and the protective suicide/confusion programs that will trigger when they talk. The programmers have programmed many alters to believe no one would listen to them, and a skeptical therapist reinforces that programmed conviction. If the therapist can begin to understand that the hours of programming traumas ran into days, and the days ran into weeks, and the weeks ran into months, and the months ran into years, they will begin to get a sense of how the programming has been layered in. It took lots of hours and money to put it in. Its going to take the client and support team as long or longer to deal with the issues and to resolve them. To hurry is not better. The therapist and the victim will have repeated problems with denial. The therapist will have to accept and work with the victim where they are at. Neither the victim nor the therapist will want to believe that trauma-based mind-control has taken place, but both need to accept where they are and where the therapy is going. Thats the reality of life. The survivor of the mind-control will run basically two tracks. During Illuminati

Page 388 …

programming these are referred to as the right hand path and the left hand path. The left hand path is the path of the satanic cult, and the right hand path is the outside world, which has been portrayed in the worst way by the programmers. The mind of a trauma-based mind-controlled slave will naturally think about the thoughts that have been repeatedly drilled into its mind, via all kinds of programming methods and reinforcements. The mind-control is basically a type of death–the human has died and a robot has replaced it. Humans were designed to have meaning and purpose in life–not to follow orders without purpose or direction. The programmers use fear of death to motivate the slave, but fear is based on death, not life. Fear does not give true life. However, the human spirit is almost impossible for the programmers to kill. If the do break the human spirit, they risk eventually losing the slave to apathetically losing interest in life. The human spirit will fight to live and breathe. It will fight to overcome what it doesnt understand. It will fight to live and to have a life of meaning. It is important for the support team and therapist not to underestimate the power of either of these two tracks. The programming is extremely powerful. And surprisingly the human spirit is extremely powerful. What results is an extremely intense, overwhelming tug-of-war. The clients actions will not coincide with a single plan. The clients actions will lack harmony. One minute they may sabotage therapy, the next they may give a key to help unlock the programming. (Because this author lived through being programmed, and in turn learning to program others, I am in the unusual place to understand the consequences of the various types of programming situations that victims are subjected to. I hope to take what Satan meant for evil, and use this knowledge for the benefit of humanity. Please allow me to share some my insights.) An example of one of the standard programming traumas will provide many lessons about the nature of programming and deprogramming. By going over just this one example, it is hoped that the mechanisms that drive the programming will be exposed, and that the therapist will see how to curb the power of the programming trauma. This programming trauma is based upon Genesis 37 in the Bible. In this Bible chapter the patriarch Israel loves his son Joseph best. He makes for him a coat of many colors (vs. 3), but this special act of love causes his brothers to become jealous. His brothers then strip him of his coat of colors and throw him in a well which had no water. The Illuminati like to carry out this standard programming trauma when the victim is three years of age. They will place a coat of many colors on the child, but this is to familiar the child with programming colors. Their robe is not described as a robe of pride, but a robe of shame, and the child is told “youre bad”, “look at what you did” and is rejected by a group of people and made to feel alone and shamed. Once the child has been clearly rejected by the group carrying out the programming, then it is lowered into a very deep well. They are trying to build a foundation of guilt and fear for the programming. The well is deep and either hot or cold. A lid is placed over the well and the child is left in isolation after being shamed and made to feel guilty. Occasionally the group may throw down body parts and feces, urinate, and make noises from the top of the well to continue the shame and rejection. For three days the child is left in the well totally naked. The programmers want to make sure the child feels no worth and rejected by mankind. It is important that the child feels alone and stripped. That isolation from mankind, will help insure the programming isnt tampered with. It helps insure that the child wont

Page 389 …

develop self-value. The well experience teaches the child FEAR and that IT IS ALONE. The child feels the fear of being alone. It knows that it is nothing except what the cult wants it to be. In fact, more specifically, it knows it has no life nor value in life except what the programmer wants it to have. It has been stripped emotionally and physically. After tormenting the child for 3 days with no food and no water and occasional verbal abuse, the child is in shock and at a crisis point. The group raises the child up. At this point it is critical to the programming, that ONLY the programmer/handler be the person to bring the child out of the well and tend to its needs. The programmer will give the child water to quench its thirst and food to feed it. The programmer will pick up the infant and calm it. This programming experience is to build upon the traumas in the womb and the original fracturing (which is referred to as splitting the core) trauma. In other words, if we were to number the sequence of traumas we get, 1. womb traumas, 2. splitting the core trauma(s) 3. the well trauma. The coat of many colors-well trauma is very severe. Many children are lost during the trauma. Some children go inside and become autistic. A medical team is present so that the child is kept alive when it is brought to the surface. The child will be in what is called a vegetable state when it is retrieved. After the programmer gets the child to the surface and calmed, the child will be nurtured by its mother or mothers-of-darkness. The child will be left alone after the well trauma for 3 to 6 months. The child needs this time before it is tampered with. After it has recuperated, the programming team will begin working with the child. They will build a chronology of how it felt during the entire sequence. This chronology will define for the programming the sequence of dissociation, so that the programmers can identify what types of pieces the mind has developed out of the experience. Those different dissociative pieces each have different characteristics, and those characteristics will be important to determine what that dissociative piece will be used for. For instance, if the child spends some time in fantasy that its parent really loves it even though the reality of the well experience contradicts that fantasy–those parts of the mind can be used to build alters whose love is based on fantasy. It is difficult if not practically impossible to dissuade these alters that their love does not line up with reality because the foundation is a trauma where this part of the mind survived on fantasy. It is also important for the therapist to realize that often the Illuminati (or other cult involved with the programming) will separate out the parts of the mind from the splitting the core trauma (remember this core trauma often includes a rape by Satan/& a rejection by someone pretending to be God, i.e. a black mass), and make sure the pure positive parts of the mind are put to sleep via drugs and hypnosis before the well trauma. When the mind (the core) was split part of the mind remained positive and in love with the Lord. That is the part that is the most dissociated from the trauma. That part is preserved and usually not subjected to the well trauma because they want it to develop into the Christian front. It will experience only the original shattering of the core trauma, and then in some cases be left basically trauma-free. They realize that once this part is indoctrinated into Christian doctrine it will be almost impossible for it to ever deal with the mind-control. That is because Christian doctrine from most mainline denominations will teach that part to forgive and forget the past. That part of the mind–which will be used to front the system will live in the pleasant atmosphere of Churchianity–where nothing un-nice is allowed in. It will not want to look

Page 390 …

at what has happened to other parts of the mind-because its attitude is forgive and forget and move on. Remember, this front part derived its separateness from the rest of the system precisely because it was the part of the mind that stayed in denial of the seriousness of the trauma, and held onto its polyanish thinking in spite of the overall reality of what happened. The mainline denominations will continue layering in teachings that will make it difficult for this front part to participate in freeing the rest of the mind from bondage. This is why it is important for the churches first to realize what is going on when trauma-based total mind-control is carried out, and second how to divide the Word of God correctly so that people realize that the Bibles warning that a double-minded man is unstable in all that he does–needs to force the church to revise their teachings so that their teachings apply to the reality that encompasses programmed multiplicity and the healing of programmed-multiplicity. Now that the three trauma periods have taken place (fetus, core split, and well trauma) and a recuperating period of time has occurred, the programming team can begin structuring. The structuring will involve moving parts around so that they are “positioned” to carry out their role in the grids and systems that are to be built. This is similar to how files in a computer can be move from directory to another without changing the file. When the programming and structuring begins, the child will be questioned so that the programmers know how the mind split during the trauma. The programmer will then take the childs parts deep into hypnosis and instruct them to forget the well experience. They are only to remember the good part of the experience–the worthwhile lesson that the programmer loved them. They are to forget everything except “YOULL NEVER FORGET HOW MUCH YOU WERE LOVED”. The final split of the mind that was in fear will be found and developed into a protector. This part of the mind which lives in fear, will never allow the love part to remember. The FEAR parts are left intact with their fear, they will insure that the memory is dissociated. There is a point during the well trauma when the childs mind will fall asleep but continue splintering. When the child is sleeping the mind finds it difficult to discern whether its thoughts are dreams or real. Have you ever had a dream that was hard to separate from reality? The splintering during this period produces dissociative parts which can be used for gatekeeper alters. Gatekeeper alters are often the most deceived and most programmed, and have difficulty knowing reality. This is because they have been built from this dream state during the well-trauma.

Page 391 …

If the therapist has a very strong logical front alter, that alter can be used to provide a protection for the system. This alter can receive hypnotic alarms that will make the system angry if anyone tries to use codes on the system. This strong alter can also train his or her mind to have enormous thick concrete walls behind them, so that the rest of the system is blocked off from hearing anything through this alter. In this way, a system can be protected from a verbal access code. However, there are ways to get around such a defense. When alarm systems and blocking walls have protected a system, the Illuminati will physically abduct the victim, and take the victim to a nearby site where that strong alter will be “destroyed”-shattered by electro-shock and hypnosis and put out of commission. We suggest that if defensive mechanisms are put in, dont advertize this fact, because it only escalates the battle. The actual codes and triggers are generally buried deep in the subconscious, and the support team is going to have an extremely difficult time ever getting to any of these. We have tried to greatly help people out by publishing what we can in this area. Because the codes are buried so deep, it is really difficult to erase them from the mind. The mind is trained to switch automatically upon certain cues. Perhaps the most effective way to protect a victim of mind-control is to have a knowledgeable support person with the victim, 24 hours a day. The co-authors have heard a number of therapists say that having someone assisted 24 hours a day is impractical, and we reply that trying to free someone (mentally & physically) without 24 hour/day protection is impractical. There are prayer strategies and powerful prayers that can be made to receive supernatural help to overcome the triggers. There is certainly power in prayer, we have seen this first hand. Over time some of the codes can lose their power through desensitization. It always helps when alters are aware of what the codes are so they can be alert to them. But the power of the codes should not be underestimated, and to tell someone they are protected from the codes by prayer, is similar to telling soldiers that bullets cant hurt them because they have been prayed for. While we do not discount the power of prayer, we also recognize that prayer needs to be grounded in reality. If we pray for a house, we can imagine that the house has magically appeared, but that is not faith, that is merely self-deception. Some victims have been told incorrectly that codes will not work with their system anymore because they were prayed for. Who wouldnt want to believe this, and yet we feel compelled to warn people that in the case of programmed multiples, there are seldom easy answers. On the flip side, positive triggers can be put in, such as a cue word that will call up a helpful front alter in case the system and the therapist needs help. Sometimes this can simply be the alters name.

Page 392 …

As the alters of a victim of mind-control go through life, they will inadvertently trigger programming and memories. Initially, there will be fear around the activation of triggers. The novice therapist may think the victim is setting off triggers just for attention. Actually, that is not a major issue for therapists to worry about, even though on the outside it may appear to be an issue. However, it is true that a slave may be programmed to trigger their own programming as a macro-program goes off to get the slave to do things to activate so many triggers that the system self-destructs. It is no exaggeration to say that life is one big trigger for victims of Illuminati mind-control. The programmers have intentionally linked the external environment of the slave to their programming in order to manipulate the external world into becoming one more reinforcement for the mind-control. The programming traumas have taken place over in so many different geographic locations for most slaves, under so many different circumstances and with so many different programming props that there is not much left in life that doesnt trigger emotions of fear and horror. After reading the Illustrated Guidebook, the Vol. 2 Formula book and now our Deeper Insights book, readers should be aware of why airplanes, animals, birthing issues, blood, caves, colors, crying by children, death issues, fire, foods, heights, holidays, insects, lightening, masks, occult paraphernalia, snakes, sounds, and harsh weather such as tornados, and zoos will trigger a recovering victim of mind-control. Phobias can be mentally linked to certain items, or may simply be free floating. For the victim to get in touch with their emotions is in itself very triggering. Any time the victim tries to touch things at a personal or emotional level, they will trigger him or her self. The harder the victim works, the more they trigger themselves and the more fragile they become. In working toward freedom, pain becomes gain. But the victim and the therapist are not going through the pain for sadistic reasons, but because part of the power of the mind-control is to separate pain the consequence of pain from the sources of pain. Trauma memories are so abundant that abreactions lurk in the background, ready to spring to life as the victim tries to go through live. When the victim tries to shower, eat a meal, or have a pet or visit with a little child, the alters may well abreact. The traumas and abreactions do weigh down a person, but many recovering victims, simply run two tracks, one for the world to see, and the other which is full of pain and confusion. This happens too frequently in therapy. It allows the therapist to fool him or her self that the victim is doing much better than is actually the case. Sometimes an alter can be put in charge of the body, while the rest of the alters are busy trying to deal with all the pain and emotion that the trigger has generated. Only by gaining the trust and knowing how programmed DIDs think, can the therapist begin to get a more accurate picture of how the slave has been triggered. Many therapists mistakingly think that if their client who is a programmed multiple will not experience victimization if they dont refer to themselves as “a victim”. It is a fad to blame victims for their own victimization. The thinking goes like this: Somehow the person set himself up–&/or—it must have been bad karma. This is the pop psychology of the 80s and 90s, that is not grounded in reality. The origins of this thinking are also suspicious. This quack thinking reflects the humans minds need to have things make sense. Many times life is senseless. Many

Page 393 …

times people suffer senselessly. They do not set themselves up as victims, and all the word games in the world arent going to stop what going on. To pretend that the multiples that are coming into therapy are “survivors of abuse” is just one of many ways that the therapists deny that they are not dealing with the real issue, the clients safety–which is not something in the past, but the most important issue in the present. Therapists have most victims conditioned to call themselves “survivors”. How many people on a ship that continues to sink call themselves a survivor? The pitiful health conditions that so many victims of ongoing mind-control have described to the two co-authors, and their desperate cries to have this ongoing abuse stopped make the word survivor a mockery of their ongoing desperate attempts to hold onto some kind of life. Every time the victim of mind-control accidently triggers a trauma memory or programming they are being victimized by their past. Of course, some therapists and ministers have managed to hide the MPD, because they have mistakingly informed the victim that the MPD (DID) is the problem. The DID is NOT the problem–but abreacting trauma memories or trying to prevent a suicide program from actually taking place is a major problem, and one that most survivors are going to have to deal with by themselves, because the triggering will take place so quick and frequently. The therapist needs to give the victim the mental and external resources to at least cope with these challenges. The greater the trauma, the greater the amnesia wall. When trauma memories break through those walls into awareness, the distress to the victim can be overwhelming. The victim will be frightened, ashamed, depressed, fearful, suicidal, and have feelings that they are going crazy. No patient is eager to discover that he/she has been violated by people they loved and trusted. The false memory people are not portraying the way the mind works to the public. The mind tries to protect itself, and it is inclined to deny harsh memories, rather than latching onto trauma memories because of some therapists suggestion of abuse. Uncovering a victims history, does not depend on a single memory. New memories are blended with old ones and new explanations for what has happened reconsidered, until a verifiable more accurate chronology begins to present itself. At the onset of therapy, if the victim doesnt know, the therapist can warn at the onset of therapy that hand gestures, hypnotic patterns, lights and codes words will trigger the subconscious mind of the victim. The field of what might be called “aromic therapy” is still in its infancy, but has great potential. The sensations of smells are closely linked with emotions in the mind. If a therapist is trying to trigger a particular memory and emotional content, smells associated with the memory will work better than anything to pull up the emotional content. This is because of the way smell is processed by the mind which first perceives it by the smell setting off a combination of “detection codes” in the olfactory bulb that are then relayed through the limbic system. The memories of smells are very closely attached to emotional memories. This only makes sense in a way, because smells are used by a newborn child to identify its mother, they are used by lovers, and in other situations where the sense of smell plays an important role in our emotions toward something. The use of smells to trigger and to heal multiples is wide open for exploration.

Page 394 …

We believe that we may have some new slants on the Issue of trust which might help both support teams and their client. In order for the therapist and support persons to work with a programmed multiple system they need to establish trust. This means that the programmed multiples alter system not only feels the support person will be honest, but that they will protect the multiple physically and the multiples confidentiality. It also means that the alters trust the abilities of the therapist to accomplish something positive. For some front alters, they simply need to see that the therapist/support person cares, is a kind person and has credentials or a history of working in this area. For deeper alters, trust is a demanding and complex substance that has to be won by lots of hard work, consistency, respect, proficiency, and availability by the therapist. Many of the deeper alters have never seen a person try to protect them before. Many of the little hurting alters have never had any one to tell their pain to. Many of the alters are convinced that no one can love them, that they destroy everyone they touch, and that they cant have a good relationship with any outsider. The therapist will have to prove these attitudes wrong, even in the face of the client carrying out actions to self-fulfill their expectations. This last paragraph was from the therapists vantage point. On the other side of the healing process is the programmed slave. Once the therapist opens up their system, they will be processing memory 24 hours a day–even though the front alters may not know it. Once therapy opens up a system all kinds of things start coming unraveled. The host alter, who probably has been thinking (and generally destroying all evidence to the contrary) that she/he is a single person, now has become a complex system of competing personalities. As the programming loses its power, more of the multiplicity appears. (Family members are often devastated, because they lose the person they knew for an entire tribe of personalities.) As the system tries to move against the programming, every step that would take a unit of mental energy for non-multiples is perhaps carried out only with 1,000 times the mental energy. Instead of one person changing his habits, you have an entire city or world that must be changed, and they must change in the face of overwhelming resistance from many others in the system as well as the programming and external threats. While trust seems to be an easy thing for the therapist, trust becomes one of the struggles that seems a no Many of the issues seem like no-win issues. Remember that the child victim initially resisted with all it had against being programmed, but at some point, the programmers broke the child and its resistance completely. That brokenness is a solid part of the childs thinking. The victim will fall back into that broken “its-a-no-win thinking” very easily. The programming leaves the victims mind operating in a survival mode. This means that much of the survivors thinking comes straight Out of the first brain, the reptilian brain. The victim will try very hard to see what the therapist is trying to say, but before long, they find they have fallen back into the old way of thinking? Why? Lets say the therapist has worked on teaching the kitten alters that they are really not cats. Lets also say the therapist has worked hard on trust issues. Now all of a sudden the judge alters and the programmers apply pressure to the kitten alters, and before they realize it, they are seeing themselves as kittens and distrusting the therapist. They are saying to the therapist, “Youre telling me Im

Page 395 …

not a kitten, but I see myself as a kitten when I look in the mirror, and beside I dont want to be a human, because humans get hurt.” What has happened? When the mind learns it builds K-lines. K-lines are like highways that connect many different things in the mind. K-Lines can connect cognitive demon processes, memory bits such as visual maps stored as a memory. K-Lines are what create a mental state of consciousness. A mental state is really nothing more than a K-line or interconnected series of K-lines. When a highway (K-line) is built in the mind, it is essentially permanent. It is similar to the Apian Way that leads to Rome. The same road that allowed the Roman legion to move its troops still is being used today. The same purported street that Christ walked on in Jerusalem is still in existence today. In fact some of the old stones from Roman times with the ancient Roman marks are still in place. The road on top of the Great Wall of China still is used in some places. However, if a road is not used, it can fall into disrepair and its use will be abandoned. Likewise, the mind never normally loses a K-line, they simply fall into disuse. By employing Behavior Modification in the most extreme forms, alters are trained during programming to develop particular K-lines. Those K-lines will never be gone. Just like an alcoholic will always have an ability to go back to being an alcoholic. What can be done, is to build new K-lines that get more use. Since most deprogrammer are not willing to subject their clients to the same behavior modification techniques (based on survival & fear) that the programmers used, they must resort to building new K-Lines in the higher brains. The programmers K-lines remain dormant in the reptilian brain, the new behaviors that are taught to the alters are attached to the higher brains. Now what happens when an alter feels threatened? When their survival is at stake, the reptilian brain shuts off the higher brains, and the mind searches around for a K-Line that it can use. Lo and behold, the mind finds the old K-line and reaccesses it. This is why safety of the slave is so important to have a chance to develop strong new K-lines. When the victim reverts back to their old thinking, the victim will think that all has been lost, and that years of work have been lost. They may tell the therapist that they no longer trust the therapist and that years of work have gone down the drain. This is not so. The new positive K-lines are in the mind still. They will always be there. They simply need to be reaccessed and strengthened by use. When the survival instinct is triggered — “danger, danger” — no reassuring and no reasoning are going to break through, the mind under the control of the first brain is shutting down the higher thinking processes and putting its thinking energy into survival. Feelings are not facts, but the mind will be resistent to information that is coming in from the higher brains–unless it has been trained to let these higher thinking processes override survival instincts. This will help people understand why Jesus said that if you are not willing to mentally let go of the need to survive (your reptilian brain) and give your thinking to God (a higher conscious type thinking) you will not be able to have the spiritual walk needed to see God. (If you try to save your life, you will lose it. You must pick up your cross daily, that is sacrifice your survival instincts daily, and allow God to work His will in your life.) Christ also said that fear and trust are incompatible. He said that perfect love for God will cast out fear. In other words, a fearful person will have a hard time loving God. We must learn to conquer our fears by strengthening the higher brains (what people call higher levels of consciousness). The fifth brain processes concepts, works with abstract thoughts, and can pull up

Page 396 …

thoughts from various parts of the mind and do comparisons. The fifth brain is a reflecting meditating type of brain. It is capable of integrating many concepts together. In a sense it lives, it feeds off of thoughts. Marijuana triggers this brain. Guided drug trips in sensory deprivation tanks can be used to program this brain. The higher brains can develop dominance over the lower brains to such a degree that the survival instinct can be overridden completely, cases in point, Jesus and his apostles allowed their own martyrdoms, the Anabaptists under Menno Simons teachings on the Bible peacefully allowed their own deaths, and modern-day Christians under Bill Gothards teachings in Uganda allowed themselves martyrdom under Idi Amin rather than fleeing. These were all deaths for a higher cause, not deaths from mind-control. An alter who suicides the system is acting under the confusion of behavior modification where it is acting under the programming lie that it is protecting the system from greater harm. This is simply a misguided survival instinct. What this means is that safety and trust are inseparable issues. If front alters trust a therapist who is not protecting their system from their mind-control abusers, then it shows that the front alters are dissociated from the ongoing abuse. The alters that are not dissociated from the ongoing abuse are probably the ones that are helping hold up the therapy! – Why dont they trust the therapist? The front alters trust the therapist? After reading this, the reader can see why the deeper ones dont have trust. If the system sees that there are higher concepts at stake, that they have a role to play in helping other victims, they may be able to override their fears with thoughts from higher brains. Trust is in part going to be established by building up the higher brains. This is why spiritual issues should not be neglected in helping a victim. The first brain can also be worked with by working with the body. The body memories of torture can be worked on to help work out some of the body tension that helps stimulate the strong survival danger signals. Massage and some types of rolfing or yoga might contribute to re-orienting the first brain. The first brains thinking sometimes show up in body symptoms.

Page 397 …

TRUTH, discernment of

[For this section, we decided to let Fritz offer the reader some helpful hints about seeking and finding the truth. Then well add a few comments at the end. Fritz has a reason for approaching the subject as he does, so try reading through it first before judging it.]

Everybody has their own methods for figuring truth out. Some are finding it better than others. As with other things, there isnt one set way for determining truth. The procedures are going to vary from situation to situation, but there are certainly some useful tips that can be passed on from one truth seeker to another. Finding truth is not a matter of taste. One doesnt investigate the one-true god by deciding what god suits our tastes best — but lots of people do this anyway. As we set our personal criteria for what is truth, we will find others in disagreement with us. Ultimately, real truth is not something personal but something all truth seekers can agree upon. This is why Jesus Christs words are so powerful, they are eternally truthful. They are as much truth as they were when they were spoken. Even though truth is not relative, but is an eternal objective truth, God has given us free choice and a mind with which to choose what we want to believe. Many have mistakingly considered ones religious views as a matter of taste, not a matter of truth. That is perhaps the first hurdle to correctly jump in the search for truth–Is this a matter of personal taste or is it a matter of truth. What I eat for breakfast is my choice, which of the foods is most beneficial for my body is a complex issue of truth. Because the Watchtower Society teaches that knowledge about God is an issue of truth not taste, the JWs believe that they can apply rational thought in their search for God. The Jehovahs Witnesses have a book Reasoning From the Scriptures. The idea behind the title is a good one. There is a place for reason and logic, but we must be careful to

place the Word of God as the foundation from which we reason. Unfortunately, that is not what the Jehovahs Witnesses do. They reason that the God in 3 persons is unreasonable, because there cant be both one God, and 3 Gods, so they reject the Triune nature of God, even though the Scriptures are very clear that the Father is God Almighty, Christ is God Almighty, and the Holy Spirit is God Almighty. Three persons, one God. Sometimes we dont have enough understanding to reason from. The concept of three persons in one supreme being seems outrageous at first, and yet that is exactly what MPD (DID) is. That is one reason some people can not except multiple personalities either. If we reason from our past understandings, we may not be able to adequately explain new phenomena. The parallels between MPD and what the Bible says about God are enormous, once a person really gets a handle on how MPD really functions within the mind. There are so many misconceptions about MPD, and misconceptions about the “Trinity” (the word doesnt appear in Scriptures), that this subject really needs a book in itself to explain the parallels. But the bottom line is that we believe what God has written to us, and then we reason from there. If God says He exists in three persons, we accept that and then reason from there. We dont reason away what God Almighty says. This is where so many of us get ourselves into trouble. The Pharisees were able to make the Word of God to have no effect, by thinking out things. Thinking doesnt always take us in the right direction even if it makes sense. This is probably why some people have rejected logic and reasoning in their Christian walk. Logic is a function of a clear mind. The Scriptures show godly men reasoning things out.

Page 398 …

Being a reasonable person can be a good testimony for Christ. But we must always humbly bear in mind that our minds only have a small part of the facts and understanding about the universe and life that exists. If I understand one-billionth of what can be known about my situation, I suppose I am fortunate. God understands so much more. If His Word states something that seems unreasonable–I would rather trust His Word, than my own feeble understanding. However, if I begin to have thoughts that are contrary to the Word of God, and contrary to how I normally think, then logic helps me realize that these are not my own thoughts–they are the thoughts of demons. This is an example of how reasoning from Scriptures can spare us from trouble. When we mentally review how we have obtained certain thought patterns, if we acquaint ourselves with how evil spirits influence a mans thinking via our actions opening up portals and strongholds, then we can logically separate out those thoughts that are from God and those thoughts that are from Satan. Most fears are ungodly, and they come from Satans kingdom. Hope and faith come from God. Discouragement and depression are not given to us from God, they are given to us from our adversary Satan. There may be exceptions to this, but in most cases it is clear that Satans kingdom is here to steal from us peace, hope, love and faith, and is here to give us hate, fear, and discouragement. We have to learn to be happy. We have to allow God to bring us peace. Logically, if you want a happy life, you must go to the Kingdom that wants to bring you peace, joy, love, and happiness. People look for happiness in the strangest places! Logic-and reasoning will tell you that Satan cant bring you happiness. Logic can be helpful to us in our Christian walk. Examples were given of how that is true. We must be cautious in how we use logic. Logic is not to be used to overturn the Word of God. None of us are brilliant enough to challenge Gods Word. Logic & reasoning is how we protect what God has already taught us & placed into our hearts and consciences. As we gather information, we can take best advantage of that information if we separate the chaff from the wheat. Is the person giving this information speaking in generalities, or is he speaking about an exception to the rule, or is he speaking about a specific case? When someone speaks about their private thoughts, how they love someone, or have heartburn, their thoughts are private, we must accept that we only can approximately understand exactly what they are feeling and thinking. When we witness a car accident with another person, our perspective of the accident is our own private perception of the event–BUT other people can also witness the event. The car accident is NOT a subjective event, even though there is some subjectivity in peoples perception of it. The accident is not an idea it is an objective event. Modern philosophy has a hard time accepting this, even though it makes common sense. The events of that objective reality can be distorted or misreported and not reported in many different ways. However, the accident is an objective real event. More than one person can experience that reality. If we dream about an accident, then that is a concept. Concepts and what our judgement calls about what our senses have reported are two different things. We normally dont doubt what we apprehend. We normally do question the existence of what we mentally create (our ideas); that is until we come to someone who has been programmed and taught via behavior modification not to trust their own senses. The programmed slave loses the ability to discern what is a concept, merely an idea the brain has imagined, and what is actually something that has an external reality and has been apprehended. Hallucinations will mask themselves as perceptions, when they are not perceptions at all. Further, they are very

Page 399 …

suggestible. They have shut down their critical thinking and have an unconscious agreement with the programmer that whatever he says is truth. The movie/book 1984 which was written many years ago describes a time when society as a whole was under the mind-control of Big Brother. When the main character steps out of line, he is reprogrammed, by torture. The goal of the programming was to get this thought-offender to accept whatever truth the programmer wanted from him. The programmer wanted him to get to the point that when the programmer held up 4 fingers, the man didnt know what he saw, but if the programmer said that the 4 fingers were 5, then the victim would actually see 5. This is exactly where the programmers get their victims, and is part of the reason they no longer can trust their own senses. Can several people have a simultaneous hallucination? Yes, and during the programming and during the life of the mind-controlled victim, hallucinations that are experienced by several people are a fake perception that is even more difficult to reject because our normal basis for deciding if something is an external reality that is being apprehended, versus our own imagination, is that other people can also see (or experience) it. When several other people experience something, that is a common test that the event happened in reality. (This is the concept of having several witnesses.) However, witnesses can be mistaken. The victim of mind-control must be given more than a Bible –“Here, take this, this is the truth.” The victim of mind-control must take back what was stripped of them. They must learn to have that critical facility that has been stripped from them–the ability to ask is this an external reality that everyone can experience, or is this a perception, or a grand illusion that several people are only thinking.

Today, it is a fad to say everything is subjective. It is not. There is a reality. Our memories may or may not correspond to something that did exist. Memories can be perceptions and imaginations also, that mask themselves as experiences just like our hallucinations can. We can be skeptical about whether we have a concept in our mind that corresponds to what others could experience, or whether it is an imagination. But we can not accurately be skeptical of the existence of reality and truth. Since total skepticism of the existence of reality is self-defeating, the occultists have charged off in the other extreme, an equally wrong direction, and declared that if the mind has an idea, the idea must be attached to some reality, even if that reality is actually another magical sphere somewhere. This turns all fictions, visualizations, dreams, imaginations into some mystical perception of some supposed alternate reality. The truth is that these “magical realms” are shared hallucinations. No matter how many people have the same hallucination, that does not make that hallucination become a representation of some external reality. Reality is the world we live in together. The programmed multiple lives in their own private worlds. The therapist may have to enter that private world and bring the person back to the external world that humanity lives in together. If there is anything that highlights the differences between the external world of reality and the internal world of hallucination it is programmed multiplicity. Because the differences are obvious for the slave, there is no reason why they cant return to the world of reality. The problem that lies for some non-multiples (especially some psychotics, but for many people in general) is that they cant see the two tracks, they cant see the two worlds. I have seen Americans watching soap operas, sitcoms, and other shows, and then tell me that the shows are real events, and no argument would dissuade them. In fact, the philosophers Locke and Descartes both shared the same problem, even as philosophers they could not see the difference between external reality that is apprehended by our senses, and our own

Page 400 …

head-trips. As our senses gather in their sensory input, our minds go into gear to compare what they are sensing to what the mind has cataloged already. In other words, the mind is trying to make sense of what it is receiving. This is why we can “talk over someones head” or why I say that the common American has no frame of reference (& no world-view) to hang my information on. If we are unable to compare what we are sensing to anything else, it is unintellible to us. So learning is a building process, of comparing and building bridges from one item to the next. Our minds are masters at seeing relationships, but it still has to be a building process–whether the process is quick or slow. Some people want to jump over necessary steps of the building process, and read advanced level material before they are ready for it. That is one reason this book should only be read after a certain level of understanding is achieved. Detecting what is going on in the environment around a person is only part of what the human mind can do. It can also anticipate, plan, think, imagine, calculate, etc. The senses play only a limited role in our thinking. Sometimes we need to use common sense and realize a thought is merely a thought, and nothing else. Just because the thought develops in our mind, doesnt mean there is any external reality to it. Feelings are not facts. Recovering victims of mind-control should remind themselves of this one frequently, feelings are not facts. On the flip side, there are certain phenomena is life which demand explanations, such as how did an extremely well-designed incredibly complex system of life as well as an incredible planet come into being? This is a fundamental question of reality. Although the answer “There was an Almighty Creator” calls for us to employ our imagination to visualize what we cant see, that doesnt subtract from God being an external reality. Something is not negated in its existence just because we can imagine it, or havent experienced it yet. Jesus in a sense argued for the existence of the Holy Spirit, by saying it was something not seen and yet it was something experienced and something that created tangible results like the wind blowing through the trees. He was essentially saying, yes, the Holy Spirit (Holy Ghost) is real. Aleister Crowley, a self-made satanist who revealed much more about the occult world than the Illuminati families would have done, based his Thalamic law, “Do what thou wilt, is the whole of the law” upon the underlying idea that pleasure is good. Common sense will teach people that pleasure and good are not equal. This philosophy is hedonism, and leads to self-destruction, which is what Crowleys philosophy did to himself and others around him. Where this philosophy goes astray, is that Wisdom is good, but may not be obtained through simply pleasure. We may be pleased when we obtain Wisdom, but that pleasure in obtaining wisdom IS NOT wisdom itself but a by-product of having obtained a desired need. While thinking himself wise with all his satanic hedonistic cabalistic drug-sex magic, Crowley was going down a dead end. This is so obvious, that some modern thinkers try to revise the concept that pleasure is good, to the underlying idea that what is desirable for a man is good. But again this makes a mess out of things. People differ in their desires and this means what is evil for a victim of mind-control is good for the abuser. Betrand Russell connected to the Illuminati stated, “Ethics is the art of recommending to others what they must do to get along with ourselves.” This fits with the basic viewpoint of many people today who think that there are no moral truths, everything is relative and subjective, just an opinion. If we approach the subject from an understanding that the way we as human beings are constructed by God, our very human nature has created needs within us. If we make a moral judgement it is not relative but it is grounded in the truth that we have a real need, and these

Page 401 …

morals express a desire for the good that satisfying that need brings. For instance, a glass of water in the desert is a need, it is good. A glass of whiskey at the bar is a want, it appears good–but it is not a genuine need of the body. We ought to desire more of the things we need, but we often sacrifice these for our wants. Common sense teaches us a foundational moral law that we should desire what is really good for us. Good being defined as what mankind needs. If we know we that truly need something, then we know what is good, and we should desire having it. What sustains the universe? If we realize that God sustains the universe, then God is realized as a need, not a want. This explains why mankind is so busy with worship. Monkeys do not worship. Fish do not worship. But man tries to worship. Neither fish nor monkeys feel guilt because they do not sin. But man does, because man was given the free will to do what was right. What I am doing is laying the groundwork to show the reader that all these modern philosophies that say there are no absolute rights or wrongs, are not grounded in truth & reality. We as humans have needs, and to desire those real needs be met is good. Since the fall of man, which was the rise of religion, a great deal of muddying the waters has occurred. The fall of man paralleled the previous fall of Lucifer. The trauma-based mind-control is a mirror image of the fallen mind of Lucifer. At this point, – some of you readers will consider this to be wild preaching–because it is very unpopular to view the mind-control as something religious in nature. Because Luciferian gnosticism & Satanism are religions, its popular to ignore the religious side of the programming. To associate the occult with trauma-based mind-control seems to some secular therapists unnecessary. They want to sidestep the religious nature of the programming with the mistaken idea that they can sterilize what happens to the victim in strictly scientific terms. But if we dont dismiss the existence of good & evil, God & Lucifer, and we understand the mind of Lucifer/Satan, then we amazingly “just happen” to have the greatest explanation for understanding the trauma-based mind-control. [Now Cisco will pick up from here.] Lucifer wanted to steal Gods identity. Lucifer in his fall was stripped of his birthright, his identity and his rank, and was separated from truth. Lucifer goes forth to steal the identity & birthright of children, and to separate them from truth. This is just a small part of how the mind-control is a reflection of the mind of Satan. An entire book could be written on this subject alone. No matter how painful it is for a mind-control victim to realize what Satan stole from them, once they have acknowledged that, and begin to take back what God originally gave them, then the wisdom God will give, will bring knowledge. And that knowledge will bring understanding. And with that understanding the eternal life force (spirit) that the Creator gives each person can look into the deepest pit of hell and it will still see the light of that truth. And Lucifer knows that when you put light on darkness, there is a light at the end of the tunnel which will continue to break down the darkness. The day one seeks truth with his whole heart, is the day he will find it. That light will be a light on the hill that will prevail over darkness. You can be sure that if you are dealing with mind-control structuring, you are dealing with Satan the father of all lies. When the victim can acknowledge the crimes that were done against him or her self, then he is able to acknowledge what Satan is, the Father of all lies. If evil is recognized as evil, then seek the goodness of truth. The truth will open a doorway into the mind that brings growth, maturity, stability, assurance, a new awakening, and other exciting things. The battle for your mind is between truth and evil.

Page 402 …

ABREACTIONS, avoidence of

OVERVIEW. The original programming traumas are perpetrated by the programming cult because these traumas are dependably severe enough to cause the mind to split. Later traumas are the result of ongoing abuse by the slaves users. They may cause splits because the multiple has developed splitting as a natural mental reflex to difficult situations.

The original programming traumas are so severe that if the slave remembers them, the memories of these traumas are enough to splinter the mind again. Traumas that result from ongoing perpetrator use of the slave may not be so traumatic, but they will also bring with them painful body memories, confusion, and the potential to splinter the mind.

Until recently, the major thrust of the therapeutic community has been to try to push the victim towards abreacting the trauma, which is actually causing more psychological stress and harm than good to the victims mind.

The correct Goal & some Basic Techniques.

Memory work needs to be done with the goal of preventing abreactions. Memories can be looked at by journaling, being placed on internal movie screens (or VCR players), by artwork and a number of other techniques. Of course the programmers are now a step ahead of therapists and are placing in programs to prevent these non-abreactive memory techniques. We will review some of the techniques for dealing with – abreactions. They basically follow common sense. When a person has a memory:

they can be distracted to pull away from it,
they can intentionally encase the memory in some box, vault, safe, room or other storage unit,
or they can develop ways to slow down and tone down the affect of the memory so that the mind is cushioned from the severity of the memory.

As an alter struggles with memories, another alter can be intentionally shifted to hold the body. Some therapists will also develop a temporary safe room where an alter can retreat from memory work for a temporary respite. It is going to be nearly impossible for the victim not to suffer from their memories, in fact, every victim we know has suffered incalculable torment from their memories. The slogan “no pain, no gain” seems to have been written for their situation in life.

Page 403 …

ABREACTIONS, understanding

MEMORY FLASHBACKS. A review of history will show that victims of torture/trauma can potentially get memory flashbacks for the rest of their life. These memory flashbacks can be triggered in a number of ways, and the memories may lay dormant and hidden for any length of time. The disadvantage of having memories is that they often bring fear, body pain, and loss of sleep. They are like nightmares–although technically memories are different than nightmares in that they are more closely rooted to an actual torture/trauma. The person experiencing these flashbacks typically thinks they are going crazy. It is important for you to realize that millions of people who have been tortured have also thought they were going crazy, but that what was really happening is that they were having just like you a normal reaction to some very frightening events. To get flashbacks means that the mind is again trying to overcome a bad experience. Flashbacks are not a reason to panic—they are normal—and if a person can remind him/herself to stay calm as possible, one will get through them better. It may be difficult to stay calm during a difficult memory. But staying calm is one of the goals which can be worked toward and achieved. One reason that flashback occur during sleep is that the minds defenses are weaker during sleep so the resistance to the memory coming is reduced. There are a number of positive things that can be done in response to memory flashbacks. Although the memory flashbacks on the surface appear to be negative experiences–there also can be some positive benefits. If the memories are correctly handled they can break down the dissociation. The memories can be used to protect the person from future danger. What I suggest as a plan of action is that you accomplish several goals:

1. reduced and eliminate the feeling of passive helplessness that comes from not being able to control memory. I will suggest ways to control memory.
2. take measures during the memory to restore your contact with present reality.
3. continue to breakdown dissociation.

There are a list of things a person can try when flashbacks occur. Some will work and others wont. One may try these in the order listed:

a. Try to think of something that is opposite of what the memory is about or something that is incompatible with the event. If the event is centered around hate, think of an event that is centered in love.
b. Next, one might try to think of the negative consequences of going through the memory. This might encourage action to sidestep it.
c. Try an activity that will distract the mind.
d. Find out what triggered the memory flashback and then try to remove the flashback via the memory-on-a-movie-screen method or the memory-locked-in-a-safe-box method.
e. If nothing else try pushing it back from the mind–see if clenching your teeth and pushing your tongue hard against your palate will help.

To gain control of the flashback when it occurs here are some suggestions:

a. Learn and know of what situations cause certain flashbacks. This will give you a greater sense of control and lessen the panic that comes from certain flashbacks. Gaining control over flashbacks can seem like one step forward and one step back but eventually control is gained–sometimes without the person realizing the progress they have made.

b. When in a memory–first move a finger then bit by bit the rest of the body. Then start controlling your breathing (this can all be practiced anytime). Then get up and look out the window to prove to yourself that you are at home and not in the memory. Then write down the memory. This will help in several ways including the dissociation. If it gets difficult to write the memory–then interrupt yourself with

Page 404 …

quiet deep breathing. After writing down the memory–dont reread–but go get something to drink which will be calming such as a cup of coffee. If the relaxation is practiced and can be achieved in response to bad memories it will give you a sense of control over the memories. c. The victim can talk with their support person about what the trauma was and what it meant to you at the time it happened. This will allow you to achieve an assimilation of the experience into yourself. If you can discuss the event in full and the personal meaning you have a greater chance of conquering and controlling the flashback. It has been reported that memories that are too difficult for people to talk out because they have contradictory feelings, embarrassment etc. regarding them, will repeat themselves and the mind will often become obsessed with those difficult flashbacks. Talking them out can be healing. Why deal with memory flashbacks? One reason is that flashbacks intrude into the present and mean that you are pulled away from enjoying the present reality into reliving something in the past. Relief from flashbacks will help you, the healing victim, to concentrate better, get more pleasure out of being with others, and make life more enjoyable. Bear in mind also, that everyone who has been tortured goes through periods in time when they disconnect from others. This has been called different names such as “emotional anesthesia” and “psychic numbing” so dont be hard on yourself if you temporarily lose the ability to feel close to others. The torture was aimed at breaking the victims personality. Accepting that that was a goal of the perpetrators of the mind-control programming is a step in restoring the identity that could have been there. This leads to the next area of concern: the dehumanization.

DEHUMANIZATION. Because devaluation of another person makes it easier to torture them, devaluation normally occurs in the minds of torturers. They dehumanized not only to control you–but to build up their own image enough to partially justify torturing you. They most likely were also devalued and dehumanized in their own lives and passed on that devaluation. Realizing the reasons why dehumanization was carried out may help a person overcome the process. Another help is to set yourself up in situations where you have positive experiences using your talents and skills will help you overcome the negatives of dehumanization.

Page 405
p_page405.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:

goes into denial
learns a. not to trust anyone incl. self, b. since trust is the basis of communication they also learn not to be in touch with the world.

VISIBLE CLUES:
emotional distance
collecting spirit
clingy behavior or independent behavior
learning difficulties

INTERNAL CLUES:

lack of emotions
denial of abuse

Page 406 …
p_page406.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:

to guard itself it creates free floating fears
to further guard itself withdraws from people or acts aggressive toward others
splits off a part to take the trauma
tries to remedy by reaction in the other direction, i.e. becomes an obsessive caretaker of others
learns a. help & support do not exist, b. that there is no power against the programmers.

VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:

eating, sleeping and bedwetting disorders
nightmares
phobias
withdrawal or aggressiveness from others
obsessive caretaking

INTERNAL CLUES

DID (MPD)
Suicidal thoughts

Page 407 …

p_page407.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:
preserves a sense of the worldI must be bad. It was my fault.
preserves self-respectSince I didnt resist, I am at fault.
preserves good image of abuserI can continue to love him, because I was at fault.
preserves happinessWhat a thrill to be abused, I must have wanted this for being so bad.
learns to have a. a comfort zone of self-blame, b. to become a caretaker which sets the victim up for more self-blame when things go wrong, c. fantasize to stop the pain.

VISIBLE CLUES IN THE VICTIM:
wants to punish one self
sabotages self achievements & acts of love by others
isolates

INTERNAL CLUES IN VICTIM:
guilt, shame, & a “bad” self-image

Page 408 …
p_page408.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:
mind accepts the violations
concludes that all touching is a sexual come-on
learns a. confused & inappropriate behavior and values, b. perceives its value from being a sexual object

VISIBLE CLUES IN VICTIM:
far too-early sexual development
strong negative or positive feelings/reactions to sexual issues
confusion about sexual norms

INTERNAL
lots of sexual issues

Page 409
p_page409.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:
decides not to tell about the trauma, becomes secretive
believes it has a guilt to punish
either it decides to quit risking failure by reaching for success OR over tries to succeed but never feels successful.

VISIBLE CLUES:

secretive
self-destructive behavior

INTERNAL CLUES

feelings of guilt, shame, self-hate, and isolation

Page 410 …
p_page410.jpg

Childs subconscious mind protects itself:

creates amnesia walls & splits the mind into dissociative parts
the mind disowns the body
learns to a. dissociate as a defensive habit & b. to copy others in cult as role models.

VISIBLE CLUES:

no sense of danger
dissociative behavior
phobias
eye-rolls
sleeping disorders
inconsistent behaviors
lost time
denies acts that others have witnessed
moody
uses pronoun “we”

INTERNAL CLUES:

helpless feelings
no confidence
DID (MPD)
depersonalization
emotions locked up

Page 411 …

ABUSERS, confrontations or not

Several victims of mind-control have said that they felt the best pay-back that they could give their abusers was to get well. This is probably right. There wouldnt be any punishment that would do justice to the crimes that have been committed. We victims should try and fight evil with something positive, something good. But what about confronting an abuser, and letting the perpetrators system know the suffering theyve caused, etc. Just because the victim has worked through some issues, doesnt mean the abuser has. The abuser had to sear his mind years ago. What abusers do, is that first they sear their consciences and then they develop justifications in their mind for what they do. They are deeply entrapped in their own rationalizations. The Network has prepared them excellent alibis to “prove” they could not have done it. Talking to an abuser about your mind-control issues is like talking to a cement wall. All it will do is get the therapist and the victim into more problems. In some cases, the False Memory Syndrome has helped the abuser and the therapist ends up getting taken out of commission. Keep the therapy work private. Go toward health quietly. The world is not even ready to understand the healing of the victim. And the abuser is even less ready to be understanding. The abusers simply feel threatened. Some victims have a deep drive to make their abusers understand. They are struggling with the effects of the mind-control, and have not yet realized that the abusers are NOT their friend, but another multiple who is also deeply trapped in what they are doing.

Page 412 …

ALTERS, how to work with deep Illuminati alters (issues for therapists)

Up to now, therapists have chosen therapeutic modalities that resulted in avoiding dealing with the deep Illum. alters. One of the most acclaimed centers for helping programmed multiples only works on issues that presenting alters have, and uses electro-shock techniques to try to wipe out deeper issues in the mind. Other prominent psychiatrists who have travelled & trained other therapists how to deal with MPD/DID have incorrectly taught that right brain-left brain issues are simply a program. Therapists have by & large ignored Illuminati religious beliefs, which has insured that deeper alters are not going to present themselves to be ridiculed. Others have attempted to cast the deeper alters out, which in reality buries them deeper into the subconscious, where they carry out their influence at an even harder-to-find level. In fact, when this is being written in 1996, most therapists still remain ignorant of or in denial that the Illuminati exists. Our system has unsuccessfully looked far & wide for a professional who understands the deeper Illuminati alters. We believe this material will make a fresh and valuable contribution in the work needed to free Illuminati slaves. Therapists are in a difficult position to work on Ipsissimus/Grand Master alters or Grand Dame or Mother-of-darkness levels, because, before they can learn how to work with deeper parts, they must forget many things they have been incorrectly taught. Therapists need to see the interrelationships between Illuminati cosmology & beliefs and the programming that is carried out. Witchcraft rituals of the Illuminati are a form of deep level programming. This is why it is ludicrous

for Wiccan counselling centers to help mind-controlled slaves, & yet there are a number of licensed wiccan centers counseling multiples with programming. The very teachings of witchcraft are intertwined with the programming that needs to be disassembled. Several elements that are common to all forms of witchcraft are: a. the stimulation of an awareness of a hidden side of “reality”, b. the awakening and training of hidden powers of the mind, c. the intense training and discipline of the various levels of the subconscious mind. For instance, psychic abilities and astral projection are basic components to witchcraft. Witchcraft at the higher Illuminati levels is the skill to work in the subconscious mind & change consciousness at will. Witchcraft, especially the cabalistic and hermetic-based witchcraft of the Illuminati, understood how to work with the subconscious mind long before modern psychology existed. Modern psychology is actually based upon cabalistic doctrines. There is a one-to-one correspondence between Freuds theories and Jungs theories and the older witchcraft philosophies. The child, adult, parent of transactional analysis is simply the maiden, mother, crone triple goddess of the Illuminati. And these three parts of the mind have been well understood and manipulated in rituals for centuries. 2 important steps to take in order to help deeper parts are: a. realize that the deeper parts are centered in a trance state in their internal world, and are developed not to function in the conscious world, but are highly skilled to function in the subconscious mind, b. dream state therapy should be developed to help the deeper parts unravel their programming.

Page 413 …

CLONES

When the core is split, the dissociated parts that split when the child was in a rage are used to make clones. These little child parts are very small, and have not had a chance to grow up. The creation of clones is described in Vol 2. After they are discovered by the programmer he uses hypnotic magic to drop a robot suit over the child alter. The suits are made of different types of metal and there are a number of different types of suits. Often the children turned robots are given serial no.s. They may perceive themselves as military units. Clone splits are formed into armies that come to the front of the mind to protect the programming. They are like a nursery of screaming children. It is impossible for the front host alters to calm these clones down. What has been found to work on the clones from the 40s through the 60s programming is to put water on them. Water paralyzes them. Then one can go around to the back and find wires or switches on their suits. A switch may shut them off. Or perhaps the wires can be tampered with. When these little children are looked at, these parts still have probes and needles in them. These child alters need to go to an internal hospital, where they can mentally go through some care to get them relieved from the state they perceive themselves in. After they are out of their suits, the robot suits can be vaporized.

JUDGE ALTERS

Judge alters are alters who enforce the laws of the system, which of course are the guidelines & programming established by the programmer. In witchcraft paradoxes are used. Each split of the mind is valued. The alters, such as the judges, are mirroring their abuse. Fear is the basis of their obedience. They have seen the worst terrors. They have seen things others havent seen. They are structured along the lines of demonology, and they believe that they must answer to Lucifer. They have no doubt that they are going to hell. They believe the better they obey, the better life they will have in hell. Their obedience in keeping the rest of the system in line with the programming is their desire for a better life in hell, which they already have a foretaste of. Much of their programming was put in during the sensory deprivation, so they dont fully comprehend why they do what they do, they just believe that what they are doing is for their survival. Many of the deeper alters are functioning with a survival of the fittest attitude, where only the strong and obedient survive. They have been given the Spirit of War & they war for the system. They carry the full force of demonic possession. The starting point for many of these deeper alters is to realize they were programmed to their script. MIRROR IMAGES.The script for the mirror images came from God floating over the water in the Bibles Genesis. Mirrors of an alter are simply fragments of some alter. They are taught they are separate, but the separation is an illusion. There are several programming tricks they do with the child such as “This is your hand” trick, to confuse the childs mind about the mirror image. The splits are done in front of mirrors. “ITS THE MIRROR IMAGE ThAT IS GETTING HURT, AND HAS BLOOD ALL OVER IT, NOT YOU.” After the child accepts the mirror image as real, they put it into hiding with hypnotic suggestions, & they tell the child the mirror image split doesnt exist. The mirror image will take the programming traumas & the anger.

Page 414 …

HOW TO WORK WITH DEEPER ILLUMINATI PARTS (deeper issues for therapists)

The following are things for therapists:

STUDY:

a. how liluminati beliefs intertwine with programming
b. how the external Illuminati is structured
c. how to do dream therapy and to be sensitive to dreams

BE AWARE OF:

a. the Illuminati reinstates (reprograms) sealing programs over the dream state approx. every 3 years to stop revealing dreams from surfacing.
b. how Helping Alter can work deep in the subconscious to pull memories and to interact in a positive way with deeper parts
c. how programming hits at a subconcscious level. It may seem benign to the conscious mind, and yet be building up subconscious momentum and growing power.
d. how complex it is for deeper alters to separate objective & subjective realities.

TREAT WITH RESPECT

a. the training in programming that the deeper hierarchy alters have
b. that the deeper alters will respond in a manner that reflects their position, staus and training.

Page 415 …

BACKACHES, suggestions for body aches

Body aches, especially backaches, can keep the mind so preoccupied with pain that the rest of the mind doesnt work on other issues. The body, mind, and spirit all need healing. When building an alter system, the Illuminati programmers build in protective programming by using spinal surgical techniques. This kind of programming is usually done in a hospital. It is done by specialists who know the spine and the nerves. There are several variations of what is done. They will attach this spinal pain to a hypnotic trigger that if you remember such and such, you will relive the intense spinal pain. The variations on this, are to paralyze someone from the waist down, or a leg, or an arm. Using surgical drugs and procedures, they can even make a person “blind” by hitting certain nerves and this can be used to create blind alters, or blinding programs. Simple electroshock to parts of the back can be painful. The Illuminati also lay in the spirit Leviathan which lays on the spinal column and causes intense pain if the victim goes toward health. A number of Illuminati victims have gotten relief from intense back pain by deliverance from Leviathan. What this means is that a support team that is working on issues may want to have a good chiropractor on the team, and maybe a masseuse. Working the muscles of the body will free up trauma pains, and alters that get locked up throughout the entire body. Needles that are still mentally in the body are also locked up in body pain too. If a victim hits programming that flips them into pain, the alters will of course be preoccupied with the pain in the body and they will lose sight of the memory. Go directly to the pain and work on the pain issues, because the memory is sheltered in the pain.

Page 416 …

The following inventory can be worked on by a victim of mind-control as home work or the therapist can use the questions as a means to build rapport and understand the client better. In order to save printing costs this section will not provide room to write the answers down. Sheets of paper or a tape recorder are needed to record answers. Questions are numbered for easy reference. This inventory is for the therapeutic process–which means ultimately it is for the victim. The questions are meant to be a guide, feel free to speak about anything that pertains to each biographical time period. If something important happened that you want to report, you dont need a question to talk or write about it.

EVERY ONE HAS ROOTS. The following questions are about the clients roots. Roots are important, we need to know where weve come from to know where were headed. Understanding the clients family may reveal a great deal about the client. Learning ones roots can reveal important clues as to why things occurred in your life.

1. Tell the story about how your parents met and fell in love?
2. Tell a story that would show what your mother was like.
3. What can you say about your mother, do you know where she came from, where she was born and what her life was like before she met your father?
4. What are some of your mothers emotional traits, was she warm and loving, or strict, or nagging, or unstable, or humorous, how was she?
5. What was the best thing about your father?
6. What was the worst thing about your father?
7. What do you know about your fathers bloodlines, his genealogy?
8. What do you know about your mothers bloodlines, her genealogy?
9. Was there anything unusual about your mother or father?
10. Did your mother ever give any sex education to you, what was her attitude towards the subject in your view?
11. What was your fathers work?
12. What kind of bedtime stories did your father tell you?
13. Is there something important to say about your grandparents or greatgrandparents?
14. In what ways were your uncles and aunts important to you?

CHILDHOOD (pre-school) This section will be one of the most critical. Dont be embarrassed if you dont remember, just be open & frank, because this inventory is for you. The therapist needs to watch for protectors to surface with the “approved solutions”, & watch the different slants that are given by the client at different times to the same subjects.

15. What is your earliest memory? How old were you? Where did you live?
16. What do you know about your birth, were you pre-mature, were you c-section, were you tiny or frail?
17. Did you have older siblings who helped raise you?
18. What was the neighborhood like that you grew up in before kindergarten?
19. Did you ever get into trouble when you were between 3 and 5 years old?

Page 417 …

20. Were you ever sent to your room, or made to stand in a corner in your first few years?
21. How did your parents punish you?
22. Who disciplined you the most?
23. What kind of religious experiences did you have as a small child?
24. Who was more religious, your father or your mother?
25. Who was your first grade teacher?
26. What was your first grade teacher like?
27. Can you describe your first day at school?
28. How would other people have described you when you were a small child?
29. What kind of chores did you have as a child?
30. What kind of games did you play as a small child?
31. Do you think you had a happy childhood?
32. What are some of your favorite childhood memories?
33. What is your worst childhood memory?
34. How did you feel about going to doctors when you were little?
35. What did you want to be when you grew up?
36. Do you remember putting your teeth under the pillow for the tooth fairy?
37. Do you remember Christmas or some other holidays?
38. Did you know any crazy people when you were little?
39. What did you think about people who were a different race when you were little?
40. What did you think about Halloween when you were little?
41. Did you ever get sick when you were a little child?
42. Did your family go on any vacations, could you describe one?

ELEMENTARY SCHOOL DAYS. If the client is talkative, let them provide as much as they want. When dealing with victims of mind-control everything about their life tends to be a clue as to what has gone on. The therapist can trust their own curiosity and ask further questions. For some victims, their host alter will not have memories below the age of 18, or their memories will be spotty. However, the newer mind-control victims are getting better childhood cover memories laid in so that their mind-control is not so obvious.

43. Do you remember the first book you read?
44. What kind of things did your parents like to read?
45. What kind of toys did you have in elementary school?
46. What were some of your favorite games during your elementary school days?
47. Did you learn to play any musical instruments?
48. What were some of your favorite songs during that time period?
49. Did your family move a lot, and how did that affect you?
50. What was the worst experience that you can remember from your school days?
51. What was the best experience that you can remember from your school days?
52. Did someone in your class of the opposite sex have a crush on you?
53. Can you remember what was the most memorable gift that you gave as a child?
54. Can you remember what your favorite gift that you received was?
55. Did your family take vacations during your school years?
56. Did you have any strange people in your school or in your neighborhood, and how did you feel about them?

Page 418 …

57. What kind of pets did you have growing up? What happened to them?
58. Do you remember your tenth and eleventh birthdays?
59. List the names of your elementary school teachers.
60. Describe your elementary school building on the inside & outside.
60. What was the name(s) of the Junior High that you went to?
61. What was the most influential teacher that you had during your school days?
62. Did you hang around with any kids, and if so, what were they like?
62. What kind of neighbors did you have?
63. What kind of trouble did you get into?

HIGH SCHOOL & TEENAGE YEARS. The high school years are years when the child is meeting interesting members of the opposite sex, preparing for their future, and working at their first jobs. Its a time for new beginning as well as turmoils. It is also a time when the victim will be in many secret rituals, and will be used for many mind-control assignments. There are no right or wrong answers, if the client thinks of something else, besides what initially comes to mind, then it is quite alright to have several “most” events in answer to a “what is the most…?” type of question.

64. What was the craziest thing you ever did in high school? Why did you do it, and what happened?
65. Who was your favorite person during your high school days?
66. Who were your best friends during high school?
67. What is the funniest thing that happened to you as a teenager?
68. What did you expect to do when you graduated from high school?
69. Did you go to your high school prom?
70. Do you remember any of the nicknames you had for your teachers?
71. What was your favorite subject in school?
72. In your opinion, which did you like more in high school, sports or intellectual pursuits?
73. Could you describe what the high school building looked like?
74. Were you active in a church during your high school days?
75. Did you do any great activities with other teenagers in some religious club or sunday school group?
76. Were you a leader of any activity during your high school days?
77. What was it like going to the movies as a teenager in your area?
78. Who were your heros during your teenage years?
79. Who were the heroes of your peers when you were a teenager?
80. Did anybody ever accuse you of being dishonest as a teenager?
81. Did you try to pattern your life after anyone, if so who? do you still admire the qualities you saw in that person?
82. What kind of conflicts did you have with your parents?
83. What kind of conflicts did you have with your teachers?
84. What kind of conflicts did you have with your peers?
85. What was your attitude toward drugs and smoking during your teenage years?
86. Was there ever a point in time where you went against your parents wishes? tell the story about how you managed to get your way.

Page 419 …

ADULT LIFE. It almost goes without saying that the therapist is trying to build rapport with these questions not to interrogate, not to judge, but simply to listen and learn. Find out what was the most important thing(s) in the persons life. Find out what the client remembers that was interesting.

87. What kind of things were you involved in after high school?
88. Where did you go to college or trade school?
– 89. What was it like to leave home, to go to higher education or to be on your own?
90. Did you join any fraternity or sorority?
91. What was your major field of study after you left high school?
92. Did you have any part-time jobs, after you got out of high school?
93. Who were your best friends during the first few years after high school?
94. When was the first time you met your spouse? Describe the meeting.
95. Where did you live after you first got married?
96. How much did it cost for different items when you first got married, for instance, a packet of bacon, a gallon of gas,a dozen eggs, a hamburger?
97. What did the future look like when you graduated from high school?
98. What did the future look like when you graduated from college, or a trade school?
– 99. Do you think attitudes about sex have changed for the better or worse over the years? Why do you think attitudes are changing?
100. What did your family think about your first spouse? What were their reactions?
101. Did you have any common interests with your first spouse, & if so, what?
102. Who would you have liked to have married that you didnt?
103. How would you describe yourself in your twenties?
104. From where you are today, when did you decide upon your career? When did you first entertain thoughts of this career? Were the seeds of where your life has ended up present in your early life?
105. What do you consider your most important achievement so far in your life?
106. How do you feel about God, and could you please describe your image of what kind of person God is?
107. Did you have military service, and what was that like?
108. Are you a flashy dresser, conservative, sloppy, well-groomed dresser?
109. How important is it to dress well?
110. What kind of pets did you have in adult life?
111. Do you think much about death? Do you fear death?
112. What do you think happens to people when they die?
113. Did you ever have an ESP experience?
114. Did you ever have a ghost experience?
115. What do you think about magic?
116. What kind of foods do you like? What kinds of foods do you detest and why?
117. What did you think about Watergate?
118. Where was the edge of the city when you graduated from high school, has the city grown since then?
119. Is there something that we have failed to talk about that you feel is important?

There are reasons why each of the questions was selected and why it was placed in the order that it appears. Those reasons are based upon experience with mind-control victims. To prepare this list of questions we looked at several books that were designed to inventory a persons life. We were greatly assisted by William Fletchers book Recording Your Family History. Berkeley, CA: Ten Speed Press, 1989. The book is an organized guide to asking family history questions. This or other sourees might provide more ideas on reconstructing the clients bio.

Page 420 …

We will let our support person Fritz write about how a support person can deal with burn out: Allow me to start by saying, if youre feeling stressed at this moment, take a deep breath, close your eyes for a moment and then exhale and relax. Burnout hits people who have nothing more to give. When you have been stressed to the max, the rewards are not there, and you have all these nagging agitating issues. Even a well-working piece of equipment will eventually rust–so dont be too hard on yourself. Working with programmed multiples & implant victims will give a person long periods of distress, pressures from all angles, & a nauseating feeling that you are stuck and not going anywhere. I have always found that its healthier mentally & physically for me to be actively doing something, no matter how small against the mind-control, rather than being passive in difficult times. In fact, military units often find that their men handle stress better being on the attack than sitting around in a defensive mode waiting for the bombs to drop. I manage to keep a healthy positive outlook by continuing to take steps, even tiny ones. Attack the problem? You may feel like an ant against an elephant trying to bite off more than you can chew. There are indeed limits to what a single person trying to fly solo against the mind-control can achieve. Try to find some support from a few intelligent listening people. One therapist cries her heart out to God. Tears are not a bad idea. Did you know that tears contain stress hormones, so that crying actually empties the body of stress hormones. (Now wouldnt we like to see our clients do more crying?) If it doesnt seem like anyone, the client, friends, or God is listening to your difficulties, unfortunately your body quietly is. Emotions are the bridge between the body and the mind. Interaction between the two need emotions. Remember the reptilian brain controls the body, and is connected to emotions. The higher minds control thoughts, and they too are connected to emotions. Your body will respond to stress, with symptoms like higher blood pressure. Mine doubled in one year. Obviously, there is a price to pay for such challenging work. So where does this leave you? If you can connect with the tragedy of what is happening to your client, then therapy will take on a purpose. The price you pay will be worth every drop of sweat, or every diastolic & systolic number on your blood pressure. You may have to learn how to blow some things off. Multiples will say a lot of things. Everyone has buttons. Dont be hard on yourself that you have buttons. My favorite ones are:

Nobody listens.
You cant count on anyone.
Its never good enough.
Dont tell me what to do or think.
Is anybody thinking?

Can you identify with any of these, what is on your list of buttons? Some of us are like ballistic missiles. When our buttons are pushed off we go. Realizing that we have buttons, and how the firing mechanisms got put in during our lifetime, can be helpful to diffuse these. A person only has so much energy and when they are constantly going ballistic they burn up a lot of energy quick. And if you stuff it under the emotional rug–you will still bum out, because your body is connected to the rest of you, and all those unused stress chemicals are still there. In fact, support team members should look at symptoms like pain in the gut, headaches, pain in the neck and realize some of these are simply the stress of all that is being dealt with. Do you have unresolved emotional or physical pain, that are visible as buttons and pain?

Perhaps you are wearing down because you have self-doubts, and negative expectations. Who wants to be like the greek mythological

Page 421 …

Sisyphus who pushed a boulder up the hill, only to have it roll down again and again? Dont devalue your little forward steps. Keep taking those steps forward, and recognize your accomplishments. Perhaps you need to write out what has been accomplished for you the support person and the client. I discovered that progress reports have been very-encouraging and well received. Often when I thought that success was self-evident the system was not able to see any until they read the progress report. Each of us are unique, and I am in no position to tell you what will or wont encourage you or your client. However, some people have been helped by writing out all their self-doubts and then dumping them into a trash can. Lets face it, bad news is often not as bad as it seems; and good news is often not as good as it seems. Throw your doubts away, but do try and get some support. Even if you are creative and capable, when you begin to get exhausted you will begin to lose that creative edge to meet the latest challenge. Does the problem still seem too big to fix? Trying to figure out how to deal with all kinds of alters as well as people in the external world is a big chore, and the work keeps accumulating of things that need to be worked on with your client. I dont have all the answers, but part of the answer lies in remaining flexible, learning how to negotiate and communicate clearly with alters, and part of it lies in just accepting that some things come with the territory. The trust issues with programmed multiples are difficult and persistent. They will wear a person down, in the same fashion that having a boss looking over your shoulder the entire time gets old. Blow it off. It comes with the territory. And again, I cant repeat this enough we need to work in teams. I have been greatly revitalized by working with others.

If you think youve got problems, put yourself in the victims shoes! With several victims who have just begun, their alters asked how long it would be until they were well, & Ive told them, Your beginning a long journey, like walking from New York to California. If we have to walk the entire distance, its going to be a long journey. If we can do some flying it will go quicker.” I was trying to balance the enormous amount of work that needs to be done, with the actual truth that some of the better methods can get a great deal done in short intense periods. I want the victims of mind-control to see the hope. In order for victims of mind-control to obtain better results, and to minimize burnout among therapists/support persons, I suggest that we carry out an ongoing process to weed out self-defeating habits and behaviors, we continue to learn new techniques for helping mind-control victims, and that we continue to give ourselves a chance to grow, and learn too. After all therapists have needs too. I think the lack of recognition by people that therapists are people contributes to “therapeutic chronic fatigue”. While the client is wanting to discover their feelings, the client is expecting the therapist to bury the therapists own feelings. I think that it is healthiest for the support persons to actually touch base emotionally with everything that is happening to both the client and the therapist. In the long run, I believe that burn-out will happen lots slower if the support persons are emotionally invested in the work, rather than simply being a paid automaton. Therapists will have less stress, when they have someone that can mentor them. Victims are tough, they are survivors of a lot of abuse, & they often survive incompetent therapists. What may seem like a tragedy for your multiple may not derail the therapy as much as the novice might expect. I not suggesting an uncaring attitude, Im just saying that experience brings some calmness. Perhaps youre not in position to put the time & energy into the client that your client wants. Sometimes we dont have perfect answers. If you are giving it your best shot, who can complain? Be kind to yourself.

Page 422 …

If all alters had the same thoughts and were in agreement, this book would not be needed. The essence of why trauma-based mind-control is so successful is that their are substantial differences between the various alters. Those differences allow the Illuminati to create good front alters as covers. Those differences allow the Illuminati to maintain control and prevent the system from finding their freedom. Incompatibilities and conflicts between alters is a given from the get-go with a DID client. The support team may hear of light and dark sides to a system. Internal persecutor alters are a given. Alters that self-mutilate the body have been programmed to do it. Psychologists have been baffled at the hate that some alters have for other alters or for those other alters body–which they dont perceive as their own body. The longer the programming goes on the more established the self-persecuting alters become. When dealing with such alters, the support team must not be judgmental. These are simply hurting child alters doing what they have been programmed to do. They are simply trying to do their job right. Without reinforcing these alters dangerous behaviors, it is possible to give them some attention and friendship. They are not used to holding the body and will tire of holding it after a few minutes. Having them out regularly may diffuse some of their rage. The therapist should not scare them by threatening to get rid of them, or kill them, although occasionally they need to be restrained by a support person, for instance if they are trying to mutilate the victim with a knife. These persecutor alters can have their identity validated, they were just trying to help the system by doing the job that was expected by the programmers. The persecutor alters may often be the ones that took the pain for the “a” alters that function so well in life. When the host alter acknowledges the existence of the persecutor alter, and the persecutor alters pain & needs, it helps remove some of the animosity in their relationship. Alters can write each other letters. Because most systems are creative, they can use their creativity to think of some way to resolve the conflict, if they try. However, the answer that may occur to some readers, to internally lock up persecutor alters is not a good idea. Someone in the alter system must be the light on the hill, that moves toward freedom. Generally that will be the front host alter that came originally came into therapy. It may not be. Sometimes the original “person” who came in for therapy, dissolves into a mass of different personalities, and the therapist has trouble knowing who now is the client. The answer is the entire system is, they just dont know it. And who speaks for the system? For instance, one alter says for the therapist to quit working with the system and another says they want the therapist to work, but only the non-cooperative alters show up for the sessions? All of our old ways of looking at people are obsolete, and the support team will encounter difficulties that boggle their mind. One way to overcome some of this is to treat a system as a city. How did God treat the church of a city? How does one relate to a city of people? How does one get cooperation in a city. Within an alter system, the change for health has to come family by family. One family of alters after another family must make the choice “I want to change direction. I dont want to be like my abuser. I dont want to conform to the programming.” Many alters will not really know what is going on, they will only have a sense of it. They will sense, “Something is wrong here.” That may be enough for them to make a decision for a change of direction. Persecutor alters can learn not to act out. Alters can be given another script. Each alter can be shown that the system has gratitude for the part they played in the systems survival. Things that are helpful for alters are good reading, good friends, support groups, and

Page 423 …

learning from each other internally. Some alters can clearly see the good from the bad, some have very limited understanding. The system can begin taking their power back. The alters can work as a team, and become co-conscious. Responsible alters can be given the care of other alters who need attention. Its somewhat like how a teacher may delegate some children to be leaders so that they can help the troubled children. Internal peer pressure can work for good too. And alters can pray for each other too. Light side alters can form prayer circles or prayer chains. Even non-multiples have ego-states that can present problems, such as the part of you that wants to eat too many sweets. How is this overcome? By mental discipline. It will take some mental discipline for the victim to grow. Alters need to change their thinking from “I cant to I can.” Get rid of “I cant.” Getting rid of fear is a big step in overcoming alter conflicts. This is just one more reason why safety for the system is so important.

Most competition for having the body by alters occurs during the following times:

a. when cult programming goes off, and part of the system is trying to go to a ritual or a drug run, and the light side alters are holding the body.
b. when something exciting or fun is happening and everyone wants a piece of the action.
c. when alters are in conflict over goals or in conflict about what the system is doing in therapy.

Originally, the alter switches were subconscious and carried out mainly by the handlers. After getting to know ones internal system better, the alters can begin to control their own switching. The alters need to build harmony. If they change the internal job description, or give an alter an external job, then that alter needs to be allowed to have that role. The alter can be asked internally, “What would you like to do?” and then give that alter a chance to develop that. Give everyone an important role. After a while of working together, the alters begin to get co-conscious. After alters are co-conscious, the conflicts will cease between them.

Page 424 …

WARNING!!!

This page is not to be read by any victims of mind-control, no if’s, and’s, or but’s. Reading this material may be highly lethal — it will trigger powerful suicide programs in some victims of mind-control!!!

CORE ISSUES

The core issues are issues that concern the basic survival of the mind. Therapists have blamed victims for not cooperating in integrating the core, when a fuller understanding of the dynamics of programming shows that the victim is only attempting to protect himself. In 1960, J.D. Sutherland at the second Tavistock seminar on mother-infant interaction in London presented his work which was entitled “The concepts of imprinting and critical period from a psycho-analytic viewpoint.” This was reprinted in a book Determinants of Infant Behavior II. Sutherland discovered that traumatic frustration experiences in a childs early development set up subsystems in a person, which continue to seek expression, and are relatively little influenced by subsequent experiences. The formation of social relationships by an infant relates to the concept of imprinting. Researchers have not sorted out all the complex processes, but imprinting researchers feel confident that imprinting in humans has some parallels to precocial birds. They found that newborn babies less than a day old will follow a real face much more than a mannequin. This proved for instance that babies are programmed prior to birth to respond to human faces. There are obviously some built-in mechanisms to human thinking. The human brain is actually 7 brains. The lower three brains are: one, the medulla; two, the pons; and three, the cerebellum. On top of the pons, is the fourth brain, the mid-brain. The mid-brain is the central brain linking the 3 higher and the 3 lower brains. It relays messages back and forth. It regulates the life force, and serves as a regulator to states of consciousness. Secretions in the fourth brain create the emotional construct of “me. If traumatized, such as during the splitting-the-core trauma, the mid-brain does not secrete the peptides or endorphines which relate to the self-sense that is attached to a sensory experience. In other words, when the core is split, the mid-brain ceases to secrete the peptides that emotionally connect its potential sense of self to the sensations of the body. The mid-brain is also the area that is imprinted with roles. Each one of the 7 brains that make up the entire structure called the human brain is capable of having feelings. This is one reason why we can have “mixed feelings” about one item. What seems to occur during the splitting of the core (referred to as the Primal Dissociate Experience PDE), is that the mind decides that survival is dependent upon not identifying with what is happening. In a sense it decides that death to the self is a type of survival. The mind creates dissociated “ego states” (what Sutherland called “subsystems”) to deal with these difficult situations that it refuses to accept into its memory as happening to itself. Deep level ISH (internal self-helpers–perhaps Guardian angels) have been successfully used to reintegrate the PDE held in that special part of the mind back into the mind.

Page 425 …

When the brains senses try to record the PDE, the mind disconnects itself from the experience. Body memories remain of the experience, and dissociated memory fragments. The mind disassembles its concept of self. It decouples itself from existence and goes into hiding. The rest of the victims life will be spent by the “core” retreating deeper into hiding. When the mind, decouples itself from the body and takes itself into hiding, it permits dissociated pieces of the mind to pick up the abuse. One of the positive pieces of the original splitting experience will be used to create a host(s) personality. This is the person that will front the system. (Shortly an entire explanation of all this will follow.) The retreating “remnant of life”, after it has let the self die and the mind be splintered is really only that part of the mid-brain which regulates the life-force and the soul. There is no alter that is the real core. ANY alter that claims to be the core, is a false front developed by the programmers. The real core is an essence–the soul, the deep part of the mind that remains alive when the central controls of the fourth brain completely decouples itself from identifying with life. In reality, the area of the brain that is normally imprinted by the events of life and grows up with a concept of self has decided to separate itself from external reality and goes into hiding. A variation of this is autism. In this case, the complete mind retreats from reality, rather than the soul. Many therapists ignorantly set their primary goal with DID programmed multiples to be the integration of the core. They are ignoring the fundamental issue for the victims mind. The fundamental issue is that the cores survival demanded separation from external reality, and the creation of separate dissociative states to contain the traumas being heaped upon the victim. The driving motivation at the deepest level of the mind is to preserve the safety of this elusive core. Traditional therapies have worked against helping victims, because these therapies attempt to expose the core to reality, which aggravates and strengthens deep resistance by the victim to therapy, because the decoupling from reality is the imprinted survival mechanism of the mind. The Illuminati try to insure that the core never wants to rejoin the world by:

a. programming many alters to believe that they will go psychotic or kill themselves if the core is touched,
b. that trauma keeps the core distant, therefore, the greater the victims ongoing abusive relationship with the cult, then the greater the “safety” of the core.
c. internal worlds are created with walls protected by demons and suicide programs to prevent alters from reintegrating or connecting with anything else such as the core.
d. internal conflicts are set up to keep the alters fighting and disconnected from each other. Alters which fear the abusers must somehow resolve their fear with alters who identify with and mimic their abusers. The mess that is created, sets up an environment that places the core in an impossible situation. If the sense-of-self were ever to return to rejoin reality, how would it ever resolve all these conflicts or live with such a mess in reality? The sense-of-self may subconsciously give its energy to part of the mind, but it is not doing so in a conscious manner, because it has detached itself from identifying with what is going on.

Page 426 …

The Illuminati perceive the core as that soul, that breathe of life that God breathed into Adam, to make him a living soul. This is not entirely off-base. The energy of an alter system comes from that 4th brain which is also that area of the brain that is involved with ones sense of self. The programmers perceive that the cores existence only remains in its ability to create parts of the mind to maintain its life. The core is like a soul–perhaps it is the soul of a person, and it creates alters to maintain its own integrity and safety. The Illuminati carry out a final ritual when a hierarchy person is ritually murdered where the successor sucks the dying persons last breath out in order to capture the soul. Whatever the exact substance and nature of the core, whatever the detailed mechanics within the brain were when it dissociated itself from reality, the core still remains a very touchy issue for therapists. Therapists should approach alters that are core splits with great gentleness, honesty, love and kindness. Back door techniques should be used for talking through to a system of alters without attempts to go directly toward the “core”. Attempts to go directly toward the core will most likely be frustrated and stopped by the victims alter system, but the energy that is wasted in such a move is not healthy. If a child victim were never to suffer trauma after the initial core split, the programmers discovered that at some point years down the line, the core will want to reconnect to reality. Now that we have explored some of the basics concerning the core, it is time to discuss the deeper realities of what happens to the core during programming. This information has never seen the light of day. We are able to provide it, because sad-to-say, our system had a level of programming alters who programmed and helped with the tests that showed what we are about to reveal. Until recently, the world (with the exception of the programmers) was too iguorant to be able to understand what we will reveal. We trust that there are a small group of therapists that are now ready to utilize the deeper secrets of what happens to the core. Remember, that the Vol. 2 book discussed the PDE, the Splitting of the Core trauma. This is actually a long series of traumas, that culminates in the mind deciding to split itself with dissociative barriers. This original PDE trauma provides some parts of the mind that love their master and some parts that fear (fear as in raw terror) the master. These two themes–LOVE & FEAR– are skillfully used by the programmers to build a protective shield around the core for the front part (host part) of the system. The front part is built from the first PDE and then it is left in relative “peace” so that it has enough stability to function in the real world. That doesnt mean the front has a life of ease, it just isnt subjected to what the deeper parts have to endure.

The deeper parts will be derived from the second major programming trauma of the system. But before we get into that, lets briefly touch on the LOVE/FEAR issues that protect the core. The love that the core has for its primary caretaker (refer back to Vol. 2, chptr. one, where it describes the excellent caretaking

Page 427 …

& love bonding) is powerful and pertains to parent-young imprinting learning. There is a susceptible period that is built in during those first two years, where the psychic organizer emerges. (Refer to Hess, Eckard H. Imprinting Early Experience & the Developmental Psychobiology of Attachment, p. 340.) It has been clearly demonstrated by scientific research that the baby has an innate drive for love from a mother figure. This love is a primary need of the infant–without this love, some babies give up and die. This is not surprising, many people can realize this without the specific scientific proof. That primal need for love is exploited by the programmers. The parts of the mind holding this powerful primal love will split from the parts holding the raw terror of the PDE. When one tries to approach getting to the core from the host level, the alters holding the love of the master will protect the core. What has been discovered then is that the fear then protects that love. There are lots of silhouetted parts brought into this love-fear relationship of alters. This love-fear relationship has defeated the best therapists, because until the therapist can unravel such situation and these issues the mind will not let them get to the real core. Because the basis for the original splitting was RAW TERROR on the part of the core, it goes into hiding. It is very difficult for the core to be accessed, because he/she will only appear if he/or she has absolute and great trust in who is calling it up. As far as we know, there has never been a genuine core accessed by anyone outside of the Illuminati/& other programming cults. The Illuminati must have a very caring Mother-of-Darkness establish a trust relationship with the core BEFORE the PDE. This tender loving Mother-of-Darkness then can be used to pull up the core for work. Because our system (your author Cisco) was noted for its tenderness, we often received the job of being the “Mother” for systems which were being programmed. That is why we can pass on so much of the real secrets of what the core is all about. Hypnotic access codes are given to the core, which work only if used by that individual which the core greatly trusts. Working with the core splits which have the love/fear dichotomy does not establish rapport with the core. The real core has retreated far into the mind–under the basement of the mind, and lays under the hell pit that is built by the Illuminati at the basement of the mind. (What this means is that some of what was written in Vol. 2 about the carousel was cover programming. Splits from the core are strategically placed in the system to make those who work very hard think they have gotten to the core. This is not just for the protection of the programming, but this safety feature also protects the very life of the programmed multiple. It is not a safe thing for a programmed multiples core to be played with.) When a tender mother pulls a core up, what will she find? The core comes up in its fear. Centuries of Illuminati programming experience have clearly demonstrated that the core is the only part of the mind that has a true awareness of itself, such as its age, and a reality of its own. However, because the core stays in the basement of mind, it does not experience life. When it is pulled up, it will look around, notice that it has aged, wonder where the years have gone, but it doesnt go into denial or into psychotic fantasy or some other defense.

Page 428 …

It will simply accept reality, and reject all the fantasy. The core will NOT remember its memories of abuse. It may have some issues regarding some things, but its thinking is healthy and true to itself. Again the core is the only part that is true to her or his self. The programmers do use the core for some types of programming, but not in the sense that they use alters. The host (front) personality that lives in the day-to-day world will be strongly grounded in reality, but in a different way than the core. With the exceptions of the few host personalities that experience life day-to-day and the core, who can somehow access the truth when it awakes and comes to the front of the mind, MOST of the alters live at the age they were created at or have been hypnotically assigned. They do not experience life in a 3-dimension matter-space-time world. Life is 2-dimensional, without a concept of time. The Illuminati prefer they dont wear watches for this reason. After lots of integration work, trust work, and memory work, it may be possible to access the core through some of its closer splits. Before discussing the second major programming trauma to the core, it is extremely important to disclose a major secret that the Illuminati programmers came up against. In fact, due to their prideful beliefs that they were gods, it was a rather touchy sensitive subject to talk about when we worked with major programmers. In spite of it being a touchy subject, it was such a major subject, we did have some conversations concerning it. The programmers called it “THE ETERNAL LIGHT”. It was also referred to as “the SOUL”. Different programmers speculated about what this light was, a few thought it was the Guardian Angel that God assigued to each person, one thought it was the part of man that would face Almighty God on judgement day, and “bow its knee”. (If its hard for the reader to conceive that Illuminati programmers know Biblical verses such as “all knees will bow before God” and theological concepts, then read Aleister Crowley, who as a Satanist, knew Bible concepts and theology in detail. Also remember, some Christian ministers have a secondary vocation as Illuminati programmers.) It can be understood why programmers (who of course were Illuminati masters & adepts) would call this LIGHT “the soul” because they were steeped in Greek philosophy. The concept of the immortality of the soul was an idea of the mystery religions of Babylon, and was elaborated upon by the Greek philosopher Plato. This greek philosophical idea of the word “soul” clouds the biblical meaning for the word. In the Hebrew scriptures the word “soul” is the Hebrew word “nephesh” and in the Greek, it is “psykhe”. In the Word of God, Genesis 2:7 states, “And the LORD God formed man of the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living being (nephesh).” What is significant here is that man was not given a soul (nephesh), but rather “became a living soul”. The Greek scriptures also say in 1 COR 15:45, “The first man Adam BECAME a living soul (psycke)”. It is clear from many other scriptures that soul (nephesh and psykhe–psykhai in plural form) meant the body and mind of a person. This nephesh can die. EZE 18:4b states, “The soul

Page 429 …

(nephesh) who sins shall die.” However, though the soul (mind and body) dies, the spirit returns to God, who gave it. ECC 12:7, “Then the dust will return to the earth as it was, And the spirit will return to God who gave it.” The Bible uses the Hebrew word ruach and the Greek word pneuma for our word “spirit.” It is very clear in numerous scriptures that the spirit is a powerful active force which has intellect. It is a person. The Holy Spirit could be blasphemed, and lied to. In turn it taught, and spoke and comforted. If a spirit can speak, teach and comfort, what is it? In programming, we programmers came in contact with this spirit that God places in each person, and it caused us fits. Each persons God-given spirit was a powerful light that had intellect which attached itself to the core, but could be separated from the core. When the core comes up, this attached light form (the God-given spirit) would come up with it. This God-given spirit had no memory of abuse, it simply had energy, intellect and a power to protect the core. The essence of this God-given spirit was impossible for pre-verbal children or young children to describe. It has been the object of scientific research. One thing that the Illuminati have long known about this God-given spirit–it never works, it never takes on any responsibilities, like the entire rest of the system will do. The rest of the system will be a system of dissociative pieces of the mind, and alters who often have some type of job. This isnt the case for the God-given spirit, or what the programmers called THE ETERNAL LIGHT. From experience it is also clear that the eternal light, although it wasnt the core, somehow was a reflection, a total reflection of the core. We knew these things as oath-bound Luciferian programmers, long before we ever contemplated getting to know the Christian God. The Spirit was an intelligent life-force, a preserver of life. When the major programmers got into big trouble and their child slave was going to die, go insane or was splintering uncontrollably, even though they disliked the ETERNAL LIGHT because it was more powerful than they were, they would call it up, and get it to assist in bringing healing, life, and integration to the victim. This God-given spirit was like Gods own spirit, in that it gives its help to the good and bad alters, the just and the unjust alters. It is reminiscent of Christs words, “Your Father in heaven…He makes His sun rise on the evil and on the good, and sends rain on the just and on the unjust.” MT 5:45 The Eternal Light can integrate parts of the core or as far as that goes any alters that have split. It is so powerful that the Programmers know that if they pull it up and attach it to alters that they are torturing, that it will provide a protective covering so hard that they cant cause the mind to splinter. Another thing that centuries of programming experience has shown is that the eternal light does not know that it is connected to the core. The God-given spirit needs to be taught if it is know that it is connected to the core. The programmers of course do not teach this to it. The Illuminati have done lots of tests (and we observed some of these) where the core and its God-given spirit were allowed to spend positive time with a portion of alters. The core and its

Page 430 …

spirit would automatically integrate all these parts back together. Therapists spend hundreds of hours trying to get cooperation between alters, and yet the core and its spirit can integrate them in a flash if given a safe opportunity. Now youre beginning to see the power of a safe environment for the core. However, the top therapists (Dr.s of Psychiatry) are out on speaking circuit teaching that it doesnt matter if your client is safe, you can still accomplish good. As a victim would you like to cross the Pacific swimming or flying in a 747 jet? Or to make the analogy more accurate, which choice would you want if you couldnt even swim? When Fritz, our co-author worked 24 hours a day to provide our system a safe place, numerous therapists and deliverance ministries came out of the woodwork to publicly attack him. A few wise people are beginning to realize that safety of the victim IS THE NUMBER ONE ISSUE, AND THE BEGINNING ISSUE. If the victim is left alone in safety and with trustworthy loving people, at some point the core and its God-given spirit could integrate everything back in an effortless manner. Certain people are beginning to realize that the main part of a treatment plan is safety. (Unfortunately, the safety issues are far more vast than therapists care to admit. This book and the Vol. 2 Formula book are laying the foundation down for how varied and technologically advanced their control is. An afternoon with a Christian minister is not going to provide the security for the mind to let down its protective mechanisms. What is happening when skilled Christian ministers access what they think is the core, is that they are getting at best core splits. Having core splits heal is very powerful. That means that foundational sections of programming are automatically ripped up. One major drawback that is preventing more success is that the core is not understood, and the issues of safety are not being understood and addressed. When the God-given spirit joins itself to a group of alters, the Illuminati testing shows that it can take on a memory, bring the core along, and make that section the leader of the pack in the mind. In fact, knowledge of this is going to be used unfortunately for great evil, rather than for the good of humanity. Soon the Anti-Christ is to take power. At pre-arranged points in time, the hierarchy alters are to be given the core and the Eternal Light, and the rest of the minds of these slaves will be placed hypnotically under the hell-pit, where the cores are presently asleep. This means thousands of hierarchy Illuminati members will switch from their Christian host personalities, into people who day-to-day have very strong luciferian personalities which serve the Anti-Christ. Therapists, who have spent years in agonizing patient work using primitive often-damaging methods to help their programmed multiples, are going to see their work go down the drain literally overnight. A therapist, who has spent 10 years piddling around with stabilizing a few front alters, will find they no longer exist within the working part of the clients mind. Some of these therapists are even targeted to be killed. Some of these therapists are Illuminati multiples themselves, who will go back to continue helping with the large-scale operations of mind-control programming.

Page 431 …

In order to deceive both the therapists and the victims themselves, the programmers carry out several well-designed, excellently executed deceptions. An early split of the mind is pulled up which will perceive itself as light. This part will be shamed and called “bad magic, and treated like it is the core. It will then be placed in a box and sent into the outer-space of the victims mind. A few young watcher alters will see this, and believe they have spotted the core being placed in a box. This light will be allowed to come up to help the system when it is in trouble. Because it is not the real core, it cant protect other alters. When the alters in trouble see that they are not being helped, they feel betrayed by the core, and feel helpless. They have no idea how powerful the real core can really be. In fact some alters are programmed to believe that the core is responsible for their problems. Some of the alters walk around internally with a bad attitude toward the core. The programmers put the core to sleep with the sleeping beauty story.

Another early core split will be placed in the carousel, along with 3 demons ask to function as a false trinity, and many mirrors for entrapment. Other core splits will be placed as blackmail in special castles. These will often be called the core” by the programmers in order to confuse the victim. The second major core programming trauma takes place in a sensory deprivation tank under a controlled LSD trip. Readers can consult Chapter 3 of this Deeper Insights book, approx. page 28-32 for a description of how the sensory deprivation tank programming under LSD is carried out. The initial sensory deprivation trauma is done with the core and it shows no mercy upon the mind of the victim. The Illuminati want to have the victim go through the eight emotions and the five senses, in other words 13 categories of splitting. During the sensory deprivation experience they want the victim to go through love, fear, anger, confusion, pain, shame, despair, self-hate, and then the loss of each of the five senses (one by one) taste, hearing, pain, hot-cold, seeing, and finally a sense of being nothing. The mind of even the child victim is vast. As the lonely isolation and torture begins in the isolation tank, the mind finally reaches a point where it begins splitting and splitting. When the child is splitting due to fear, at some point the mind reaches exhaustion of this feeling, and begins entering into another response, perhaps anger. The mind will unravel in dissocation with the new emotion until again the mind switches and tries another response to its entrapment. The body is wide open for demonic forces to take advantage of the pained/drug state of the childs mind. The Illuminati work to demonize the child while it is suffering under the full impact of the sensory isolation tank. Gradually the child begins to die. As the mind under LSD begins to feel its molecules evaporating into nothinguess, the child approaches death. The mind gives away the body. Then the spirit–the Eternal Light leaves the body. After years of experience, the Illuminati has scientifically figured out how long they can wait after what they call the “soul”–the God-given spirit leaves, before they hit the child with electroshock to revive its life. The core really believes it has died. (Chapter 10 of this book addresses the manipulation of near-death experiences by the Illuminati.) The Illuminati literally snatch the life of the child back into its body.

Page 432 …

Now the job comes to take the 13 different stages and to build alters from those different dissociative states. From the state where the core has given up identity with its body, no longer sees itself as human, and considers itself dead, the Illuminati will take these hundreds or thousands of dissociative pieces and program them to see themselves as butterflies. In the sensory deprivation tank they are like tiny fficks of light. But the hypnotic suggestion is given that they are butterflies. This is just one of many reasons why the term Monarch programming is appropriate. These parts of the mind will make up one of the most secret parts of an Illuminati system. We are now revealing this secret grid for the first time. The butterflies are placed into the first grid of alters near the core. This grid forms a net around the core. These butterflies are floaters, that encircle the core. This is the sixth grid, but in Illuminati programmer parlance the grid is called a “DIMENSION”. These protective butterflies are dehumanized and hold the victims final fear as the victim died. Only four strong splits from this time period of the tank trauma are not made into butterflies. They are made into four cornerstones (also called the “FOUR GATES TO HEAVEN”, north, east, west, and south. These become the points of the compass upon which the system of alters will be structured. The four gates to heaven create a foundational pattern for an internal clock, a compass, and a seasonal/ritual clock. Another set of alters that will come from the tank experience are the gems. The gems are discussed in Vol. 2. They will be placed in the first dimension, along with a carousel. From the gems, ribbons will be created that run to the internal computers. The ribbons will have to learn access codes and other codes to mediate between the gems and the computers on each of the levels (dimensions). Each of the six main dimensions (also called sections on the alter grids that the handler carries around), will have a mirror. Of course the programmer can create any configuration he wants, but the 13 x 13 x 13 cube is a very common Illuminati system. Other common configurations area sphere, and a double pyramid. The Illuminati like to give a 3-D effect to their alter systems. The sequence of splitting alters from alters goes horizontally and vertically and downward. To chart out a genealogy of the time sequence on how alters arrived becomes a series of breaks in several directions. Needless to say, the programmers do chart all these breaks. They also keep a resevior of unused clean slate alters. The programmers are unable to touch the God-given spirit. This Eternal Light remains unsplintered and powerful throughout the life of the victim. It is hidden along with the core to prevent integration of the victims mind. While it is possible for the cult to bring the core up, it doesnt serve any purpose for them to injure the core after they have created a system. There will always be a part of the core they cannot reach unless they destroy the individual.

Page 433 …

Theories that the most cult obedient and mean alters are those farthest from the core are not based on reality. There is some partial correctness to the concept that those victims who have a better connection between their core and their alters heal better, but when the actual programming sequence and methodology is laid out for the reader as we have done in our books, hopefully the reader will realize that most of the time the core is sleeping (Sleeping Beauty) and thinks she is dead and waiting for her Prince to kiss her and bring her back to life. She is not lurking in the background cognizant of every conversation like some therapists have begun telling each other. A sound strategy for working on the core issues, would be to get the system in a place of complete safety, and then work to stabilize the system of alters, and then begin doing memory work and building trust. When the mind is ready, then some core split alters can be healed as a potential gateway to lowering the fears of the core. Some of the readers of this book will not have a Christian perspective. We encourage them to see the healing power of forgiveness, and love that a Christlike view offers to victims. In the reality of the real world, all men have sinned and come short of the glory of God. The core was not evil–it was simply a helpless innocent victim of overwhelming abuse. Of anybody who can understand pain, it is the Son of God (Emmanuel) who suffered innocently like-the core did. As the ministers preach, we are all guilty of the death of Christ. This means that terms like “man of God”, “perpetrator” and “victim” begin to lose much meaning as we approach the glorious brilliant light of Christ. Without forgiveness, we are all sinners worthy of death. But we are also the apple of Gods eye. There is nothing that can stand in the way of His forgiving love if we want it in our lives. One of the biggest proofs of that redeeming love of God Almighty, has been carefully hidden by the programmers–it is that Eternal Light, that God-given spirit that the programmers have never conquered.

Page 434 …

DELIVERANCE, understanding

Today, we live in a dark age. We trust that you will find some exciting liberating ideas within this article. Christ wondered if he would find any faith left when he returned. The answers we will provide you in this article are not something you will find in the establishment churches, but are fresh revelations from the throne of God. Fritz & I have worked together on this article, and this article will reflect what we have been taught by the Holy Spirit. As anyone, who has read about total mind-control, can realize, victims of total mind-control are in the greatest need for deliverance that one could imagine. Why dont victims just choose health? Why dont victims simply walk out and grab their freedom? The answer goes back to understanding love and free-will. God gave free-will to that part of His creation that can know good & evil, especially humankind. That was His sovereign choice, and it was an action based on the nature of God which is love. Love does not seek its own, but seeks to build others up. The Kingdom of God has as its foundation love. We are called to speak truth in love. Satans Kingdom is built upon fear. How many churches operate on the foundation of fear? Sadly too many. Satan constructs all his governments, whether judicial, political or religious on a foundation of fear. He then takes that foundation of fear, and applies it in such a way as to get fears maximum leverage power to motivate people. While applying trauma along with drugs and hypnosis to peoples lives, Satan gets the maximum leverage out of their fear. He uses the greatest power he can get out of fear to harden the points where people have free choice. Imagine a piece of farm machinery that has been allowed to rust and harden. The joints, the hinges no longer have freedom of movement. They are rusted into one position. The joints have lost their freedom of choice. Now the farmer comes along and applies a lubricant to clean and loosen those frozen joints. The deliverance minister is finding the juncture of choice and he is pouring kindness upon that frozen juncture, and that oil of kindness lubricates it free. Now the person has freedom of choice. A spirit is love applied to the frozen hardened joints of life is a deliverance ministry. Sometimes unfortunately, the rust is so hard that the person must be broken, because the place where the free-will, the place where their options were stolen can not be restored. Satan knows that people would naturally choose paradise, would naturally choose love & good things. First, God created man in His own image, and we still have a built in desire to do saintly things, although our perfect nature has been corrupted. Satan must trick, and tweak, and loop and snake our free will, to the point that we will give up our freedom, that we will give up our free will, and that we will agree to his life of bondage. That is what Fritzs half of the book was about. In Fritzs half, he showed how Satan destroys that free will, how he shifts and snakes, he deceives, he manipulates and bends, and muddies the waters until a person doesnt know where he is, nor what his choices are. After all the horrendous programming, the victim “willingly” wants to give up their free will, but at that time the alters do not even realize what they are giving up nor what is going on. God continues to gently call people to Him. It is a wooing. A man is wooed by a pretty girl, not compelled. Gods beauty compellingly woos us. However, some churches because they are not on the right foundations, see something wrong with someone and they come over and lay their hands on them and knock em down. The idea of coming up to people and attacking their demons is spiritual rape. The demons do have to obey certain

Page 435 …

spiritual laws, but “raping” people was not Christs method of deliverance. Lets look at the way Christ dealt with people and demonic problems.

The mother of Zebedees son comes to him, and he says, “What do you wish?” (MT 20:21)
The multitudes come to him, and Christ says, “What do you want Me to do for you?” (MT 20:32)
James & John come to Christ, and he says, What do you want Me to do for you?” MK 10:36
A blind man on the road to Jerico comes to Christ, and Christ asks, What do you want Me to do for you?” MK 10:5 1, LK 18:4 1
Two of Johns disciples approach Jesus, and Christ asks, What do you seek?” JN 1:38
At the marriage supper, a woman asks a favor & Christ asks, Woman, what does your concern have to do with me?” (JN 2:4)

Christ told his disciples that whatever they asked in faith, that is what their heavenly Father would give them. (MK 11:24) Christ is very similar to the Father, he waited until people asked and explained what they wanted. The entire course or tenor of Christs life was a savior who waited until a persons free will was ready for a deliverance. Christ wooed people to God. There is no wooing people to God, when demons are forcibly eradicated without a persons consent. Does that mean that there is no place for aggressive deliverance? If we wait for some people to ask for freedom, they may never ask. With victims of mind-control, the controlling demons are sealed over and hidden quite deeply and Lucifer allows other demons to protect him in the system. Jesus went in and cleansed the temple of the money changers. Here was a situation where Gods temple was being desecrated. Most people are not aware of how the money changers were desecrating Gods temple, so allow us to explain this. The nation of Israel was to be the light of earth through which God poured His blessings out on mankind. The nation of Israel was to bless the world. Instead, the religious spirits lorded over the nation. The Israelites scorned everyone else (the Gentiles) as unclean. The temples outer court was where the gentiles were to be ministered to & were to come to God. Instead the Jews gave it over to a Spirit of Mammon. Money changers were blocking the purpose of that area of the Temple, which was meant to be the salvation of the unclean, not the enrichment of the self-righteous. Notice the religious judging spirit in the Temple rulers, for soon afterwards they were judging Jesus for spending time with children in the Temple. Jesus was hoping they would learn a lesson, he said, “Yes. And have you never read what is written in the Psalms, Out of the mouth of babes and little ones, thou hast made thy praise perfect?” There is a place in Gods hearts for child alters & baby alters. And this then leads us to one of the best illustrations of deliverance in the Word of God. Jesus told the story of a man on the lonely road to Jerico. He had been attacked by a gang of robbers and left in the ditch for dead. Two religious men came by and judged him as unclean. The judging spirits that were in their hearts convinced these men of the lie that you get better by avoiding the unclean, rather than ministering to the unclean. (We have seen our share of ministers who have hated to see people working with programmed multiples. Fritz lost most of his Christians friends in order to work with us. Some of them got angry that someone would want to help someone like us.) But there was a Samaritan that came along. Now remember, the Samaritan was considered unclean and a dog by the men with the religious judging spirits. The religious judging spirit doesnt want to enter into a real walk with God, and it will do all it can to prevent others. But this Samaritan who was considered unclean by the religious, comes and pulls the man out of the pit, and dresses his wounds, which means squeezing out the dross. He gives the man food and water to promote life. He pours in all this stuff into the

Page 436 …

mans wounds. Then he binds the wounds so that the skin will form a protection. He took what had carried him through life (his own donkey or horse) and took him to a place of safety and protection. But the Samaritan didnt consider his deliverance over. He wanted to get the man to the end point. So he gave the inn keeper money, and told the inn keeper to take care of him, and if he ran up a bill, the Samaritan would take care of it on a return trip. THIS was a real deliverance ministry. This was a real deliverance. The religious heap the burdens of the cross or many crosses onto other people. The real deliverance ministries are like the “religiously unclean” Samaritan. When the religious leaders of Jesus day came to him and asked him on what authority he did his good works, Jesus told them a story. “But what do you think? A man had two sons, and he came to the first and said, Son, go, work today in my vineyard. He answered and said, I will not, but afterward he regretted it and went. Then he came to the second and said likewise. And he answered and said, I go, sir, but he did not go. Which of the two did the will of his father?” They said to Him, “The first.” Jesus said to them, “Assuredly, I say to you that tax collectors and harlots enter the kingdom of God before you.” Today, we have a entire class of professional ministers (master pastors) who are ministered to by their congregations. They consider the idea of stopping to bandage up the unclean to be repulsive. The broken souls of the programmed multiples are those who Christ came to deliver. He cameto set the captives free. The deliverance ministry will visit those who are in the prisons created by mind-control programming, they will give food and water to those in these “prisons” and liberate them. Deliverance is love in action. The oil and wine that the Samaritan put on the mans wounds are symbolic of the power & authority of God that we minister to people. They are also symbolic of the grace and truth. Another parallel meaning to the oil & wine is the anointing and the new life that are given to those that the world has left for dead in the gutter. Deliverance is a restoration. The goal of the restoration is new life, the ultimate goal of deliverance is the ultimate new life in Christ. The new life in Christ is when Christ is on the throne in a persons life. That is a distant goal for some programmed multiples. However, we must not elevate the process above the goal. In deliverance ministries today, many of them have elevated the process above the goal. We must keep the authority of Christ as the number one issue, and keep beholding him as an example to us. As the correct foundation is built, a godly structure based upon the His five attributes comes into being. (See the article on “Protection, Spiritual”) then the lower level demons cant handle the heat given off by the light of truth and they rise to the surface as dross and can be dealt with. The deeper big daddy demons are going to take a special deliverance similar to Christs cleansing of the temple. When the Holy Spirit has a claim on someones life, then a Temple cleansing may be in store. We must insure to lose good spirits to replace evil ones. The Children of Light do not negotiate with darkness. Darkness does not want to negotiate with light anyway. The Child of God walks in peace, because he is secure in who his Father is. This does not mean that he tempts God by bungy jumping every situation. It means that he doesnt walk in fear, but that he takes with him the real keys to the Kingdom of God which are light, life and love. Love, light and life in their fullest meanings will open doors to riches that the slave could never dream of.

Deliverance is not a short term work. For a programmed multiple it will be a life of healing. When God continues to build his structure in you (see page 365), replacing the satanic structure, God will begin resting more

Page 437 …

of His glory within His structure. Gods glory will expose and help cleanse the Temple. It will make the victim want to work hard to keep the Temple clean. Some people think that God simply wants to put His anointing onto people. He is trying to build His structure within His willing children. After that structure (His nature and character is built) then the anointing has a place to rest. Prayer, which is based upon the five elements of Gods structure, is like an offensive lance. The armor of God listed in Ephesians 6 includes 6 items. It does not mention anything that is clearly offensive. Prayer is offensive and aggressive in nature. It is seeking that which we do not have. Prayer can deliver a wound into the enemy through which supernatural love can be poured in to melt the hard spots that Satan has created. One of the five elements of Gods structure is life, which means growth. The healing victim if they are alive must keep growing, because that is the nature of life. The Word says that Gods Kingdom will always increase. We go from glory to glory. We grow up and grow up and grow up. If we stop growing, we can rest in God, but if we are not resting in Him or growing, then we are in a death process. We are to occupy until the Lord comes. While we occupy the land, God comes and builds His structures within us. What gives life to the victim of mind-control? There are various approaches to demons. Some say that they are only psychological illusions, they pass by on the road to Jerico. Some say that although demons exist, they are rare, so it is not likely that the victim has a serious problem. They pass by too on the road to Jerico. Others pass by and say, “Ill pray for you.” Others shout the name of Jesus and pass on. Others use their psychic abilities to notice from a distance what the demons are. In other words, they identify the problem, but pass by expecting that a few words will bind up the half-dead man. The other approaches are various ideas on how to help the man in the ditch. What we have been trying to do, is give people an idea on how half-dead people can be mended. This is somewhat of a spiritual first-aid class. There will be situations that people will need our help in deliverance. They simply cant mend their own wounds, nor even see them to clean them. Deliverance prayers and supplications can be made that God would enlighten the victim, that Gods angels would provide protection, and that evil spirits would be contained or kept away. Because demons are in ranks and in hierarchal structures, it makes sense to try to go to the top to do business. The ranking demon may be asked on what spiritual grounds he has a right to be present. The legal right for that demon can be confessed and removed. Long story made short, demons must submit to the authority of Jesus Christ of Nazareth and His blood. If the deliverance minister walks in that authority, he can command that demon to leave. The response by demons when commanded to leave is varied. They will play many tricks to try and stay or to try and protect their leaders. Followup is important and the goal is a complete cleansing. If you are going toward the rest room, to take two steps in that direction is just not going to do the job. Go all the way. Keep praying and commanding and confessing. Having a prayer group in support helps. With victims of mind-control we are dealing with big daddy demons that the normal person has not had to deal with. The Illuminati programmed multiples are the pride of Satan. They dont surrender easily.

Page 438 …

DENIAL, identifying and dealing with defense mechanisms

Part of the reason that the Monarch trauma-based mind-controls programming is successful is because the mind will naturally defend itself against threatening ideas. This defense is usually on a subconscious level–that is, people often do not even realize that the mind is putting up defenses. This is because the human mind is SO GOOD at defending itself. If our minds were to allow us to realize our minds defend themselves from something–then that would in itself indicate that what is being denied was real–so even the denial is denied! Denial is a natural part of the minds abilities. However, denial can often prevent us from moving forward and facing the issues we actually need to face. There are several forms of denial and we need to identify and recognize these forms in order to identify and recognize these forms in ourselves. I will now list some of the kinds (forms) of denial that a person can have.

SIMPLE DENIAL: Pretending that something does not exist when it really does, for instance ignoring & discounting physical symptoms that may indicate the presence of problems. (For instance, the host personality of a programmed multiple will destroy evidence of the existence of any other alter.)
MINIMIZING: Being willing to acknowledge a problem, but unwilling to see its severity. (For instance, the front alters will acknowledge their ways some past abuse, but they will minimize the extent of the abuse, and they will not acknowledge that the abuse is ongoing.)
BLAMING: putting the blame on someone else for causing the problem; the behavior is not denied, but its cause is someone elses fault. (Examples, are blaming ones parents for your adult behavior, blaming ones husband or wife for ones overeating. In terms of programming, an example would be that some alters perceive that other alters are the cause of their problems, but that they are just fine.)
EXCUSING: Offering excuses, alibis, justifications and other explanations for our own or others behavior. For instance, calling the boss for a friend and telling the boss the person is sick when they are really drunk. (This is a built in mechanism of the mind-control. For instance, an assassination alter will be told that the target they killed deserved to die.)
GENERALIZING: Dealing with problems on a general level, but avoiding personal and emotional awareness of the situation or conditions. Example is when we might sympathize with a friends “flu” problems when the real problem is a drug problem. (Some alters tell the therapist, “Im not in therapy, the other alter is in therapy.” The problem of mind-control is not being addressed as mind-control, the real issue is being disavowalled. Some therapists contribute to this because they dont understand the dynamics of mind-control, and they mistakingly think that their client is the host alter. They are failing to see the bigger picture.)
DODGING: Changing the subject to avoid threatening topics, this includes being adept at small talk, never getting to real issues. (Alters love to talk about non-threatening issues with their therapists, as great deal of busy work can take place without much progress.)
ATTACKING: Becoming angry and irritable when reference is made to the existing condition, thus avoiding the issue. This includes being unwilling to share ones feelings.

Page 439

ALL OF US NEED TO SCRUTINIZE OURSELVES–WHAT TYPES OF DENIAL TO WE PRACTICE TO PROTECT OURSELVES FROM WHAT IS PERCEIVED AS PAINFUL??

Children and even adults will perceive certain new foods as dangerous and painful. They will do anything and make any excuse not to eat what they dont want to. At times there are legitimate concerns, but in general what is perceived as threatening is not. If the child ate his broccoli or his peas he would in fact be getting better nutrition. Denial seems to protect us–but often it protects us from what we really need to deal with.

p_439-2.jpg

Page 440 …

DREAMWORK, understanding

We believe that this section may present the reader with the best look into
programmed MPD (DID) and dreams that has been published. This Dream Work
section will be divided up into the following subtopics:

Part A: The Meaning of Dreams
Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD
Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams
Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research
Part B. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work
Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams & memories

Part A. The Meaning of Dreams

Everyone dreams, and many people are fascinated in dreams, the difficult part is what do individual dreams mean? In a biblical study that our co-author Fritz made of the entire Word of God to determine how God communicates with mankind, he found that in an overwhelming percentage of cases, Almighty God used dreams to communicate to mankind. Joseph and Daniel got recognition by interpreting dreams (called oneicromancy) correctly. Joseph interpreted the Pharaohs dream about seven years of plenty and seven years of famine. On a stone tablet in front of the Great Sphinx, another Pharaoh, Thutmes IV, records a dream he received that his reign would be long and fruitful. This was one of what the ancient Egyptians called “divine dreams from the gods”. On the flip side of things, the rational thinkers of the 18th century claimed that dreams were only the result of indigestion or cold drafts, and were meaningless. Obviously, not all dreams are a message from God, nor are they all simply the result of poor indigestion of pizza. or an open window at night. The priesthoods of the ancient mystery religions began research into dreams and began using them in various capacities. In the healing temple of ~Esclepius, the priesthood would place sick people on a couch in the temple, and would instruct them that a god would give them in a dream the remedy for their illness. The suggestion that the dreamer would learn of his health problem in his dream often worked. Modern researchers would not blame any particular god for this being successful, they would interpret it as the unconscious mind releasing information about the body that wouldnt normally surface in the waking conscious mind. This ancient practice is similar to modern researchers who have had great success in placing hypnotic commands into people (where the subjects were told not to remember the command) to dream about particular things, with the result that then the researchers have observed that the subjects do indeed create dreams about the suggested subject matter. The resulting dreams are about the suggested matter according to the subjects minds own tastes. Its been documented that people who have suffered traumas, such as refugees, soldiers, and victims of SRA have nightmares that are a direct result of their traumas. Some therapists do dream work with refugees, post-traumatic stress disorder and DID clients. When multiples get memories that surface as dreams, these dreams repeat themselves and they leave the victim with profound feelings, often the strong sense of depersonalization. Several therapists/researchers (see Cushway & Sewell, 1992 and others) have discovered that nightmares can be used as a key indicator of PTSD (which is a problem that DID victims face.) (Non-multiples, of course, also at times experience auto-biographical dreams.) One dream researcher (Wunder, 1993)

Page 441 …

discovered that siblings of disabled children had many common themes in their dreams, including the desire to be a type of “saviort, dreams of guilt that they were normal, the idea that something or someone (such as a fairy godmother) would change things, and sorrow about their siblings disability. Programmed multiples are also going to have dreams surface that relate to inner concerns.

Yes, the imagery of our nightmares and dreams do have relevant information about our deep concerns. The high frequency of nightmares has been directly shown to be linked to unpleasant life experiences, especially recent ones. Common sense would teach us many of these things, but it helps that people have validated these in studies, so that some of these things go beyond the realm of opinion.

Part B. Dream Telepathy & MPD

Psychiatric journals have been publishing for several years documented, authentic, scientific, controlled experiments where telepathic messages have been sent to and received by people in the dream state. On the one hand, while most people believe these kinds of things happen, they will also generally, when asked if such things happen, say that they do not believe they happen. This is because there is a strong scientific-cultural bias against the fact of telepathic messages occurring in the dream state. Common scientific awareness hasnt caught up to both common sense and specific research into telepathic dreams. The natural response designed to protect those with “politically correct views” is to ask, “How does one distinguish between a telepathic dream and a lucky coincidence considering the numbers of dreams sent?” “At what point does one realize that a dream is not mere coincidence?” These are legitimate questions, and there has been legitimate research which has legitimately answered them. The original scientific work in this area was done by the British Society for Psychical Research, who did most of their work with the elite British aristocracy beginning in the 1880s. Their initial findings were written up in Phantasms of the Living. Since then, a great deal more research has been completed. The two types of telepathic dreams that are quite frequently experienced are death messages and in-trouble messages. Some of the documented cases of telepathic messages between total strangers are absolutely amazing. While the public is still debating the existence of such already scientifically proven phenomena, the Illuminati have been constructing telepathic and astral projection capabilities into their hierarchy slaves. Whether the therapist is at a place to admit the existence of these phenomena or not, they will have to face the fact that deeper hierarchy alters believe they have these capabilities, & they will resist treatment and resist the success of therapy because they believe they are still participating fully with the Illuminati cult during sleeping hours. Nor will the therapist make significant progress by trying to debunk these capabilities, when these alters have personal experiences of having learned and travelled to rituals on the astral plane. A beginning point for therapists to learn about Dream Telepathy would be the book Dream Telepathy by Montague Ullman, M.D., Stanley Krippner, Ph.D. and Alan Vaughan.

Part C. A Listing of Research into MPD (DID) & Dreams

Because the potential benefits through dream therapy are great and still to be discovered, this section is covering the topic in greater depth than some of the other topics. For those who want to check the professional literature concerning dreams and their relationship with MPD (DID) we provide the following list:

Page 442 …

Franklin, J. (1990). “Dreamlike thought and dream mode processes in the formation of personalities in MPD.” Dissociation, 3(2), pp. 70-80

Gabel, S. (1989) “Dreams as a possible reflection of a dissociated self-monitoring system.” Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 177, pp. 560-568.

Gabel, 5. (1990). “Dreams and dissociation theory: Speculations on beneficial aspects of their linkage.” Dissociation, 3(1), pp. 38-47

Leviton, H.L. (1967) “Depersonalization and the dream.” Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 36, pp. 157-171.

Marmer, S.S. (1980) The dream in dissociative states.” In J.M. Natterson (ed.), The dream in clinical practice (pp. 163-175). NY: Jason Aronson.

Myers, W.A. (1976). “Imaginary companions, fantasy twins, mirror dreams and depersonalization.” Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 45, pp 503-524.

Peterson, E., Gooch, N.L., & Freeman, L. Nightmare. NY: Richardson & Steirman, 1987.

Sidis, B. (1918) “A Clinical study of a dream personality.” Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 13, pp 137-1 57.

Ullman, M. (1989). “Commentary: Dreams as a possible reflection of a dissociated self-monitoring system.” Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 177, pp. 569-571.

Part D. Important Findings of MPD (DID) Dream Research

One study (Hartman, 1984) showed that people who normally have recurrent nightmares have more permeable mental boundaries between fantasy and reality, and are confused in their self-image. This principle would certainly apply to people with DID. Cernovsky (1988) did research into the dreams of those who suffer from Post-Traumatic Stress syndrome. And Jeans (1976), Gabel (1989, 1990), Marmer (1980), and Salley (1988) did research into dreams and therapy of MPD clients. Worthy of comment here, is that Gabel was exploring the dreams of DID clients as repressed memories. Not only does this make common sense, but as an Illuminati programmer, our alters who were programmers were very aware that memories can surface as dreams. We were taught to make sure that the victims mind was properly prepared so that it would not allow trauma and memory to surface in dreams. We will discuss indepth the mind-control programming in this area later in this article. Another therapist/researcher who did a great deal of work with dreams to help DID (MPD) clients was S.S. Marmer. He was able to help alters understand how their systems were built by using dream therapy, and was able to use dream content to help break down the dissociation. He believed that each alter is able to create its own dreams separately from other alters. Dr. Frank Putnam found that he was able to get valuable information from the dreams of his multiples that he couldnt get from hypnosis and hypnosis-with-the-affect-bridge. Putnam discovered that the repressed memories surfacing as dreams were so traumatic that his clients were dissociating the dreams. This author (Cisco), as a recovering multiple, has personally experienced this. Also we have discovered that fragments of the dissociated dream may linger, and these fragments may be helpful to go back and recover more of the memory. We also discovered that it is helpful to have a support person record and relate what the system is screaming during sleep, or saying during their sleep so that the memory is not lost. Putnam states, “When listening to this [MPD dream] material, I treat it as a dissociative experience similar to, for example, an out-of-body experience. The details and setting of these repetitive traumatic nightmares seem to be more clearly based on actual settings than are most dreamscapes and can often be used to determine what age the person was and

Page 443 …

where he or she was when the trauma occurred. One can search the personality system for alters who were created during this time period in the patients life. The postdream residual effects are also important and can be used as a starting point for affect bridge work. MPD patients seem to be more willing to share and work with dream material than with other forms of memory for trauma.” (Diagnosis & Treatment of Multiple Personality Disorder, p. 202) Oaklander, who used work with dreams to assist therapy, wrote, “In general, dreams serve a variety of functions for children. They may be an expression of anxiety–things that worry them. They may express feelings that children feel unable to express in real life. [bold added] They may depict wishes, wants, needs, fantasies, questions and curiosities, attitudes. The dream can be an indication of a general stance or feeling about life. It may be a way of working through feelings and experiences -situations that children are unable to deal with directly and openly.” (1969, p. 150) Therapists have been using dreamwork (dreams) as a source of information that helps them to understand how the victim is processing horrible experiences, problem-solving, and adjusting to changing personal and social circumstances in life. An example of how dreams relate to these things, is Zayas study in 1988 that showed that expectant fathers went through three stages of dream content in anticipation of their new child. Here was a good example of the unconscious preoccupation of fathers toward the new child expressing itself symbolically in their dreamscapes.

Part E. Our suggestions concerning MPD Dream Work

The therapist is going to have to differentiate between symbolic meanings (for example a dream image of a “broken egg in a nest” which in one case represented a situation of family violence), and actual memories coming to the surface. The therapist is in a position of helping the victim move from making “no sense” of a dream to a place that it “makes sense”. The type of questions that may be helpful would include, “how did you feel when…? or, “how do you feel now about…?, or “what color was…?” or, “have you considered how such-and-such might relate to such-and-such in your daytime life?” The therapist is facilitating the victim in discovering possible avenues of enquiry. For instance, in a dream having a baby in it, the victim might be asked, “What do babies mean to you?” Although this type of exploration may seem slow, when done by a skilled therapist some valuable work can occur. It may also be possible to influence victims to become more lucid dreamers. Lucid dreaming is when a person is conscious that they are dreaming & asleep, while still in the REM sleep state. Unfortunately, the current vocabulary of words are unsuitably very primitive for discussing different altered states of consciousness & unconscious mental activity. “Awake”, “asleep” & “dream” are very crude terms to describe the various states that the mind can place itself in. A variety of techniques in training the mind while it is awake, have proven to result in changes in the remembrance and perception of dreams. While these are too extensive to try to cover here, there might be some possibilities to explore in this area for helping DID.

A mother while asleep will still have a mind that is scanning her external environment. She may sleep through her husband coming home from work, but wake up at the slightest noise from her baby. This type of behavior shows that the dreamer is still scanning his or her external environment. Most people do not have well-trained minds when it comes to states of consciousness.

Page 444 …

Swami Rama, an expert in putting his body into different trance states, had worked with his various states of mind so well, that even during clinical studies while Swami Rama was in deepest sleep states (where people are “dead to the world”), he was still aware of everything going on in the room. Most multiples, because their mind is so traumatized and ever-vigilant, will never completely go to sleep, but will have an external alter awake in trance while the other alters go into a trance-sleep. The example of Billy Graham, a programmed multiple, who only sleeps in a zombie-trance state with his eyes open, was reported in the Vol 2 Formula book. Each time a slave goes to sleep, internal alters bring trauma memories to the sleeping alters as dreams, and condition the slave to fear sleep. Dreams may indicate that the part that holds a particular memory is ready to work on the memory that came up in the dream. REM sleep, the place where most dream occurs, is the most similar type of sleep in brain wave patterns to the waking brain. However, dreams that are carried out in the non-REM sleep phases have been discovered to be closer to reality than REM sleep dreams. This applies to everyone. Because the dreamer is still in contact with his environment, (granted that this contact is different than being awake), the dreamer can have his or her dream influenced by externals and internals. Gas on the stomach may be interpreted as a nightmare, internal bladder trouble may be dreamed about as a trip to the restroom, an alarm clock may be dreamed about as a church bell, the smell of smoke may cause one to dream of a building exploding, and the smell of cologne may cause a dream of a perfume factory, etc. This is why listeners can identify with the joke about the dreamer who dreams he ate a giant marshmallow and wakes up missing his pillow. Many dreamers have the ability to dream about things that are suggested to them, such as in a hypnotic suggestion, before bed time. Victims of mind control can, if they want, via self-hypnotic statements suggest to themselves that they would like every dream that night to be about a particular theme. The mind will decide what it has that matches during their sleep that night the suggested theme, so this method is not going to contaminate the mind, it is simply telling the mind what mental files or associated mental files to allow to drift up from deep in the mind into the dream state. A support team member can repeat personal names during REM sleep, and this may trigger the mind to bring up some mental files that relate to that name. Again, because the mind is not in a conscious logical state, the relationship between the file and the name said may not be the typical type of relationship experienced during waking hours. For example, the name “Stan” said aloud to the dreamer might evoke a dream about stamps. Another possible method to elicit dream material for work is to trigger the system. The alter system can be triggered via movies or by going to particular settings where they were traumatized. The movies that trigger certain auto-biographical dreams may trigger the dreams in a way that only appear to have remote connections, but at the deeper levels of the mind are connected in some way by the mind. In other words, triggering by watching negatively-charged movies may be helpful to therapy, but the memory & feelings which are pulled to the surface (evoked) may be completely unexpected.

Part F. Standard Illuminati Programming concerning dreams & memories

The programmers put into place a system of alters whose function is to control memories. These alters are created from

Page 445 …

the purely logic side of the brain, and have been logically programmed, and tend to be perfectionists in their work. They have been programmed to see themselves as unicorns, pegasi (winged horses), and horses. We have touched on these horse alters in our Illustrated Guidebook and the Vol. 2 book, for instance, the Vol 2 book reports that JER 37:3 is used to put in the programming that if a certain boundary is crossed, the horses are activated to protect the system. The horses work at night when an alter system goes to bed. They dump their memories into the dream state for various purposes.

The base imagery to create the unicorns, Pegasi & horses is laid in with the film Fantasia (see Chapter 5). Later when the specific approx. 4-year-old alters are given their scripts, they choose alters who are heartless and purely logic to tell a script like the following one. A typical script for the horse alters during programming would be as follows: “Pegasi are handsome winged horses who graze in the treetops and have their home in the gourd. The gourd is an alternate world where black pearls store memories. Because the horses are magical they can fit their big selves into a tiny gourd. They are black and their eyes glow faintly. They are led by a stallion Trojan, who is also known as the Dark Horse, and who commands all the spirits who lack bodies. He rules the kingdom of dreams. It is the job of the night mares to carry the dreams that are made in the gourd to all the sleepers of the outside world who need them. The reason that the night mares give dreams to people is so they know what they have done that is bad. Night mares have no feelings. Those who gain feelings are soon no good for their work. Souls with feelings are not able to be tough like the night mares must be. A night mare must be careful to frighten with the fewest possible images so that the dreamer will not think the dreams to be a common everyday thing. If they have trouble doing their jobs, if they get bored, then the night mares can let their little colts take over their jobs. Night mares can not speak out loud, but can make dreams of a nonfrightening nature to those who are awake, and to those who say what the night mare wishes to talk about. They only come when people are asleep. They can go through walls and solid things under the cover of darkness. The moon & the horses go together. Night mares must flee from the sun. They only are safe travelling at night. Each night mares hoofprint is a the spot one sees on the moon. Those spots on the moon were named after each mare, such as Mare Imbrium, & Mare Crisis & Mare Frigoris. It is very bad to be seen by anyone when a mare delivers her dreams. The Mare Imbrium had to leap through a wall, and to become invisible. She had almost been caught. She must go home before the dawn comes. When she gets home she can relax all day until night comes again. Trojan reports to Mr. Moon & Mr. Green. When the messenger mare galloped up to Mare Imbrium she told her to report immediately to Trojan, who is a handsome, midnight black mare with enormous power. He is the smartest of horses. He rules the Powers of the Night. He was very impressive when the mare met him, & he told her how to do her job better. The difference between night mares and day mares is that night mares have no emotions & days mares do. The day mares have no bodies. Day mares have to work with shadows, & shadows are very strict that the sun shines so that the shadow can work. Day horses project dream visions to people, but these day dreams are not as powerful as the night dreams.” The programmers give such alters names like Abaddon, Dark Horse, Mare Imbrium, Mare Nectaris, Night Mare, Night Stallion, Pegasus and Trojan and other

Page 446 …

appropriate names for horses. These alters must report to the overseers, not the internal programmers. The overseers will be clones of the main external programmers. These horse alters carry all the memories. They are programmed to believe they have no souls (emotions), and that they can not speak (although they may “neigh” to the therapist and alters may hear the stomp of their hoofs behind them). These night mares carry the memories to other alters (which is their “dream duty”), and because they have no emotions (soul), they can be heartless in what they give and in what they must carry. Lacking emotions they carry the memories like a movie projector. They are really beasts of burden for the entire system. These beasts of burden are created early in the verbal stage. (Vol. 2 briefly reports about their creation.) The alters who see themselves as the primary abusers, who are overseers of the system will ride these horses. The horse for the front of the system has to be a gentler natured horse because they dont want the front of the system finding out too much and they want the front of the system to be able to function. And now you understand the collage in our illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind Control Programming (1995), p. 68, where a White Horse and a Black Horse do battle over a grave yard. When we were trying to get our memories, a battle was raging with the horses as to how much memories we were to get. – (Youll notice that a high percentage of our collages have horses in them. One example, on p. 54, is Alice riding a white horse. Another is our systems two overseers Dr. Green & Dr. Black riding a fierce night mare on p. 38. The horses are attached to the computers, but they are neither good nor bad, they simply are beasts of burden carrying out their assigned tasks. They try to balance what they give the alters. When an alter goes into the dream state, the horses fill that dream state with a memory. Because the memory never gets attached to the original emotions (affect), the horses can bring it night after night to terrorize the alters. If a horse gets too close to the memories that it brings, or entangled with the alters that it gives memories to, then the horse will lose its job, and another alter, perhaps a clean slate made from the horse itself, will take its job. Most alter systems will go into a trance like sleep between 12 and 4 in the morning. During this time a lot of mischief can happen. The internal programmers may be working hard to reprogram the system, or the handler has arranged a quick stop at the house to help with the reprogramming. Meanwhile most therapists have a rule that after 11 oclock the client cant call. So during that time period when therapists are out of reach, is when the programming cults move in & do a lot of work. During the dream state, no one is really holding the body, and programs surface for contact alters to go “home” to “get fixed”. The handler may be waiting in a sidestreet or back alley a block away. Flooding programs are released in the dream state. Flooding programs were created when a drug was given that takes down all the dissociative barriers, and the memory of this flooding trauma is then carried forward by a mare and given to the appropriate non-compliant alters to scare them into not wanting to go toward health. The reader has seen how the programmers take advantage of the dream state & control the dream state. The support team has to be alert from eleven p.m. to five a.m. for that is when most of the accessing mischief takes place. The support team has numerous ways that they can encourage the dream state to be productive, & they now know the alters who are responsible for turning those dream states into nightmares (pardon the pun.)

Page 447 …

Validation is important especially at the early stages of therapy. Our experience, as well as many others who understand the dynamics of MPD, is that extended family members are NOT good sources of validation. If the dynamics of abuse are understood in the context of families who abuse their MPD children, it will be clearly understood that extended family members will deny the truth, misrepresent or misinterpret past events, and may even be involved in trying to reprogram and reaccess the victim. Because some therapists attempt such validation, we feel it is important to issue a warning. Until recently, programmed multiples have lived in a world that was hostile to admitting their existence. They ran many risks from being exposed, & the trend has been for most therapists to deny the existence of mind-control. The victim has had so much fantasy structured into their mind that they dont know what to believe, but they do know that they feel safer if they could find some validation. It is not uncommon for some alters in a system to realize the MPD, while other alters hold out for more validation. Within in an alter system DENIAL is extremely strong. Denial has been a tool for survival. The mind does not want to believe the horrendous things that have happened to it. The mind wants to protect itself from these trauma memories–not admit them. As therapy progresses, the way the mind unravels itself, becomes a validation for the system. Alters may talk about things that are in their mind, which the therapist can point out are standard programming features, such as ruby slippers, a dollhouse & rainbow. Denial is a force that pulls the mind away from the truth. Validation gives the mind something external. Without that external place to land, it is hard for the mind to accept its own thoughts. In a sense, validation (ext. proof) brings a balance for the mind. The victim doesnt feel like he or she is standing alone. Something else agrees with them. Dates can be helpful for validation. Victims who have identical structures can be validating. Other SRA victims from the same coven or same team can be validating. Recent books showing how different alters have different PET brain scans, as well as changes in regional cerebral blood flow as switches occur, have helped programmed DIDs to trust that MPD (DID) even exists. Many churches are still denying its existence. At a certain point in the therapy, the mind has reached the top of the hill in its quest for reassurance from external proofs. At that point, the mind knows, and has acknowledged it to the point that that knowledge has become part of itself. The external programmers will not try to stop this awareness, because it is something that permeates the mind, even though some alters will remain in denial. However, admitting that the multiplicity exists, is still a long ways from proving to others that mind-control is being carried out on a wide-and big scale, and that the recovering victim was abused by many of the “finest” figures of the establishment. It is hard to see that programming, mind-control, and control of society exists UNTIL you swim against the stream. As long as someone is flowing with the river (the programming) the current is not perceived. Everything goes easy like running with the wind at your back. It is when you step out of line with the programming, when you step out of line with how society is programmed, do you feel the weight of the programming. When people are hired, their bosses hire them for how they think. And their bosss boss in turn hired them for the way they think in an approved fashion. Much of todays thinking is simply drifting with the stream of what is “politically correct.” Try swimming against the tide, and youll discover it is there!

Page 448 …

FAMILY, rebuilding a shattered family

Everyone needs to belong to a family. Everyone needs love & acceptance. To belong to a family & to be loved gives a person an identity. The victims deeper alters have few opportunities for this, unless the support team makes an effort to address these vital needs. When you begin working on a programmed multiple, chances are high that the multiple has experienced extreme inconsistency in the actions of the parents or guardians, and extreme contradictory expectations (often double-binds) from the parents too. Most families, that multiples come out of, are extremely guarded and secret, although they may put on a good front. The good front may simply be an agreed upon good cover. The multiples deeper alters have been programmed not to have a regular family, but to only know their cult family or their internal family (other alters). The therapist will have to investigate: Who is your family? Name your family? How do feel about them? The multiples deeper alters will have to be shown there is an external world. After they were programmed with the NO TALK, NO SEE, NO HEAR, they were then programmed with the DO-NOTHING-TO-HURT-THE-FAMILY programming. Why do programmed multiples (or their therapists) sometimes want to contact actual family members? It may be for validation, for justice, for more information, or for reconciliation. First, extended families are poor sources for validation. Second, there is no justice that would be appropriate for the crimes done, such as a lifetime of torture, except an eternity in hell. Forget getting justice. Third, sometimes relatives will provide more information. Generally, victims of mind-control attempt to pry information from relatives, and to read between the lines. Worthwhile information can be gleaned from relatives, just realize that it be work getting it.

Often it works the other way, intense pressure is put upon the victim to protect the familys secrets. Fourth, because most parents of multiples are multiples themselves, all victims of mind-control need to be extra cautious about spending unsupervised time with the parent figure. So where does the victim go to rebuild a family? The support team can become the new family. Or the victim can find some brothers and sisters in Christ that are not-judgmental and legalistic who will appreciate the victim for all the positives they have, in spite of the multiples inconsistent behavior. The multiple has quit asking why after about the age of 3 1/2. The Illuminati have built fantasy scripts for them so they dont ask why. The victim only asks why in the context of fantasy. The victim child may explain their parents multiplicity in magical terms. Child victims will often be aware that they have several daddies and several mommies. They as a multiple will switch to adjust the parental switches. Children may even take advantage of the parents multiplicity, although it usually works the other way. The therapist may have to intervene to try & spare the child, if the situation warrants it. It makes sense to point out to victims, that people have to be accepted in the reality that they exist, and that all the wishful thinking in the world is not going to change them. If we want a good father, rather than destroy ourselves wishing, a victim can find a surrogate father or a spiritual father that has the attributes they feel a father should have. If the surrogate or spiritual father wants the role, thats even better. Rather than beat ones head against a wall that wont change, walk around the wall and get where you want to be. This is not denying the power of prayer, it is simply facing the fact that even Almighty God cant make everyone conform to the image Hed like them to be, because people have free will.

Page 449 …

FLOODING, how to deal with

One of the hardest problems to deal with was flooding with memories. Part of the flooding of memories is the result of a flooding program that is put. The method that is used to program it in is discussed in Vol. 2. Flooding is often the result of improper maintenance of the the victims therapy. The therapist wants a controlled release of memories and effects, not a flood that will drown the victim in a sea of overwhelming trauma and emotions. Remember, the amnesia walls were put in by the mind as a survival mechanism! Removing the walls is like removing the dikes of Holland. When the floods come they bring dizzyness. all kinds of fears, especially the fear of death, difficult breathing, chest pains, delusions, confusion, chills, and heat flashes, and a terror at losing control over ones self. When memories come, if they cant be processed then they can be stored in a box. Or the memory can be shrunk by the mind to a mote, and then kept small until the mind is strong enough to deal with it. Then it can be enlarged to real life proportions and processed. Another method that works well once alters have learned it, is to place their memories on a screen. The screen can be moved closer, or pushed away. The memory is placed on the screen like a movie. The memory can be slowed down, speeded up, made into a silent movie, made into a black and white movie, freeze framed, and the sound turned down on it. In other words, the movie screen gives the victim control over their memory, so they can process the trauma, and regain part of their life. The victim can relieve some of the overwhelming nature of the flooding by having someone to talk to, even an understanding friend such as another victim is helpful. Some are able to journal their emotions, or do some physical activity to blunt the effect. Standing up and getting busy, will help place some distance between the alter and the memory. For a small minority of alters they are capable of using prayer, meditation or scriptures to regain encouragement and calmness. The articles on abreactions may help in this area also. Christian therapists will pray with their clients that memories are released in Gods timing and not in a flood. Different programs and memories occur at different trance levels, so the victim can go either below or above the memory to escape an abreaction. Therapist like to encourage victims to remember their cognitive memory (actual event) before their affective memory (emotions attached to the event). It is important to get the entire memory for memory work to be effective, but the alters that can process information logically (but not emotionally) can play an important role in the early processing of powerful painful memories. The emotional front alters are too easily overwhelmed. Many people would like to avoid the pain and have an easy salvation; unfortunately, the flesh has to be crucified (in a sense) daily, and the victim has to face the reality of what has been done to them. Christ warned his followers that the life of freedom would not be easy. Sometimes victims start pulling up emotional pain without the memories. They may respond by turning to alcohol, compulsive eating, drugs and sex to escape the pain. Often these escape routes are programmed into them by the programmers. When they start acting this way, they often quit therapy. The therapist might beat the programming to the punch and warn their client that this may happen, so that they dont get discouraged, but realize it is a common side effect or programmed effect of the emotional pain surfacing.

Page 450 …

GRIEF

Our father was also our programmer. As our programmer, he set himself up as our savior, our creator, our god, and our master. One day during our therapy, Fritz (our co-author) said at a very timely point one of the most powerful things ever said to our system, “Your father had a beautiful little girl, he didnt want a beautiful little girl. He wanted a robotic slave.” Those words cut to the marrow of the programming. Those words reverberated down through our system for the next few years. What was stolen from the mind-control victim that you are working with? Their identity? Their beauty? Their life? Their honor? Their intelligence? Their humanness? Most slaves never get to the point that they ever realize what was stolen from them. They never get to grieve their losses. The victim has had the truth stolen from them. During therapy they may grieve over this. In therapy, the victim may grieve that their master & programmer was not the image they were programmed to see him in, but was a sadistic person who delighted in cruelly hurting innocent children. The programming for front alters is meant to short circuit grief, front alters are to forgive and forget. The therapist can give grief a voice. Grief is not an Illuminati issue. The Illuminati bloodlines have sacrificed humans including their own children for centuries. With such practices there is no room for grief. Illuminati doctrines allow the mind to trivialize death. In our notes we wrote, “The circle or web of life is like a celtic cross looping back upon itself, and intertwined through its own twisting and turning. The continuity of existence is an unbroken chain linking all the elements of the universe. In the web of life, all things share in the same power and can exchange power, life, and consciousness.” You will find out in higher Illuminati doctrine that a persons being is considered simply a nucleus, a particle of the vast universe, which creates its own light, and you lose your separateness from the universe. When the Mothers-of-Darkness ritually sacrificed a popular Queen Mother, wed miss her, but our belief (that shed left all that she was to the next generation, and that shed be reincarnated, and that shed voluntarily given up her life), prevented us from having a deep grieving. We would say things like, “We miss Queen Mother, do you remember when she taught such and such, we must not let that teaching die.” We had internalized the Queen Mother to quite an extent through the programming and the cult, so that when she died, it felt like she lived in us. One of our Mother-of-Darknesss describes further how grief gets swallowed up in the Wheel of Life philosophy of the Illuminati, “The real or unreal are merely opposite ends of the continuum on which reality can be stretched to include what is normally considered unreal. Even better, the continuum, like a flexible rod, can be bent, curved, and shaped into a circle where the end points of reality and unreality met and become the same point.” Reality can be “demolished then reconstructed, becoming that one part that must maintain a balance, between the internal worlds of oppositional force, unity and interdependence with all.” When something is lost, this philosophy doesnt perceive it as a loss, but a refolding back upon itself of reality. When a person chops up a potato and puts it in a soup, you do not grieve the splitting up and death of the potato, it is joining its life to the eater. When things are taken apart, or die, the particles will reconstruct themselves into the fabric of the universe, life loops back on itself linking all elements. There is no loss. Belief in reincarnation and this kind of philosophy eliminate the type of grieving that other people may experience. The Illuminati (and other satanic groups) do not allow grief. It is not an issue that is brought to the surface. But grieving

Page 451 …

does occur. It is buried in the emptiness of where the alters hearts have been taken out via hypnotic surgery. Grief lays silent without a voice in the mind and body. Grief lays in the silence of hopelessness and powerlessness. When the cult forces a child to kill another child, many children internally grieve for the child they have been forced to kill. To save the childs soul, you will find that some alters will take on the pain, the characteristics, and even the childs soul and identity as part of their silent grieving process. During programming, grief may display itself as a child in a fetal position, in contrast with an angry child yanking on the cages screaming, or a child crouching in fear. An important key to the success of the programming is the resignation/decomposition of the child victims mind. Life inherently has fight built into it. The sperm fights to fertilize the egg. The child fights to survive the birthing process. The difference between resignation to a debilitating auto accident and a struggle to survive can mean life or death. The programmer wants to strip the child of this. He wants unconditional surrender of the mind. When the childs mind enters its last struggle for its own life it is termed DECOMPENSATION. When the mind quits fighting, and all mechanisms of defense or escape crumble, it is called RESIGNATION. A full-blown psychosis results from the breakdown of the personality. Total surrender to overwhelming events is a survival mechanism. The child surrenders to the forces that control it and the new reality and script that are given it. The Illuminati call this “BREAKING REALITY”. The Illuminati programmers want to take the child victim from Reality to fantasy. At this point the child can manipulate his life however he wants to stop the pain. The child has surrendered to fantasy. Does a soldier grieve surrendering to the enemy to save his life? The depth of surrender by the child is so deep, that grief lacks a place in the new mind. The old life has been unconditionally surrendered. Unveiling the “BREAKING REALITY” process to the therapist is important to explain to the therapist why the therapist will not find grief floating around in a system. Instead, the therapist will find happy bird alters, happy singing tree alters, happy bee alters humming and a menagerie of other happy alters content in their fantasy worlds. So where did the grief go? The broken spirit has moved into the fantasy world, and the grief is so profoundly deep and buried internally so deep that it wont be seen. The grief goes into the dead parts who die (a deep grief so deep that it is death) and these parts end up in the internal graveyards, concentration camps and other deep burial grounds. The programmers make sure they skim off any dissociative parts that have humaness and grief and bury them. One method to bury the grieving parts is to have “pac-man” alters that “eat” and internalize these dead parts come and clean them up. After the “pac-man” alters do their job, they are put to sleep. After the grieving parts are hypnotically buried, only the psychotic fantasy parts are left to build the large alter systems. The programmers want the child slave to look like other children, and the front part of the system may be allowed to have a grieving part. For instance, one grieving alter who held grief kept her tears internal and felt like if she let them out of her bag of tears, which weighed hundreds of pounds, the flood of tears would drown everyone. The therapist may find a grieving part like this. How do you get this part to express the grief that has been kept secret for years? Also, the front parts of a system that hold the body day to day may have the same griefs that other people feel. The host personality needs the support of friends like anyone else, even if the front parts appear very stoic. Perhaps an article Fritz wrote on grief will be helpful to front alters who have grief to work through. The article is meant to be a tool that can be read by anyone to work through their grief.

Page 452 …

BENEFITING FROM GRIEF by Fritz

Grief, each of us has our own unique trauma to grieve about–and yet there seems to be a great deal in common in the grieving process for everyone. Grief, it is a challenge. It comes with feelings of sadness, guilt, anger, confusion, and fear. The first feelings may be disbelief and confusion. Then we find that we want to get things off of our chest, a release of the feelings. A good friend can really help when we want to talk. Finally, the day comes when we are able to accept what has happened and move on with life. This doesnt mean we no longer care about what we grieved about, nor does it mean weve forgotten, it simply means we have worked through the feelings associated with the grieving process. There is a light at the end of the tunnel, there is hope, there is freedom from emotional pain, but each person has his or her own timetable and sometimes the journey seems impossibly long. Have you tried to think things through, and it just doesnt happen. Grief is a releasing process, and a healing, the heart and spirit of a person are the players to watch, dont expect the analytical part of the brain to score a touchdown in this situation. The heart of a person will push through to score, even though the analytical part of the brain schemes and schemes. But many of us are afraid of our feelings. We hold back our feelings, when the tears and the grieving are what we need to heal. Blessed are those who weep, for they will find comfort.

When we grieve, we often feel our world is falling apart, its gone. We are isolated in a confusing world. The world made sense, but now it doesnt. Now we see ourselves in such a different world. We need to be patient with the world. Faith is the victory that overcomes such a frightening world. We must have the faith that eventually there will be light at the end of the tunnel. The world that has shattered like a broken mirror seems like it can not be reconstructed. But miracles do happen everyday–and those shattered pieces will miraculously mend themselves in a mysterious way. When we first grieve, many of us want to retreat from life. We find it hard to talk and be around others. We just get through each day. Often we can handle the truth only is small packages, so we turn to denial, either partial or full denial to get us through. Sometimes the best we can do is incorporate the truth at the speed that we can internally deal with it. We know this happens to other people–but when we grieve it seems to be an aberration.

Slowly the mind breaks down its denial. But while it does, we wake up feeling like were in a nightmare. Can this really have happened? On the one hand we want to disbelieve, yet on the other a small voice tells us–YES, this terrible thing did happen. One shock after another. We take the shocks as fast as we can. Someday the denial will be gone, and the grieving will be gone. But until then the process continues. Our feelings of love, our good feelings are responsible for us grieving. If we had no feelings we could not grieve. Grief is a testimony that we can love. Grief is a neon sign that we can care for others. Grief is a memorial that we can get close to someone. Those same abilities to love are now causes for our pain. The weight on our backs from the grief is really the weight of the proof that we cared for and loved another. When we wrap our world and intertwine our world with another, the world seems empty when that person is gone. The disciples were heartbroken when Jesus left them. The Holy Spirit was sent to be an

Page 453 …

eternal comforter for mankind. Not only is the Holy Spirit there to comfort us, but many of our brothers and sisters have gone through suffering so that they can minister comfort to us, as they were comforted. Maybe the world isnt so lonely after all. Reaching out to someone else who has suffered the same pain as we have is often soothing. If we let people minister comfort to us, we are giving them the chance to be like God the Holy Spirit, the comforter. This will strengthen them spiritually as they walk in the same direction that the Holy Comforter moves. Some who we thought suffered with us, may not be in a place to provide comfort. They may not realize that with only a little better grasp of what grief is, a little extra time, and the willingness to listen they could be so helpful. We must give them space too. But if we reach out for help when we grieve, it is a chance for us to feel needed and loved by the living, rather than staring off into space, and a chance to talk, rather than hoarding our feelings. We must give people the space to not be helpful too. Unfortunately, the type of feelings we are hoarding are often the same type that our friends are secretly denying themselves. They are not able to face true emotions in anyone. The most helpful friends are those who will take the time to find out what we need, and will participate in helping with those needs. A vague suggestion to travel, is not going to help as much as if the friend gets a ticket for us and travels somewhere with us. Sometimes while grieving we enter those periods where we need to be touched, to be hugged, to have a pat on the back as a friend passes by. This can mean the world to us. When we grieve it is natural to feel alone. However, when we grieve we can honestly come to realize that others have also had the weight of grief on their back. So go ahead and grieve. Grieve and grow stronger through the hours, the days and the months. The road we each travel is our own–and yet to be honest with life–we each must travel down a road, and each road is filled with things to grieve about. Let us travel down our own road. It is ours to travel. But we must be kind to ourselves if we hope to travel down our own road, because it will take determination and spirit to get through. We must recognize and take care of our needs. If our needs conflict with what others expect, we may have to clearly state our needs without apologizing. It is our own road to travel not theirs. Its O.K. to get help from friends. We just need to learn to verbalize what it is that they can specifically do. Vague comments for help during a grieving state, may end up frustrating everyone involved. To shut ourselves off from others who can help is not wise. When we grieve, we float through the day. But people are resilient. They dont sink, and after a while the floating numbly through the day, becomes soaring and flying through the day. The entire person grieves, the body, and the spirit and the mind. We must minister to all of these. And yet all of these parts seem so numb. Yet, we must allow these parts to feel. The body, spirit, and soul need to express themselves. They need to each groan in their own way. The body feels tired, not just occasionally but most of the time. We must sleep and we must eat if we are to have the strength to continue on this journey. Even if we dont immediately want to do these things, to neglect our sleep or meals will only make the journey harder. On the other hand we need to be sensitive to our new limitations. Under the stress of grieving, we may not be up to going to the store like we used to, but we can console ourselves with the fact that this will only be temporary. Grief is an emotional surgery to the heart, body, soul and spirit which needs time to heal. Before our loss, we had settled into life a certain way. When we lose it, our confidence in life is jolted. And that lack of confidence develops into fear. This fear can come from

Page 454 …

seemingly out of nowhere, and rob us of the safe secure feelings we had. There are many people who will ask us questions, give flippant advice, and if we let them, they can hurt us. However, we can choose to understand that often their pity is the best they have to offer us, and their questions, however thoughtless, are an outgrowth of their interest and natural curiosity. If people say worthless things to us, then we can discard these words into the trash. We want understanding from others, then we need to give understanding. There are not many people who will nurture us in silence, and just be there silently with us. And sometimes during grieving we want to talk, or to be talked to, but sometimes we just want silent companionship. Grieving is healing. When we lose something externally, sometimes we then try to internalize it. Its as if we are saying, “Now Ill place it in myself and then I wont lose it.” We may adopt the mannerisms of the person we lost, we may in an effort to stop the pain substitute something for them. After we heal, we will still be vulnerable to surprise triggers, which will trigger us to remember our period of grief. First, we must get over our loss, and then we will have to get over the grieving memories. As individuals we have to wrestle with powers that are greater than us. Changes in life, caused by overpowering uncontrollable events in life, may produce strong feelings of loneliness. If this is equation on life is written in another way, it can also be reduced to the statement loneliness equals a fear of life with its uncontrollable changes. The only way to win against overwhelming situations is to take baby steps and to deal with those situations that we can and keep moving forward even if its only at a snails pace. Gradually, as we step through and over the small problems, we will gain the confidence and inner strength to face the bigger ones. Life is brief. Many generations have come and gone. And just as a rain storm is made up of little rain drops, God Almightys big plans and His big purpose is produced through each of us tiny drops on the panorama of time. At some point in the recovery phase of grieving, we relearn our own happiness. We salvage what is good in our life, and we recognize how to be happy and we allow ourselves to be happy and move forward. In recovery we find ways to record the past so it is not forgotten, and then turn the focus of our minds onto the present. We can not be happy in the past or the future, for we live only in the present. It is possible to let go of the past without giving up caring. We can go forward into changes, while our memories carry all that was good of the past that we want to bring with us. Finally, as we recover, we get to the point where we are now equipped to comfort others. As we move forward to help them, we find that in helping them with their grief, we further heal ourselves. What a healing it is when we are able to be thankful for all the wonderful things we have experienced. Some of us have had hard lives, but most of us (there are exceptions) have something that we can appreciate. Thank the good Lord that the earth hasnt jerked as it has revolved around its axis. If it had just once, we might have seriously been hurt. We take so much for granted. Our grief feels like it will rob us of joy forever. Nothing seems to console. We dont think we could ever love anyone in the future, like the people we miss from the pass. In the early stages of grief, we were in a fog and it was frightening not being sure how to travel. But we learn to be patient with ourselves, and to balance self-improvement, solitude and involvement with others. Day by day our emotional lives stabilize.

More and more, we bloom like a flower and we open up to the sunshine all around us. We find new sources of love and joy. And as we finally recover, we are amazed at how

Page 455 …

much grief has silently taught us. We never knew we were so strong. How did we persist in persisting. How did we get past just floating numbly through the day? When we recover, we surprise ourselves at that inner strength and patience we always had but didnt know was there. Finally, the value of choice shines so bright. How wonderful God was in giving us choice. Thanks to grief, we have stopped to reflect upon our lives, and we have realized what is important. The chance to make good choices is important. Now we realize how important. Now we realize that we can choose and design our lives like we choose with the new strengths we discovered through the grieving process. We are survivors, and survivors are strong people. Survivors have better-defined goals, fresh views, and stronger views. We have thrown away oor masks, and we are facing life with a fresh understanding of who we are. As we grieved we recognized those things in life which gave us life and strength. Now we appreciate those life-giving things. As recovered survivors we no longer need to ask why we live, we realize the value of living life to its fullest potential. Now we are ready to be used of God. We are content to be alive.

GUILT, dealing with (also see art. on “Self-forgiveness)

a. In a deep contrite spirit confess your sins
b. Review the story of the prodigal son
c. Understand how Christs sacrifice attoned and paid for all guilt
d. Make restoration, restitution, and reparation to those injured.

Page 456 …

Why have millions, if not billions of dollars, been spent on research into the mind-body interaction and hypnosis? Many believe self-hypnosis is a tool for making changes in your life. Others see hypnosis as a mystical hocus pocus tool to be (mis)used by people to control others. Part of the reason hypnosis is such a controversial subject is because the powerful elite that control the establishment know it is extremely powerful, that it works, and they want to keep its power out of the hands of the people. Another reason that hypnosis is controversial is that spiritually discerning people have realized that there is a demonic element involved with the process. They realize that hypnosis opens up portals in the mind for demons. This section will attempt to lay out facts, and allow the reader to draw their own conclusions and use whatever techniques that seem to have the best therapeutic potential. Hypnosis is a state of mind in which suggestions are accepted and acted upon more powerfully than they are under normal conditions. The Illuminati rank hypnotic trance depth from 0 to 10, where 0 equals being totally out of the trance state, and 10 equals a comatose state. This scale is called “Jacobs ladder”. You will find top-notch hypnotists will refer to trance depths as steps. The reader needs to bear in mind, that the Illuminati programmers can number the descending trance depths either “1 to 10” or “10 to 1”. The choice of which -way to number the depths when training an alter depend on several factors. When training a small child, they may be able to count 1 to 10 but may not be able to reverse the count. The programmer may use the count “1 to 10” because it is what the child can count. The programmer may use the 0 to 10 method, as a reversal to what other hypnotists do in the world. The programmers will use one induction method in one area of an alter system and the reverse (or another type) in another area to throw a therapist off track. (For those unfamiliar with hypnotic inductions, it is common for psychiatrists/hypnotists to induct people down “10…9…8…7…” on down to 1. When bringing the subject up, hypnotists at times actually refer to these levels as “steps.” In training the child to go down into trance, climbing and descending stairs while counting is used, and the game “Chutes and Ladders” is played. The child has often learned to trance as a reflex to the trauma it has received even while in the womb, so the assistant programmers only need to give these already acquired trance states numbers. Under hypnosis, a person can access and control areas of the mind that are normally out of reach of the conscious mind. This also applies to victims of mind-control, who can use the trance state to work their way through the amnesic barriers to work with parts of the mind that the conscious mind cant reach.

The hypnotic trance is a naturally occurring phenomenon. Most modern Americans walk around in a slight hypnotic trance. The stress of the rat race, television, video games etc. contribute to the overall trance states that Americans walk around in. Have you ever come into a room full of people who have their eyes wide-eyed glued to the television? They are in a trance state. Have you ever thought about an important problem while driving to work. You were in a trance state. Your mind was operating on two levels at once. The spiritual danger that is inherent in hypnosis is that it opens up the spiritual portals of the mind. The true loving Creator of the Universe doesnt seek His own, because love doesnt seek its own, but is self-sacrificing. Yahweh God is a gentleman (so to speak) who gently knocks at your door, and wants your conscious mind to voluntarily decide to serve

Page 457 …

him. The Kingdom of Demons operates just opposite of this. Demonic entities are always trying to capture the subconscious, to trick the mind, and to force the person into servitude. When the mind relaxes, and lets down its natural barriers to the subconscious, it is an open door for demonic attack. For Illuminati programming, the best hypnotic results occur at about 7. Some people can be hypnotically programmed at 5-6, but some children will fight it at that level. Most will cooperate by 7 and everyone else will be cooperative by 8. Beyond 8, the mind and body are in a very dangerous deep trance. It may surprise some to learn, that ALL major programs are put in at the deepest level, level 10. The base level 10 is used for the foundations of every program. Why? Because this level is associated in the mind with the primal functions of life, and the only way this programming can be tampered with is to use drugs and a medical facility which will monitor vital signs the entire time. Once the Illuminati have programmed in the basics to all the programming they want, they will refine and build upon that deep programming at other trance levels. The programming is like an octopus with its head at level 10 and its tentacles reaching up into the lighter trance states. Most alters within a system will learn to stay in the mind at a level 5 trance. The programmers will teach the alters to stay at whatever trance level they want that alter to function at. They want the alter to maintain its trance state. A few strong front alters may operate at a 3 to 4. Since most people are unfamiliar with trances, front alters appear to be normal to the outside world. Most memories of a slave occur at a 3-4 trance state. Some memories from deeper may float up to a 4 trance state. The programmers are intimately aware of how memories are connected to trance states, and they have a number of standard tricks to prevent therapists from getting anywhere. One standard hypnotic trick by the programmers is called a TRAP DOOR. A program or a memory will be placed in at various hypnotic levels. Lets say the programmer places in a memory at a level 4. They will then stop in the middle of whats happening and take the alter(s) down to an 8. The therapist comes along and is getting parts of the memory at four, and then the alter(s) remembering can not get anything more because they hit the part thats been put in at an 8. The reverse of this, is when the programmer programs various alters that if they hit a certain memory they are to trance deeper (or trance higher–depending on what the programmer wants). When the alter reacts as it has been trained, the mind skirts around the memory and never comes to rest where the memory or program lays. These tricks can also be coupled with the use of two opposite induction counting systems, in other words “Jacobs ladder” get changed. Like moving on a ladder, the mind climbs up or down. Should the therapist decide to use hypnosis with the victim, they should consider using a hypnotic tone of voice that is appropriate to what the victim will respond to. Sometimes hypnotists take control in a military voice as if they are the father figure, and some times they are very soothing as if they are the mother figure. In general, the maternal approach works best, although Hollywood and stage hypnotists like the more impressive authoritarian approach. Hypnosis can be related to the unconscious memories of being put to sleep as a child. This is why the programmer or handler will place himself into the role of putting the child victim to sleep. Brahms Lullaby is a favorite for hypnotists for inducing a trance. There is a strong tendency in many people to be submissive and to look for a savior figure, a daddy figure to guide them through life. Self-hypnosis has at times lessened the dependence upon the victim for the authority figure that comforted and

Page 458 …

soothed the victim with his hypnotic voice during the programming. Dont forget that the victim has been trauma-bonded with the hypnotic programmer, and has had a programming experience where drugs and hypnosis were used to give the victim a feeling of blissful, ecstatic merging with the programmer. The alter trusts the programmer totally. The alter will transfer that trust to the therapist, or if taught control over their own trance states learns to transfer power back to themselves. If a mind-controlled slave works toward developing the ability to self-trance so that they can regain power over the slaves system, the person will have to overcome several obstacles. The programmers lay in programming to prevent alters from doing their own thing, or allowing other people to hypnotize them. Imagery which uses the senses of smell, touch, hearing and even taste are powerful for hypnosis. Being able to construct visual images in your head is also a valuable tool of hypnosis. If the therapist and victim decide they want to use self-hypnosis to gain control over the victims life, such as learning to change negative self-talk into positive self-talk, to overcome fears and anxiety, or to quit a programmed habit, then imagery and visualization will work in the same powerful manner as they did when they were used in a negative way to enslave the person. Finally, there are some victims who will have serious qualms about hypnosis. They object that it smacks to much of being “cult-like” and that if-has demonic side-affects. If the victim does not feel comfortable with hypnosis, the therapist needs to respect that. It is quite possible that hypnosis falls into the category of things one doesnt strive to do, but sometimes is needed. In the Old Testament, God didnt want to have to kill His Creation with a flood, indeed He gives as one of the Ten Commandments “Thou shalt not kill.” and yet, He inspired Solomon to write, “To everything there is a season, A time for every purpose under heaven: A time to be born, And a time to die; A time to plant, And a time to pluck what is planted; A time to kill, And a time to heal; A time to break down, And a time to build up…A time to love, A time to hate; A time of war, And a time of peace.” ECC. 3:1

The ministers who have rejected hypnosis, even self-hypnosis, as a possible tool to help victims of mind-control usually have little concept of how much of the victims splintered dissociative mind lives and operates in trance. We would encourage people to view self-hypnosis as a trance state that is to be used as a means to freedom, not a way of life. As to the objection that the trance state opens one up for demonic attack, so do many other things in life, such as travelling as a missionary to a pagan country. The bottom line is that the missionary opens himself up for attack because he is trying to give life, and the use of hypnosis can only be justified if it is being used in a way that is consistent with giving life and freedom, and life-more-abundant.

SERIOUS UNADDRESSED ISSUES AT THE DEEPEST HYPNOTIC LEVELS

At the time this is being written, there are millions of people world-wide with end-time programming. This Illuminati mind-control programming has been put in at the deepest levels of the mind. The end-time programming concerns those events that are to happen to usher in the reign of the Anti-Christ. This author is sad that she obediently played a role of helping program this end-time programming into young slaves. What has this to do with hypnosis? Because so far therapists and ministers have only played with the surface issues. Therapists will only deal with issues that clients talk about, and most ministers only deal with surface issues they consider important. There are lots of slaves and Vietnam Viets, who have programming layered in at the deepest hypnotic levels for the end times, and no one is doing anything about it.

Page 459 …

End-time programming will resemble the following. Some teams will assemble to carry out missions, sometimes the missions will be one-way missions like the Manchurian candidate. Some individuals will perform acts of violence and may end up getting themselves killed. Some of the hierarchy systems will go back to the cult and flip their system from being Christian into being day-to-day Satanists. The world will have an anti-Christian fad, where everyone will seem to be turning to the occult and hating Christians. Systems, which have Christian fronts, believe that they can pray and resist the final call-back. These type of prayers are similar to praying for someone else. It will still be that other persons choice as to what they do, and in this case, the persons (alters) with end-time programming have this programming attached to the primal part of the mind, that part which regulates such things as the heart beat. Faith overcomes the world (& by extension the New World Order.) Just as people we pray for still travel directions we dont like, unfortunately alters with end-time programming may well travel directions contrary to our prayers. Still total faith in an omnipotent God is far better than no faith. The mind of the survivor is like a computer where the operator snaps the mouse on an icon and then shifts into another enviroment, and continues to move into subsequent areas of programming. Hypnosis could be used as a tool to move down through these “Monarch mind-control computer icons. Although lots of victims of mind-control have come in to therapists for help, very little work has been done to go down the various computer paths and get into the hidden information that is stored everywhere within an alter system. Deliverance work has been done with a number of victims by a number of Christian therapists, where the Christian therapists were able to use spiritual techniques to break down the walls to get into areas of a system. The co-authors of this book believe that some deep work with end-time programming may need hypnotic drugs and medical supervision, in spite of our experience in seeing some success without going to this extreme.

Page 460 …

IDENTITY, discovering it

All non-multiple persons as children have ego states that develop and are integrated as time goes on into a more and tighter cohesive package. Most of the lines between the different states disappear after age one, and the child goes on to develop a single identity. With programmed multiples, the deeper alters, such as spin kittens, will be depersonalized to such an extent that they will have no sense of self. They will also have no sense of reality. Some alters have a 2-D world, where time does not exist in their concept of reality. However, deeper kitten alters, for instance, will not even have that. They have been stripped of even a concept of reality. When they hold the body everything is surreal and clouded by the hypnotic state they exist in. Out-of-body experiences, feelings that everyone else in the world is unreal, thoughts that one is dead are all classified in psychology as depersonalization. A normal Illuminati system will have many parts that are depersonalized. Reality for a spin kitten is but a facade. Can you blame such an alter? Whenever they are used they receive tremendous abuse in the outside worlds reality. It is better that they consider reality to be the walls that they live in along with the internal world they have created for themselves. Reality is being pulled between life and death, and they need to try and find a balance. -These deeper depersonalized alters need a new birth into the truth, they need an exodus experience out of their identity as a slave, into a new promised land. This again is why the safety of the slave is essential for progress. Why should a severely traumatized alter, which regularly receives the worst abuse imaginable when they hold the body, want to give up the comfort of their internal world, and come live in the rest of the worlds reality–if it means more abuse. The children of Israel wanted to go back to Egypt where as slaves they had some certainty. To get a new identity away from slavery is a challenge. There are many parallels that can be drawn between the children of Israel finding their freedom and identity as a people and a group of alters discovering who they are. Sometimes alters can help each other, and sometimes families of alters get into internal feuds. Sometimes a single alter can sabotage the hard work of many alters. Notice how God had Moses give the tribes back their history and ancestry. Soon each person could identify himself as a member of a family that gave him a sense of belonging. Each tribe had a flag. God also insisted that they break from the past. The alter who has lost its identity needs to learn to walk, to feel, to see, to hear beyond the programming. It needs to learn the who, when, where & how of who he or she is. The therapist may say, “You are not a princess,” or “You are not a snowy fluffy white kitten.” “Your identity is your birthright.” “Youre human, thats really where the truth is.” It will be hard for such an alter. Everything they thought was real, was fantasy. And reality is extremely painful, so painful that it is beyond words, it is but a deep anguish. But the alter needs to break its old ties to the slaves master, break all soul ties, and unshackle himself or herself from the lies. Then the therapist can teach them their strengths, and they can begin to find some self-respect in who they were when the system was born, and who they are becoming, and who they are as God sees them. Therapists will try to promote the humanism within an alter, by referring to it in human terms, such as saying “family of alters” rather than the cults terminology “litter of kittens”. Doing this may be helpful to the overall cumultive effect of showing alters their humaness, but it doesnt need to be done in a legalistic fashion.

Page 461 …

IMPLANTS, dealing with

The people who are using implants for mind-control arent about to tell us what they are doing, and they certainly havent obtained the victims permission for their sadistic behavior. They havent spent trillions of dollars researching, designing and installing these black budget and secret projects, if they werent convinced that they work. They are trying hard to get implant technology to the point it is tamper proof.

The controllers seem to think they are above accountability. The various implants arent the stuff of sci-fi or delusions, their reality can be documented from real sources. Tracking implants are being put into our children and our dogs by people who want to “help” us not lose anything. Any bozo can purchase human tracking implants today & use them on their fellow man. After youve gotten over your denial that this is happening you are ready to deal with the unfortunate reality that we live in. The achilles heel of the NWO is that they have too many things to control and keep track of. This is why they use computers. Computers with artificial intelligence may be able to play chess and make decisions, but they are not superior to the human mind, and you as a human still have a chance to outsmart them. The human, whose mind is being read, can think in codes and speak in codes. The NWO does not have the manpower to control their implant victims with human handlers 100% of the time.

IDENTIFY WHO

Thousands of implants victims (& electronic mind-control) are looking for help, some of them have approached the two co-authors for help. Some have given up fighting the implants. Some have bought into the flimsy cover stories that their syntel handlers try to give them to cover up who is actually controlling them. For instance, implant victims, who obviously have American handlers, are being told that their handlers are Iranians who hate America, or the Japanese who are trying to repay America for Hiroshima, or the Russians, etc. The first step is to recognize who your handlers are. 100% of the implant victims in this country who knew enough clues to provide clues were victims of American organizations. The Germans, the Swedish, the English, the Russians and who knows who else are all putting implants into people. Fritz has lived in several continents and can spot Americanisms immediately. One of the victims which we know, Carole Price, is also aware of Americanisms. The handlers of implant victims in this country have been obviously Americans. So the first step is to recognize that if you are an American, and your problem developed in this country, dont blame aliens, whether from overseas or from outer space. The supposed alien implants in this country that alien abductees keep discovering have continually gotten more sophisticated. The hard fact is that it is our own secret government as part of the NWO, not aliens that are subjecting us to these implants. Now we have identified the basics of the question “who?”. Refer back to the list of abuser organizations in Vol 2 page 18 for a comprehensive list of specifically what organization might be involved. Yes, there is even evidence that groups like Division 5 of the FBI are involved in this type of mind-body control. Also realize that many syntel implants are being controlled by artificial intelligence in computers most of the time. Try outsmarting the machine by doing unpredictable things.

IDENTIFY WHAT

If you are an implant victim begin journalling what is happening to you. Begin sharing your experiences with other people who understand that implants are being used. Go to a spectrum analyzer and find out what signals are being sent. Go to an anechoic chamber and

Page 462 …

find out where the signals are coming from. Get heat thermography done of your body and find out the locations of implants that way. Map out where the pain occurs. Pin point where your master implant is located. Knowledge of what is happening will help you and others fight what they are doing to you.

DE-ACTIVATING IMPLANTS

Because a variety of implants are being employed by the NWO, there is no set answer to what is going to work. A person is going to have to discover if the implant is metallic, plastic, a virus, carbon-based or whatever. If you can identify how the implant is working–you have a chance to counter it. If you can get yourself to a location where they cannot get signals to & from the master implant, then they will lose track of you. Every few minutes they monitor the exact location of where the victim is. Their tracking computers will soon learn if they have lost track of where you are. That is fine. When they lose track, stay out of their signals long enough to get over 25 miles out of range, and they may lose track of what area you are in. How long you as an implant victim can remain out of their signals depends on where you are willing to go and what you are willing to do. A code activates some of the main implants on a body suit of implants. Many have some kind of safety feature to prevent someone from activating them who is a non-approved user. It is speculation at this point, but some of these implants may self-destruct if a person is able to make the implant think it were being tampered with by a non-approved user. If the main implant that controls other implants of a body suit is shut down it might bring a general relief to the victim. FOR VIRUS IMPLANTS. There are some antibiotics, some colloidal metals like colloidal silver, and perhaps some juices like cranberry juice that may destroy a virus implant. Certain juices or substances might change the bodys chemistry. An implant victim might test several things and see if they can find one that throws the bodys system off.

FOR METALLIC LIKE IMPLANTS.

There are a few honest surgeons (they are far more rare than any one would at first imagine) that will take out implants. Although Fritz and I have heard of a number of these surgeons, we do not give out their names.

FOR ELECTRONIC IMPLANTS. Some victims have blasted their implant(s) with some type of electromagnetic energy to a degree that they blew the implants. Other victims have found some relief from lead shields. The woman who makes lead suits to protect people is:

Shirley S. Still, 680 W. Rose St., Lebanon, OR, 97355. The company that produces lead shields using her patent #5,038,047 is Shielding, Inc. International, P.O. Box Z, Madras, OR 97741-0069. ph. no. 541-475-7211, Fax 541-475-6628.

COVERING ONESELF.Implant victims have covered themselves with cages of various metallic substances & other things to isolate themselves from the electronic control. The newer implants are nearly impossible to isolate from, but implant victims should certainly try.

FOR FIBER OPTICS. Fiber optics are often like hairs. The victim should look for suspicious looking hair, such as in the pubic area–better yet, simply shave. Some victims have pulled or shaved off their fiber optic implants.

One victim of implants provided this list to search out & destroy implants:

1. Electro-Magnetic Forcefields of Interference

a. by going to a cable co. & walking around the area of the live satellite dishes. At a safe point, place both hands onto a live satellite dish.
b. try the same at a telephone co.
c. to a utility co. electric transfer Pt. & walk around the area.
If the victims implants respond to this type of countermeasure, they will experience a pulling sensation, which is a positive sign. Standing near a TV as it is repeatedly turned on & off may create interference with the implants too.

Page 463 …

2. Full Body Electo Magnetic Scanner
3. Full Body MRI with contrast
4. Gas Chromatography, Toxic Light Chromatography, Mass Spectrotography, & Blood analysis.
5. Mason Receivers
6. Non Linear Detectors
7. Pherigen Test
8. Spectrum Analyzers.

This victim recommends that if you have a telephone charging device in your home, reprogram it if possible each day, for the telephone can be one of the main power sources of implants.

THE BIGGER PICTURE.

Most victims of implants need to get the bigger picture. They need to find out what the Illuminati are and who the Illuminati bloodlines are. They need to learn who to trust and who not to trust. They need to learn about trauma-based mind-control because our experience has been that most implant victims are also victims of trauma-based mind-control. They need to realize that ALL phones in this nation are listened to. They need to understand that voice identification programs allow computers to identify who is talking over a phone by your voice.

We wish we had all the answers, but we dont. We can report that we have seen some victims get some temporary (short term) relief from implant control, which gives us hope that if all of us pull together and exchange what we are attempting to do, and what we learn that we will defeat them. Unfortunately, many implant victims are people who they have identified as isolated and without a support system. Perhaps the first step might be for victims to break their isolation, learn how to be good friends with others, and step out of the corner that the NWO has backed each of them into.

INTEGRATION, understanding

For years the goal of therapy has been “to integrate” the multiple. We believe that a more realistic and advantageous goal would be to allow the victims system to decide upon what form of functional unit they want to be, whether that is a well-organized company, or a close-knit family, or a single identity. The goal is to stabilize and create a functioning “person”. Everyone, non-multiples included, consist of competing parts in their minds. Even the great saint Paul, who God used so powerfully, said I do that which I dont want to do. Hollywood movies and several popular books have promoted unrealistic expectations that programmed multiples can simply do some integration work and be done. Support people use two words “integration” and “fusion” to describe various stages of the crumbling of dissociative barriers between alters. At one end of the spectrum is what is called “an apparent partial fusion” and at the other end is “full integration.” Many programmed multiples terminate their therapy before the therapist has much of an idea what the therapist is looking at. Because the front parts of a system are amnesiac to the deeper levels, there have been numerous cases where clients fully believed they were integrated, but the client was unaware of the numerous levels of alters hidden away. Nor will they probably ever detect these levels. Is multiplicity the real problem of programmed slaves, or is their slavery the real problem? The therapists have had a tendency to want to rescue the slave from their multiplicity while not rescuing them from their slavery. The multiplicity is the slaves principal survival mechanism for enduring the slavery. The issues of safety for these DID (MPD) slaves are still not being addressed, even after over a century of examination by psychologists on DID. Not only do we have problems within DID clients, but we have problems within the professional community.

Page 464 …

Some therapists have decided that multiples are refusing to integrate because they like the attention they get from the therapist (or others) being a multiple. While this may occur, it strikes us as premature for most therapists to judge the victim this way, when they still have such a limited grasp of the programming and the other features of mind-control. Most therapists still do not even recognize that there is a World Order that is controlled by the abusers. Some Counselling courses are teaching their students that multiplicity gives a person a superiority over people who are non-multiples, because it gives them a broader repertoire of actions and abilities. When Fritz took counselling, his college instructor encouraged all would-be counsellors to create a pseudo-type of multiplicity. When a multiple system develops a high degree of internal cooperation and communication between various alters and levels, they may feel compelled to hold onto the systems multiplicity because it gives them such a wide amplitude of actions, and makes accountability more difficult. Even though there are distinct advantages (or at least what appear to be distinct advantages), there are times for all programmed multiples when their multiplicity is simply “hell”. Fusion is generally a process. It is similar to two people getting to know each others lives. A full integration is when they become one. Is this becoming one like two people marrying, or is it like two bodies/brains actually physically merging? A full integration is the complete merger of the two dissociative parts of the mind, however, much of what is called “integration” is really more like the marriage of two individuals–and the reader knows that divorces do happen, in the external world and they also happen between alters that “integrate” in this fashion. The longer the marriage the more chance for the union.

While it is true that as long as there is dissociation left and alters, the Network has a foothold to exploit; but another reality is, even if the person integrated fully, the threat that the Network could grab the person and manipulate his or her mind still exists. Again the question must be asked, “What is the primary problem, the multiplicity or the slavery?” The primary block to integration is programming. And the programming is held in place by demonic entities, lack of safety, dissociation, force of habit, alters who believe they want the programming, and the core splits and the core. While we will not go into the full details of how integration-blocking programs are put in, the therapist needs to understand that the client has received lots of heavy programming not to integrate. Trying to integrate doesnt feel like moving to safety, it feels like moving toward death, and if the support team is not careful, trying to integrate alters could easily result in triggered suicide programs actually being acted out. The therapist tells the client in glowing terms how happy they will be to integrate, but the client only feels the death programs that are attached to any thoughts of integration. It seems that therapists could be more discrete and get what they want to accomplish through the back door, rather than tearing down the house trying to get through a booby-trapped front door. One of the best ways is to tell a story (such as Jesus did, and Milton Erickson did) that by-passes the grid of mental resistance and reaches the subconscious heart of a persons thought processes. Creating these kinds of stories allow the therapist to develop his or her own creativity. The stories do not even need to be fiction, they just need to be anecdotes that evoke the subconscious to make the connection to the moral, without the minds resistance to change being triggered. For instance, there was once a man who found a piece of glass while he was walking. It was so beautiful. Later, he found a gemstone while he was out in the woods. Over a period of time he found many beautiful things and he put them together in a mosaic. The different colors of the gems worked so well together that they created a masterpiece, for the unified whole was far superior to the beauty of the individual pieces.

Page 465 …

INTERNAL INFORMATION, how to get i.i.

The great philosophers have encouraged men to “Know thyself.” Self-awareness is easier said than done; it is hard for anyone to crawl into ones own head to see how it works. Our conscious minds reveal precious little about how our conscious thoughts surface from deep in the mind. Whether one is a multiple or not, the mind does a great deal of thinking without thinking about it. Many of the important articles of my second half to this book have been devoted to how to get internal information, for instance:

Communication Issues
Fear issues
Trust Issues
Alters, deep, how to work with d. a.
Biography
Dreamwork
Hypnosis, self, ins & outs
Mapping

The material we have provided on structuring will give many insights into how the Illuminati slaves system is set up. As you may know, things begin with the four elements & then are layered outward like an onion. The entire thing fits together like a 3-D puzzle. The grid that the handler carries with him, will spell out the who, where, what and why of the system. Everything in the system represents something. Simple things can often be important pieces. This article deals with learning how the clients mind works. Well provide a few more specific insights on how to get internal information, in addition to the above articles. Initially, the clients mind is working on trust. Information will begin flowing once some trust is established. Build the trust first. Initially, the therapist will be trying to establish if the person is a programmed DID. Once that is secure in the therapists mind, the therapist can begin assisting the client to discover what he can not find without the aid of the support team about how the clients mind is working. And a giant puzzle begins to be assembled. One of the most difficult things to achieve is a coherent chronology of the persons life. As more and more information is journalled and recorded the puzzle will piece itself together. Of course, the therapist needs to take good notes, or have an assistant do this. It is often beneficial for the principle alters involved in therapy to see the notes. Another way to do this is to have the sessions tape recorded and let the system go home with the tape and see if they can build upon what was in the session. The slaves mind is programmed to believe that they will die if anything about the internal world is learned or seen. When information is recovered and they survive its recovery they expose the lie. It will be uncomfortable for alters to go against the programming, but they will soon demonstrate to themselves that they will not be dead the next day for learning about their programming.

Assisting the victim to see.

Some therapists are having great success teaching primary alters how to do self-hypnosis in order to trance deep. By doing this, alters can go down and retrieve information. Another way to get information is simply to speak through to the subconscious. The therapist wants to make each alter feel relaxed. Alters in deep trance states & deep kitten alters may feel more comfortable with dim lighting. One cant automatically assume that alters will feel most comfortable laying on a couch. Sometimes that feels too close to when they were programmed. Alters should be allowed to choose where they feel most comfortable, on a chair, a couch, or in a corner. They can be allowed to find the place they will feel safest in. Often when the client goes looking, the host alter simply does not see its internal world. During the therapy, there will be a sense that

Page 466 …

something exists there, but the client will not know how to tag it. You know how you have a nagging thought that you have left something behind, but the description of whatever it was, has not surfaced? Many times all the victim is aware of, is that something seems to be there. To deal with this, the alters can turn lights on, shine the light of the Holy Spirit on things, put windows in, reconfigure mirrors so they can be rotated, or are made from 1-way mirrors into 2-way mirrors. Then the images that come through 2-way mirrors can be enlarged until something comes into view. Many times, with the Alice In Wonderland programming, things behind mirrors are small specks in the grass. Perhaps they see only Mr. Nobody. Like the song, Your nobody called today…”, the fact that Mr. Nobody is there is a clue that he is there. (Figuring out Mr. Nobody is common sense, he is mentioned just to remind us how things are hidden.)

Difficulties, pre-existing & created.

As a programmed multiple is worked with, they may seem calm on the outside, while all hell is breaking loose on the inside. One of the triggers that therapists often unnecessarily push is that they talk about how the alter is part of the whole. The alters will discover this for themselves. But every time the therapist verbalizes it, they trigger programming, and then various alters get triggered & upset. They feel like their I.D. is being taken away. They do need to learn that they are part of a whole, but it can be learned quietly over a period of time. The mind will slowly assimilate the reality of it. Occasionally, alters will give a therapist a concocted answer to deflect more questions. Another difficulty is that the therapist and alters will almost always discover the cover story & the cover programming first. There is an art to asking questions to multiples and an art to interpreting the answers. Its O.K. for the victim to only have pieces. Its O.K. for the victim to change things as progress is made. Initially, the front alters will be trying to work through a great deal of false memories, planted thoughts, and programming. There is a knowing in the mind, between a planted thought and a real one. This knowing is hard to describe, but part of this knowing is the difference in impact a real trauma memory has in comparison to a false memory attached to a stringer of programming. The false memory will have emotions attached, but the intensity is much less, and these emotions do not linger like the impact of real traumas. After a while the victim will begin to discern the difference between the real and the false. A standard trauma for children is to lock them in a trunk, and dump the trunk into a body of water where a.the trunk fills with water, b. the child drowns, and c. is resuscitated in time to not suffer brain damage. How does the victims mind remember this? The young child doesnt have a fully developed ability to anticipate. They have been locked in boxes before. From having debriefed children of these traumas, it is manifest that they never remember

the drowning (which takes anticipation), what they remember crystal clear is the terror of being locked in a dark box (which connects with their memories of similar traumas). The emotional affect of this trauma will be dissociated. Another reason why information processing slows down is that information is not processed with its affect, its emotional content. After the therapist asks, “What do you see?” he can ask, “How does this make you feel?” By encouraging the feelings, the memories get worked on rather than being stuffed. When memories get stuffed, then the next layer of memories is harder to reach.

At times when a particular area of a system is worked in, the client may feel certain feelings. “Why do you feel certain ways when you work on certain areas?” And if that feeling is “Im bad”, then rewrite a reverse program, so that each time the alter hears “Im bad”, it hears

Page 467 …

& thinks “Im good.” The programmers depend upon the mind not wanting to believe itself. When one dissociated part of the mind creates something, the other parts are not in touch with that creation. For instance, parts create their home or environment that they live in. If another part were to try to get in touch with that internal home, it all seems like hearsay, second hand information. If you were the fourth born son, you would not remember the first few years of the first born sons life! It is no different for the fourth split to try to get in touch with the first splits history. It was created afterwards & it has none of the early memories of the first split. The client asks the therapist, “You want me to believe I have rivers, if there are rivers there, then why dont I know?” If the therapist is not careful, the client (unable to see the internal world) may think the therapist is a wee bit crazy. You may get responses such as “Whats a castle?” “Why would I want to go into a graveyard, and dig up old bones? Thats scary.” Some directions are not in the best interest of the therapy. It is not advisable to get the castle librarian. It is more important not to destablize the system, than any good that would be achieved in this direction.

Where to search for information.

The multiples mind will play a mental hide and seek with the therapist. The therapist is looking for holes in which to work through the system. Make a guess, and investigate it with some shrewd test. Try by-passing programming roadblocks with ambiguous statements, that the victims mind has to put into its own context. Much of what we hear in life is ambiguous, except that it is said in some context. Without a given context, the mind has to find one of its own. This is the science of how the mind represents ideas inside its mind. The therapist can gain insights if they will talk to the fear & talk to the anxiety. These emotions may be hiding parts behind them. When a particular alter is having a panic attack, the particular alter may not be able to see the alter with the panic emotions behind it. When you find an alter, main alters may have several roles for the outside world, and several internal jobs. Special purpose fragments, who have no history, are simply parts for a particular job. The therapist can ask questions such as, What does such & such smell smell like? The therapist can talk about their phobias & about their reactions to different foods. If the system has done or will do art work, and if the therapist will talk long enough about it, then they are likely to get someone pop up who can tell you about it. Questions like, “What do you see in the mind?” encourage the alters to start seeing what is happening in their internal world.

Therapists should look for the blue rooms, which are balancing points and a good place to start on each level. The magical room is a room full of gidgets and gadgets. There will be 26 rooms, two for each color. Look for the trees, such as “Do you have any trees in your system? Ask your mind.” One novel way to gain insights into a client, would be for the client to give a signed release to the therapist on paper that the therapist can come to the clients house and observe in order to understand better what the client is all about, and what the situation is for the client. Another novel way to by-pass programming and to give dehumanized alters a sense of who they are is to give their handwriting to a graphoanalyst for a handwriting analysis.

Page 468 …

JOBS, new ones for alters

During the work on a system, there are different opportunities to encourage alters to step away from their programming, and carry out another job, role or task. Sometimes when the programming has collapsed, it has been appropriate to give alters new garments & new internal jobs. (This is also useful in delineating between demonic alter imitations -demonic constructs–and real alters.) In cases where the programming has entirely collapsed but the alters are not at a place to integrate, mt. schools can be set up for alters to get to know each other & learn new ideas. In terms of working with a particular alter, the therapist can inquire about what the alters internal job & history is, and what the alter can do besides that. Often the alter will say that there is nothing else he/she is interested in. But if the alter has creativity, the therapist may be able to direct that creativity in a new direction. If the alter is afraid of a particular task, the therapist might be able to use the alters creativity for he/she to mentally rehearse the job that it fears, where the alter takes control & has a positive outcome. This mental rehearsing may be enough of a calmer for the alter to successfully succeed at the new but feared non-programmed task. If an alter learns a new job, or role or task, he/she in turn can be an internal team leader to teach things to other alters. He can be the eyes for those alters that still need to learn how to function in the outside world in some task. Deeper alters will have only experienced the outside world in a programmed state. To take the body in an unprogrammed state will be a sharper experience, and the body will feel different. They will need to have their confusion over norms and boundaries clarified. They will have to slowly learn that they can handle a new responsibility. The rest of the alters will watch, and they will have to show that they can earn respect in the way they take on the new responsibility.

Page 469 …

JUSTICE SYSTEM, dealing with the broken j.s.

The reader is probably not surprised that anyone who has the audacity to write about how to deprogram multiples also has an article on how to deal with the justice system. Writing about the justice system could take a book, and choices of titles might be, “How to ride a dead horse.” “How to jump into quicksand.” or “How to win by trial and error.” We really dont have any good advice about “justice”, in fact in terms of legal advice we dont have any–except to say stay as far a way from legal problems as possible. And most of the readers already knew that. So now that the reader knows that we are all on common ground–or should we say, legal quicksand, we are relieved of any burden to actually accomplish anything in this article, which is about the way you will feel about the legal system once you get involved with its fast-as-molasses process. When dealing with lawyers, it helps to repeat the following mantra, “My time is not important. Time is very important for lawyers.” Most people have poor methodology when searching for a good lawyer. Looking for a good lawyer is like looking for a good therapist, and if you dont find the former you may want to find the latter. Since most people have plenty of time on their hands, we suggest that you go down to the courthouse and watch lawyers in action. This is probably the best way to see how your prospective lawyer functions. Lawyers are modern-day gladiators, at least that is what we want them to be. One supreme court justice said 50% of the lawyers are incompetent to work in the courts, and the bar association defended lawyers by counter claiming that the figure is only 20% are incompetent. Whatever figure you want to believe in is irrelevant, because the blindfolded lady who was holding the scales disappeared long ago while the lawyers had their backs turned litigating. If you poke and prod a gooey mess on the ground, you will finally figure out what the solution is. We figure that with enough prodding, the reader will finally figure something out. Most of the time, they conclude that the lawyer ripped them off. The lawyer didnt create the mess (well–maybe they did historically–but your lawyer didnt personally create the mess the judicial system is in–he is just like you, trying to figure out how to ride a dead horse. The only difference is that he gets paid a large fee to do it.) You have to watch your lawyer bills, some lawyers have abnormal calculators. Try to find a lawyer that you can communicate with, and who is honest, and who is on the same wavelength as you. At this point youre probably feeling that youre in a lot of trouble. And that is the whole point of this, were in a heap of trouble. The roots of our freedoms are being killed. The Bill of Rights is essentially a dead tree, waiting to be cut up and hauled off. So what are your chances of success with the legal system? I guess we all need to take a hard look at our dead horse, and give it a proper burial, and see if we can substitute a live one into its place. The problem is that the legal system is in the unique position of being granted the power to justify itself legally. If you thought you were going to get an answer on this page–well, we did experientially, you got as much here as you will likely get in the justice system, and it cost a lot less. Now hows that for a great deal!

Page 470 …

MAPPING

The subject of mapping a system concerns the task of putting down on paper how the mind of the victim has been structured. It goes almost without saying that the therapist should be familiar with what has been written by the authors of this book in both this book and the Vol. 2 Formula book. The information in our books will take out lots of guesswork on mapping a system. If one understands programmed DID (MPD), one will immediately know numerous items & alters that a system will have to have. Just as common sense teaches us that a particular type of farm will have particular items, likewise an IlIum, system HAS to have many of the items we have described in detail. For instance, on a regular 13 x 13 grid of programs, the first square typically named 6.6 will have the program SEE NO EVIL, DO NO EVIL, HEAR NO EVIL–No-talk type messages linked to a suicide program. The alters will have both an internal world created for them, as well as a secret code grid. ln both the internal world and within the grid, will be demonic interjects, demonic constructs. Within both the computer grids and the alters worlds, there will be a center point upon which things will collapse, but can be rebuilt by the subconscious mind which is still programmed. The structuring is a layering effect. The assistant programmers will have the small child write scribbles, because the scribble designs are important for the subconscious. The structuring begins in the subconscious. There are many reasons why mapping is important. First, many alters will be in denial that they are part of a multiple personality system. They need to break their denial to move forward. Second, many alters are unaware of how their system is constructed. They need to discover their structure to begin alter communication. Third, for the skilled therapist, there are approaches that can be taken to get past surface programs to erase large sections of programs. Fourth, as the therapist tries to organize the vast amount of information & notes they take, it is very helpful to be able to use the preexisting organization of the client, in order to file information. If the therapist does not keep track of the structure, they will have a pile of disorganized notes. Fifth, mapping will expose positions of alters, who may otherwise remain undiscovered due to their oaths of silence. Initially, the therapist must build trust. The therapist may want to work at this before the entire support team is brought together. Trust is the foundation for mapping. It will flow down through a system and work like a protective cover. The victim needs to begin to journal, do art work, or if possible talk to the therapist. There will be powerful “no-talk” programs, like the one just mentioned on the 6.6 cell on the alpha grid. Somehow, in whatever fashion will work, the victim will need to circumvent the no-talk programs and the suicide programs, to begin to discover him or her self. The alters can begin to do a history, who are they, what has happened to them, what is their job, why were they “born”, how old are they, etc. Many of the front alters will at best only be aware of 4 or 5 of themselves. All parts of a programmed multiple are important to recovery. Each part needs to discover what family of alters it belongs to, and how it can interact & communicate with others. Becoming co-conscious with each other is a powerful step toward defeating the programming. Alters can not truly be eliminated from the mind of a programmed multiple, because they are a dissociated part of the mind. That is why the programmers build dumping places for “dead” alters and other unusable parts, and fragments. Demonic introjects can be cast out, and indeed need to be. Ministers that try to tidy up the mind of programmed multiples by casting out alters have caused untold misery to many victims. At best, they have simply caused the

Page 471 …

front host alter to go into denial that the system still has many alters. This greatly aids the programmers and handlers, because this is what they want to happen. Working on an alter system with programming running is very difficult. It is like working on an airplane that is flying. The therapist begins to feel like an acrobat, trying to carry out skillful stunts. It is understandable how for temporary purposes, the therapist may tell the victim: “your mind created that, it can do away with that.” Alters, landscapes, programs, etc. are simply constructs of the mind. If the persons mind will accept the removal of a mental image, the therapist may want to use such abilities to gain some control over the “flying airplane” that they want to ground so they can work on it. But removing alters, computers, programs etc. are not easy answers. Alters are actually parts of the mind, and the mind naturally uses its survival instincts to protect each part. Computers and programs will rebuild unless their anchoring mechanisms are taken out. Erasing memories is another trap. Memories are coded and laid in on the grids too. Again the simple solution seems to be to delete the memories–but that again is not the answer. That simply drives the memories deeper, just like alters will secretly hide deeper if they think the therapist wants “to kill them”. The victims mind is very skilled in moving its dissociative pieces around, so it will stay a jump ahead of the therapist. Memories can be “washed” with the negative emotional parts of them saved in a jar. In order to map, the therapist may want to teach alters how to construct safe places in the mind. Experience has shown, that if a hypnotic-created image of a safe place is constructed, the internal programmers can usually figure out a method to destroy the safe place in approximately 24 hours. With ongoing work, the imagery may survive several days. As the reader has begun to see, the solution to mapping is simply lots of hard work. Most of the short cuts do not work. There are skilled methods to access deeper alters who know the maps of the systems, but remember the internal worlds are mental constructs that can be shifted by the mind. If there is a skilled member of the support team who is around the victim most of the time and who can take notes, then a great deal can be learned. During day-to-day life, many things will trigger the victim, and as the programming falls apart the MPD will become more visible.

To those who are unfamiliar with programmed DID (MPD), especially relatives, they may view the therapy with horror, because instead of a single person (the front host) now they have a team, or a group, or a world of alters who come and go. It seems that the therapy has created the multiplicity. The therapy has only uncovered what was hidden in secrecy by the programming, but those unfamiliar with programming generally dont understand what is taking place. Many alters will only show themselves in specialized situations. This is why a variety of activities, a variety of triggering movies, and a variety of hours/days/months are needed to begin to spot and identify new alters. This is where the limited time that the therapist sees the client greatly limits the therapists ability to understand what their client is about. The host alter may come into therapy for years, even though the deeper parts are coming out at night, when nobody else will spot them. There are a variety of methods to get alters to surface, and a variety of ways to get them to dissociate. If a therapist needs to get beyond an alter, they might try talking about something that will cause the alter to dissociate, and then doing things that encourage the part they want to come up. Mapping will call for trust, ingenuity, patience, and good notekeeping. We recommend it.

Page 472 …

HOW TO DEAL WITH MAZES

The internal structures of an alter system will have mazes constructed. Mazes are power structures to reinforce feelings of being helpless. Mazes reinforce the helplessness a victim feels. When a child undergoes the horrendous traumas that it is subjected to by sadistic programmers, it knows completely that it is helpless. The child is placed into small enclosures such as isolation booths, boxes, ice boxes, cages, caskets, caves, corners, closets, drawers, hung in isolated forests, stuffed into laundry hampers, holes in the ground, refrigerators, soundproof rooms, tin rooms, under sand, in car trunks, under water, and wells. Some victims of mind-control have endured all of the above list and perhaps more. The mazes connect to those memories of isolation and helplessness. When the alter gets trapped in a maze, all the strong child memories of isolation and helplessness flood the alter, and immobilize it with fear. The mazes are attached the mote of nothingness sensory deprivation memory, where the child victim was totally trapped. During a panicked state, the child was placed in a maze. The maze was put in during trauma, go back to what you know as truth, the programming is a lie, do a reversal. To get through the mazes the recovering victim needs to

a. stay calm,
b. remember that the maze is a hypnotic suggestion.
c. take your power back by acknowledging that the maze is only a hypnotic suggestion, and you dont need to play this mind game.
d. common sense & calmness will get you out.
e. shrink the maze down, because the maze will seem tall to the child. Shrink the maze down mentally until you can step over it. Start at the top until you can step over the image. When the image of the maze is as small as a speck of dust, blow it away, or sweep it away. If the alter must, use a magic wand, or star dust. Or if the alter is Christian use prayer.

HOW TO DEAL WITH MIRRORS

Illuminati multiple personality systems are structured with many mirrors. As an alter attempts to move in the mind to try to connect with another part (alter or world) of the mind, they often come up against mirrors. The mirrors are guarded by demons, and may have alters attached to the mirrors too. The therapist should never have the client break the mirrors, unless it is done in a very specific way.

The victims mind is able to visualize a glass room. A mirror that needs to be broken can be placed within a glass box made of 2-way mirrors itself. Then the demons within the mirrors will be confined in the box when the mirror is worked on, rather than have them scatter throughout the entire alter system wrecking havoc like a herd of pigs. The alters which are part of the mirror will also be contained. Once a glass room (box) is created around the mirror, the box can be flooded with the blood of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Any demonic forces attached to the mirror will be forced to leave, while the alters will stay behind. This way the damage is contained & confined. The authority & power of Christ, who is the victor, is powerful if properly used. The demons can be respectfully commanded to obey & go back to Christ their Creator for orders. Demons are under an authority structure and understand power & authority. The demons are not objects to ridicule, even though we do not agree with what they stand for & what they are all about. They will not respect your authority nor mine, but they will respect the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth. Please do not use some other name like Buddha. If the mirrors are not broken in this fashion, all hell breaks loose for the alters near the mirror. At times, mirrors are constructed within a system so that they are attached to trap doors & tunnels. The mind can be asked to tell whether the mirror is part of a tunnel system or something else. These systems are designed somewhat on the style of the Great Pyramid, in that there are secret tunnels, chambers and trap doors. “Dead” alters may be buried in places.

Page 473 …

PROGRAMMING, foundations, destruction of (as taught by an ex-Illuminati programmer)

Everyone comes upon a particular scenario in life, with their own understanding, their own perspective, their own set of things they consider to be foundational truths.

If we really want to understand the mind-control programming, we need to see it in the same context that the Illuminati mind-control programmers see it. Up until now, there has never been any Illuminati programmers who saw any purpose in breaking their oaths and revealing programming from an Illuminati programmers viewpoint. I have decided to take a bold step and allow you to see how my programming alters understand the programming. This section is like the fragile breath of a baby beginning to test a new world. Each time one sees the miracle of life, as a fragile baby tests out the air of the world with its first breaths, and discovers a new world beyond the womb, it is a powerful testimony of what our God-given life is all about. Our traumatic birth from the cocoon-like world of slavery into freedom is a miracle of Life. Life has a force of its own, and so will our own struggle for freedom.

We can say at the outset of explaining things, that we are not in a position to prove what we have seen and experienced. We could rummage through the dark books of magic to show a paper trail, but if the reader wouldnt believe our personal testimony of what we experienced, then why would they believe the papertrail? What we write in this section are the inner secrets that throughout our life as a programmer we were involved in to do the programming. We understand that some readers may object to certain ideas, and we want to let the reader know that it is O.K. to question what we write. However, this may be your one and only chance to really understand the programming as an Illuminati programmer sees it. So, in the spirit of being helpful to the countless victims of Illuminati mind-control, and in the spirit of hope and openness, we are baring our secrets to the world. Therapists who read this are welcome to send us feedback when they find what we say is validated. If they dont find this validated in their work with the very deepest secrets of a system, then there is a good chance they just havent gone far enough to find it yet.

Perhaps nothing is more baffling than how our minds work. Life is so complex that most of us give up trying to understand it. It is meant to be this way. The elite who have been gathering the mysteries of life for many thousands of years have wanted the common person to feel confused and overwhelmed. They have wanted the powers of darkness veiled from the people, so that they can use their supernatural evil powers without competition. They have hoarded the best of science, magic, psychology and spiritual knowledge to themselves, and given mankind the crumbs. This isnt something new, they have been keeping secrets from the bulk of mankind for thousands of years. In a sophisticated divide and conquer strategy, the mystery religions were created to hide from the masses the existence, power, and worship of Lucifer. The Illuminati were not going to expose their power base. The Bible is correct that Lucifer was appointed a position of great authority. He understands what an anointing is. And he is skilled in copying that anointing. The Bible writers Isaiah and Paul (in 1 TM 3:6) wrote about how a jealous Lucifer was not content to cover Gods throne, but he coveted Gods throne. He was a cherub full of wisdom and perfect in beauty (EZ 28:12,14,15) At one point, he was the highest being created by God, and certainly far more intelligent than people imagine. Before we talk about what that intelligence has been able to do, lets hear from the other side of things. One of our Vol 2 readers wrote Fritz the complaint, “You give much much good

Page 474 …

information, but one wishes you would keep your religious beliefs out of it.” Since Fritz did not push any denomination or organized religious group, one must assume that the chapters that quoted scriptures and spoke about demons bothered this reader. For the sake of discussion, lets assume that demons, ghosts, aliens, and angels do not exist. Lets assume for the sake of discussion that all the thousands of documented encounters with such beings did not exist. And finally, You are a therapist, and you sincerely want to help your client who has DID mind-control programming, but you dont want to deal with such things as demonology. Have you ever wondered what the deeper alters think? The deeper cult parts are not going to talk with you, because they know that they will not be listened to. It is extremely doubtful that you will ever meet the deeper hierarchy parts. We have seen therapists scare hierarchy alters away from therapy in just this fashion. The therapist will not even know of their existence, even after years of hard work. As an agnostic or secular therapist, have you always felt antagonistic toward the supernatural? We can appreciate your fear at confronting something strange, new, and unbelievable, this is the same kind of issues that those of us who are DID must confront every day, as we work on the lies that have been programmed into us. Men are sent to the electric chairs on less evidence than has accumulated over the centuries about the existence ghosts, spirits, and demons. But we arent trying to convert anyone to believe they exist. -But think about this, if you, the agnostic therapist, do get a hierarchy part who has been practicing powerful magic for years, learning on the astral plane, observing demons control ones s mind-control slaves who are under your authority, etc. what does the agnostic therapist have to offer the hierarchy alters? The hierarchy alters have power and prestige. They are not the alters that take the punishment and abuse. Why should they give up their spiritual power, for what? The point is, if therapists are not willing to give their hierarchy alters something good to replace their dark powers, and if the therapists dont have a spiritual power and spiritual plan that is stronger and better than the spiritual powers and rewards that control the hierarchy alters, then the therapists are not in a position to offer them freedom. By and large, there are extremely few therapists that publicly let on that they have a clue about spiritual captivity. Typically, they will patronize a victim who mentions a supernatural encounter, and add insult to injury by labeling the experience a hallucination. If the supernatural is only a hallucination, one wonders why the CIA has spent billions investigating the mind-control aspects of voodoo, astral projection, ESP, and other supernatural phenomena. The dark spiritual powers that control the lives of the hierarchy alters are very real to these alters. And you will not succeed in convincing them that demons do not exist, when they have spent a life time working with demons, anymore than you are going to convince a dairyman that cows dont exist because you have never seen a cow. So therapists had better wise up, and get practical. Whether they believe in UFOs, whether they believe in demons, is rather irrelevant, they can still facilitate their client in obtaining help in areas that they do not have expertise. In the last few years, secrets that have been kept for many centuries are being released, but only in such a way that the uninitiated disregard the secrets. While these powerful occult secrets are being revealed, the masses are throwing away the foundations of truth that God has provided them through His Word. The masses see the power of the occult in New Age techniques that use disguised demonic power, but they do not see the dangers. As the world lets their guard down, more and more occult power is being declassified from the hidden mysteries.

Page 475 …

While we were in the Illuminati, we witnessed numerous secret libraries that contained secret books that no one has heard of. Books like the 6th & 7th Book of Moses, The Spiritual Shield, Abdul-Kadirs Book of Power and recently publicly published Necronomicon have spirits attached to them that make them dangerous. To quote from the editor of the english translation of the dangerous Necronornicon, “an inconsistency that is to be found in many grimoires of any period and perhaps reveals a little of the magicians mentality; for there is very little that is evil to the advanced magus, who cares not if he deal with angelic or demonic forces, save that he gets the job done!” (Necronomicon, p. xxxvii) During our years as a programmer, we got the job done! Our programming alters did not get to see the world outside of the Illuminati. But if you the reader want to step into that world to see how the programmers think, you are welcome to come with us on our guided tour. Lets cover some basics. We knew in the Illuminati that the earth was created. There were very specific ideas on how it all happened. Within Illuminati philosophy was the idea of dualism, that there was evil and good, and that you tried to balance your evil deeds with your bad deeds, as you climbed up the ranks of magic (spiritual) power. The Illuminati system is based on rivalry (free-enterprise in its most ruthless form), so there is no room for failure. We ate of the tree of knowledge that Satan promised to Adam that would make Adam into a god. The Illuminati adepts think that they are gods. They are illuminated and believe they are divine. When we worked with Illuminati programmers, we were working with people who believed they were gods and goddesses. They believed that they would be rewarded with the control of the whole universe as well as the means to do it. They also knew where their birthright came from and what their inheritance was. We will explain that shortly. In Exodus 20:5 we read, “…I, the LORD your God, am a jealous God, visiting the iniquity of the fathers on the children to the third and fourth generations of those who hate me…” One of the teachings that has been lost (thanks to the infiltration into Christianity by the mystery religions) has been who God meant by “the third and fourth generations of those who hate me.” This was the third and fourth generation of those who rebelled without repentance against God Almighty. The real foundation for evil are the original generations that rebelled against God and established the foundation of the rebellion. This was Tubal-Cain, Zilah-bore and Jubal. This has been kept a secret from Christians, so they only work against their fathers and grandfathers sins, rather than the real power base, which is Cain, Tubal-cain, and their master/deceiver Satan. Remember how important it was for Christ to atone for what Adam had done. Christ had to go back and repair the damage at the foundation, where the damage to mankind had begun. The foundations of the rebellion against God are the foundations that the programmers go back to. Our inheritance and authority laid with the Powers of Darkness. Just as a Christian would inherit his Fathers kingdom, we were to inherit the Prince of Darknesss kingdom. We served a powerful trinity made up of Lucifer (the authority), Satan (the covering), and the Devil (the evil spirit). This evil trinity of darkness was very well-known to us. The programmers called up the forces of Darkness to give us programming insights. The programming was the heartbeat of Satan and the systems we built into peoples minds were modelled on what the programmers understood hell to be like. Every major programmer was a Grand Master or an Adept who was working his way up the ranks in magic power. Obviously, the lower level programmers could not command and place

Page 476 …

into a victim, demons that they could not magically control. This means that each system is going to reflect the spiritual level of understanding and power that its programmer(s) had. Let us step back and place our discussion of demonology on the shelf temporarily. What builds the ideas of right and wrong, good and bad within the human mind? The answer is certainly a very complex answer. Our self-concepts which govern how our minds make choices are very complex. In fact, the concepts of what is sin, right or wrong, and what and who we are, are simply vastly more complex than a childs mind can comprehend. Even common sense teaches us, that children are born innocent. The childs mind has been given the wonderful ability to focus on one particular role model (usually a parent) to put together a cohesive idea of values. Those values are very much attached to the signals we get as children from the important people we focus upon to learn values. Separating a child from a role model (i.e. isolating it from any parent or parent surrogate) produces disastrous results. The child has no model upon which to learn values. Without a role-model, the mind must revert back to unlearned, built-in instincts. Does the reader begin to see how deep the destruction of the person is, when dissociated pieces must revert back to functioning on such instinctual unlearned values such as survival, because they have had no chance to observe and assimilate values, and if they do by chance assimilate values, they may well be those of the programmers! When the human mind (or a dissociative piece, or alter) functions and makes decisions only on the basis of survival, can the reader see how this opens the person up to control by fears? Deeper parts are prevented from establishing values that would question the control that demonic entities develop based on fear. The growth of mature thinking is the result of a complex chronological series of learning experiences. Even alters who have been hypnotically age-progressed by the programmer to see themselves as adults, have never had the opportunity to acquire mature thinking. Their thinking remain simplistic, because there have not been the complex learning stages that mature a persons thinking. Therapists do not realize that even “adult” non-host alters can have thinking that is very immature and basically survival-based. This doesnt mean that the therapist should initially confront the deeper adult alters by telling them that they are merely programming or immature–that would only damage communication. Given time out in the world on their own, they will begin to realize this on their own. What we are trying to say is that the demonology is attached to a defenseless mind. The structures that would normally develop so that the mind could ignore demon impulses have never developed. The natural development of a child to grow from innocence and purity into a rational moral person has been stopped. If it is difficult enough for a rational mature person to wrestle with demonic impulses, how much more so for a fragment of the mind that operates purely out of the reptilian-brains instinct for survival. During the programming, the Illuminati programmers would call up certain demons to help with the building of this hell in the victims mind. The programmers will also place important demons into the victim that are attached to strategic places and functions. Allow us to expose some of these:

Abbadon–Abbadon is sovereign over the bottomless pit. Depending on what rank the programmer is at, depends on how the programs are put in. If Abbadon is not put in as a protector of the core, something similar will be done that mirrors the abilities of Abbadon. The 18-month old victim has Abbadon placed into them to “SEAL” (guard) their core. Oaths are given, that provide Lucifer the legal right to capture and hide the

Page 477 …

core away at this time. Abbadon will be tied to the programming at the base of the mind. The core lays at the base of the mind in a bottomless pit. This bottomless pit is cone shaped–which is the hidden reason that hour glasses are used. The hour glass is a cone shape that is similar to hells shape. Hell is shaped like a cone. Surrounding the core will be River Lethe. The Lethe River is also known as THE RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS. This river surrounds the core, and protects the core from any alter getting close to the actual core. Depending upon who your programmer is, different imagery will be applied. The programmers always use water as a cleansing element to cause the mind to “clear itself (clear from a deprog. viewpoint), “cleanse itself (so-to-speak from a prog. viewpt.). The programmers will use waterfalls, swimming pools, or other bodies of water as their CLEANSING RIVER. To enter into the CLEANSING RIVER or the RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS means that the alter will not know who they are, what they know, or are seeking. If the core ever got strong enough, the River of Forgetfulness Program would hold her there in the base of the mind. The programmers will never access the core through the RIVER, but will go under the river or over it. The silver cord that is hooked to the core then is ran under the RIVER OF FORGETFULNESS to every alter from the core. In only one particular instance, when a programmer was experimenting, did we ever see the silver cord get placed running over the river. In 99% of the cases, the silver cord will be run under the River of Forgetfulness. This has proven to be the most effective way to prevent any alter from seeing the core. The only connection between the core and the rest of the system is through the silver cords. It is invisible, especially since it is placed under the river, and assigned a spirit of invisibility. To cut that silver cord is to separate the core (and spirit) that gives life to the system. The system will die if the cord is cut. As any alter goes toward the core which is in the 9th realm, the alter will bounce off of the River of Lethe, forget what it went for, lose everything it is, and end up as clean slates in the 8th realm. The story of the Ten Lepers (LK 17:12) who came back clean is the programming story that pertains to this programming. All the alters except the one (the core) will go away as a clean slate, and only the one (the core) will return to its master (in this case not Christ as in the Biblical story, but the Divine Master, who is the programmer.) Should the core ever want to escape it would have to go through the 9 dimensions of Hell to free itself. While the therapists try to get to the core outside-to-inside, the core must go from inside-to-outside. The spirits are laid in from inside to outside, and we will describe the sections of hell, and the rivers from inside-to-outside. But the first barrier after the River is another River called “DARK HOLES” or in our System “TIlE RUBICON”. The name Rubicon is so appropriate, because it is like Caesar when he crossed the rubicon, you do not come back. The name Dark Hole given by some programmers to this zone, is also appropriate, because you are sucked in and do not return. To cross the rubicon is to burn ones bridges to return. This zone is outer space, it is darkness, it is a pool of darkness. An alter personality bounces off of this into a dark holding tank. The rubicon has 10 spheres (or levels) to it, and its shaped like an amphitheater. Another name for this layer is Malebolge. It holds 10 spheres for 10 classes of traitors to the programming. The spirit that hangs over this is Malebrinche with his evil claws.

The dark holes are wells in the 8th realm. The wells are guarded by Titan demons who will prevent the alter from coming out if they are punished by falling into a dark hole (well).

Page 478 …

Within an Illuminati system, you will discover hell. You will discover the rivers of hell which are the Styx, Acheron, Phiegethon, the Cocytus, and Lethe (which was already discussed.) Cocytus encircles the frozen marsh where the monstrous Lucifer is frozen up to his breastplate. Over the years when he tried to free himself, his giant wings produced nothing more than cold winds that froze the ice hard. Deep in an Illuminati system you may find the marsh land where it is cold. Not every programmer has a clear idea of how hell is, so the programming differs, but some type of equivalent of this will be found very deep.

Before providing the names of other demons attached to parts within an Illuminati alter system, allow us to explain how a system is set up from the programmers viewpoint. The programmer sees his inheritance coming from Lucifer. He believes he will reign with Lucifer in hell. Who would want to be a satanist if they did not think that they were going to get advantages from it. Satanists (and Luciferians–actually Illuminati hierarchy members are actually both depending upon the time and circumstances) actually think that they will get eternal rewards for what they are doing. They are very intent on pleasing Satan, and he is a very demanding god. From the programmers viewpoint, he is reproducing Satans kingdom within the victim–he is reproducing hell in the victims mind. The programming is very much intended to be the heartbeat of Satan. The Illuminati at the top understand hell to have 9 realms. Recently a movie was made of the 7 deadly sins, a strange killer decides to kill people to expose to the world the horror of these deadly sins. Each of the deadly sins (pride, avarice, lechery, anger, gluttony, envy, sloth) each are said to have their own realm in hell. This has been a popular view for hundreds of years.

The section grid sheets that list alter grids with codes and the number of sections may not reveal the 9 realms pattern. The pattern is there, but a single realm of hell can be given several sections of alters if the programmer wants to. On the outer rim of the River encircling the 8th realm lie the important castles. There are 7 important Grandefather and Mother of Darkness castles. Some of the castles have gold pillars. There are also 7 important temples, such as the Temple of Moloch, where sacrificed babies are placed internally. The Mothers of Darkness and the Grand Master alters have to be able to enter into these internal castles, because they hold the spiritual demonic strongholds for the system. A front set of castles will be placed in the first realm to sidetrack deliverance ministries. The Mothers of Darkness and Grande Dame alters live in the 7th realm of Hell. The 7th, 8th, and 9th realms are considered lower hell. A ferry boat crosses the river that encircles the 7th realm (and the 8th and 9th). The protection for the hierarchy alters are the Delta alters that both male and female systems have placed in the 6th realm. The Delta alters are deadly. They will kill anyone including themselves! This is known as the sin of wrath. It is known as the realm of gloom. This 6th realm is protected by the river Styx. The 3-4-5 realms are not put to match the traditional schemes of Hell. A central computer section with programming alters and their accompanying entourage of alters that make it all work, in a sense compare with the 4th level of hell where there is great gnashing of teeth. These alters have been extremely dehumanized in this area, and many are totally dissociated from any sense of having a body. Really most of them are beyond the gnashing of teeth stage, to the out-of-body stage of dissociation. The second ring of hell is the realm of lust, where the prostitute alters and strip-tease alters are placed, including male child prostitute alters in male systems. The sixth realm may have the capital city of Dis, where fallen angels are reported to be able to have their R&R. The River Phlegethan is filled with

Page 479 …

boiling blood. It is filled with dead tormented souls. Titan guardian demons guard the wells. The internal world will have dark woods with wild animals lurking about waiting to attack those who would be foolhardy to go through them. Somewhere in the deep reaches of the hell that Satan has built within the mind of the slave, there will likely be the capital city Pandaemonium, which is a palace with many gates and a large meeting hall. In fact, Pandaemonium may be an entire secret world within a mind-control system. The first realm of hell is the Limbo state, where non-satanic gatekeepers (who are pagan in outlook) float around in mental limbo. The programmers build streams and meadows and other things into this area. There are front castles built into this quadrant. It is separated from the front by the River Archeron. However, it is unlikely that any of the front alters and gatekeepers know the name of this internal river, because it is invisible and they are not told its name. They may feel its effects though. Behind the River Acheron will be kitten alters that have never lived outside of programming. And setting on top of hell on the surface is the front section. The front system in a typical Illuminati system will be a reflection of the world at large as it known. The front system will have anarchy-coven level witchcraft alters, Christian alters, smart alters, stupid alters, child alters, possibly a token opposite sex alter, and perhaps even a few animal alters. In a sense the top is the widest part of the cone, that retreats into deeper darker levels of the mind (and hell that the programmer has created.) The front system will give the therapist plenty to work with. The front system will look like a chaotic but complete system. There will be a few witchcraft alters that will surface to explain the SRA. There will be a few abused alters who will surface to explain the abuse. All of this will help deflect from the real truth and the real secrets. There will be dozens of child alters to work with. The front system will be designed to hide the design of the entire system. If a therapist wanted to, they could easily spend the rest of their life working on issues of the front system. Some therapists have spent a decade on the front alone. The Illuminati generally appreciates having the front alters stabilized so that they can continue the horrendous abuse of the victim, without the system self-destructing. Skilled therapists know how to work vertically down into a system. There are methods, and we will not expose trade secrets, on how to descend into a system to get a particular alter. The reader can think to himself or herself, how do you pull up an alter, and how to you get one to leave. For instance, a non-sexual alter will dissociate and leave if you speak about sex. Think about things for a while, and perhaps you will realize how to get the deeper alters you want to work with. Be prepared to get demonic constructs that pretend to be alters, to shell alters, to get mirror images, as well as what you really want. After developing some skill you may even be able to begin to separate the demonic, shell alters and mirror images from the real thing. The skilled deprogrammers know who they need deep in the systems, they go for these alters, and then work with them. But it greatly helps if the front system has done stabilizing work, that has prepared them spiritually and psychologically so that they can handle some “rocking of the boat”, if the therapist digs deep. There are certain alters that can assist more than others in dismantling some of the programs. There are two protector alters who are assigned to protect the deeper parts of the system. They are Lucifer and Dameon. Both of these protector alters (Lucifer, and the protector alter Dameon) will know part of the system. But bear in mind their assignment is to keep therapists away from the even deeper

Page 480 …

parts. So if they do cooperate with a therapist, their cooperation may be to sidetrack the therapist from the deeper parts, and they do not know the entire system. Every Illuminati alter system (100% of the systems while we were in) were constructed with a Dameon alter, which identified with and thought it was Satan/Lucifer. All male and female systems all a Dameon alter. (We suppose now that weve revealed this secret, they may change things, but for anyone programmed before this book came out, their system will have a Dameon alter.) The Dameon alter has three different names. In Fritzs section he mentioned Data Entry Points of a system. This is an alter that can be used for quick access. During the child victims early years, the Illuminati programmers will take one of the first Gatekeepers, such as Gatekeeper 3 or 4, and will hypnotically show them the entire system. This is so they have quick access to the entire system. This is entirely done via hypnosis (and hypnotic drugs), so that the Gatekeeper no. 3 does not remember that it knows the entire system. Only via hypnosis can the programmer use this Gatekeeper to get to the entire system. After the Gatekeeper does its job, it is hypnotically told to forget.

What kind of thing might the gatekeeper know? The deeper parts of a system would be the All-Seeing Eye of the pyramid. The pyramid may rotate, and its rotation is controlled by a computer. By rotating, secret passageways are aligned. These pyramids contain “dead” alters (who think they are spirits) and protectors such as egyptian soldiers. The Eye itself is a secret passageway. Sometimes a 1-2-3 tap done 3 times opens the passage. If there is a purgatory in the system, as one approaches it there may be a silver veil wall, behind which may be hell in a system. The high capital of Satan in a system is often Pandaemonium. The palace has many gates and porches. The demons assemble in the palace for councils. Every alter has demons assigned and attached to it. Here are the names of common ones in an alter system. These are really family names, just like there will be a Susy 1, a Susy 2, a Susy 3, etc. Sometimes satanic programmers put their own twists on the way they pronounce names, these “play on words” help protect the programming. The VoL 2 book provides information on other important demons involved with the mind-control on pp 299-302.

Abduscius–This demon was involved with the tree programs, the roots of all the trees, such as the willow, oak, ash, yggdrassil, etc. The demon would be joined with the internal Singing Forest of a system. One can look for a familiar spirit connected to all this.

Abigor–This demon was involved with working with fragment parts that make war upon the system of alters. The child armies that protect the programming had this demon attached to them.

Abyss–This is a popular demon with Crowley devotees, and it also goes by the names of Absu, Nar Mattaru, Cutha, Kutu. This may be the internal underworld ocean. A system will have a deep ocean where things are hid.

Archeron–This is a demon who looks like a monster with flaming eyes. This demon was attached to the “eye in the sky”. A mirror image of this demon could be used to impart a mirror image to a part.

Adramalech–This grand chancellor demon is the supervisor of Satans wardrobe and provides a likeness of the himself to the programmer. Adramalech is in charge of all the various costumes and outfits that the occult world use, such as your masonic ritual garments. Because there is one spirit over all this, the various costumes all work together for

Page 481 …

Agaliarept –this demon is very important in the structuring, for this demon is used to call up the internal self-helper of the victim. This demon works with the ISH and the system to know what is going on in the internal worlds of the victim. The persons guardian angel (spirit) has been locked away to prevent interference to demons like Agaliarept. The programmers are very familiar with this demon. Another demon that works with the cults ISH is Botis.

Aguares–These grand dukes of Hell are associated with dance, and have familiar family demons with Aguares that help the victim assume sexual gestures, special ceremonial dances that have to be done perfectly, and other certain steps.

Aim–This demon may be attached to the alters who are associated with fire, like Bonfire Child alters, Firechild, etc. He is a fire demon.

Alastor–The demonic executor of court decrees in hell is a guardian. When the system betrays the programming, he will declare the judgements on the system.

Amduscias–This demon of disturbing music continually plays the internal rhymes and riddles internally to reinstate the programming if it is ever touched. This demon then is responsible for the programs to continue running. This demon is a unicorn whose internal music is in an alter system.

Amon–This demonic marquis family shows their faces to scare alters. It may appear like a man with dogs teeth and a head like a raven.

Andrealphus–If a victim has a peacock demon it may be Andrealphus.

Asmodeus–This demon is attached to create lust in the system, and marital discord.

Baal–This demon can make internal things go invisible. He can look like a cheshire-cat. He matches how things disappear in the Alice of Wonderland story, where only gold objects stay. He speaks hoarsely, and can appear as a toad, a cat, a man or all 4 at once. He rules over 66 legion of demons. He is a king demon ruling in the east, and important to Freemasons.

Baalberith–The is the chief secretary of hell who is attached to the internal library of an alter system. He will keep the records of the genealogy of the victims Illuminati bloodline.

Barbatos–When a mind-control victim says, “I talk to my animals and they talk to me”, this is the demon that carries out the voice of other animals.

Beelzebub–(See the article on the spirit Hydra below.) According to Illuminati beliefs, they must serve Beelzebub, and he in turn will reward them with financial wealth so that they can control and destroy the nations. They believe that Beelzebub only wants to be addressed in Yiddish or Hebrew. Beelzebub demands souls in payment for his favors. It is not known, technically speaking, which manifestation of the false trinity will be the beast who will be worshipped by taking “the Mark of the Beast”, but it may be Beelzebub who has demanded worship since antiquity. The Illuminati Sisters of Light are married in ritual to Beelzebub, while the Mothers of Darkness are married to Lucifer. Beelzebub is important to the upper levels of Freemasonry which do secret Luciferian rituals. There are a number of secret manuscripts of the Holy Book of Beelzebub located at important Masonic centers. The book is large, written in blood on

Page 482 …

Behemoth–This hugh demon who presides over feasting in hell is attached to cannibalistic alters who must perform cannibalism in rituals.

Beiphegor–This demon seduces men with wealth. He will be attached when the programmers use blackmail and bribery to insure that the victim goes the direction they want the victim to go. In a sense, he is part of the carrot (in the carrot & the stick tactics of the programmers.)

Blackwell–This demon is important for the mind-control, associated with dissociation

Botis–This viper demon is attached to the cults ISH in the internal system. He knows the past and present things within a system.

Captaintto–A spirit involved with astral projection.

Changeling–This fairy demon is attached to child alters. The actual mechanics are that the child alter presents itself as a mirror of the child, and the child alter assumes that it is the this fairy demon itself. The child alter takes on the fairy demons identity, and then the fairy demon attaches itself. The end result is that the child alter doesnt know what it is, or where it begins and the fairy begins. This creates an alter/demon construct, of which there are many within a normal Illuminati system.

Crocell–This demon makes the noise like rushing water that alters talk about hearing in their internal worlds.

Dantalion–A demonic duke who has many countenances. He is a joker within the system.

Decarabia-Appears as a star, and Pentacles is also a star appearing demon.

Flauras–This demon along with the demon Andras are attached to alters who must commit ritual murders.

Foras–This demon is knowledgeable. It can teach logic, the virtues of herbs, how to live long and supposedly how to become invisible. It can appear as a strong man in human form.

Forneus–This demon gives men the ability to have speaking in tongues and the ability to have gifted speaking abilities. He works with Renove, who is a demon who assists with demonic speaking in tongues and rhetoric.

Furcas–This demon teaches philosophy.

Furfur–This demon controls lightening, thunder and strong winds. He is attached to internal programs that are connected to internal weather phenomena. For instance, if a victim is having internal earthquakes, if the support person knows how to call up and command Furfur he can cast Furfur out, and stop the internal earthquakes immediately.

Guardians–Enforcer demons are put in place to protect the system.

Goblins–These are mischievous and ugly fairies that are placed internally to protect the rivers and secret places in the internal worlds.

Haborym–This is a demon of fire who is placed in control of the fire around the internal hell pit.

Haures–This demon hold the history of the fall of creation within the internal library.

Hydra– In the Illuminati, a member takes oaths to three demonic entities, Lucifer, Beelzebub, and Hydra. Who is Hydra? In the Christian New Testament, Hydra is described in the last book, Revelation 17:7-9. It is a beast with 7 heads. The Illuminati do ritual worship where they do special chants, and

Page 483 …

blood sacrifices, and bow seven times to obtain Hydras presence. During rituals, when Hydra appears within the room, one of the ways Hydra communicates is by taps. When it taps 3 times, this means the third letter C, which also can mean “see”. Later, after the child victim of mind-control has experienced the horrifying ritual of seeing Hydra appear and tap out its messages, the child victim can be taken in and programmed to special codes that are portrayed as knocks (taps). The ritual trauma memory is pulled up and used for a base for the programming. This is how the traditional 3 tap signal came to be. It is secretly based upon demonic communication. You will often encounter mind-control victims who are programmed to what they describe as morse code. The foundation for all this morse code programming was communication with the god/demon Hydra. Hydra by the way is also the god of Freemasonry, because Luciferians control Freemasonry. Hydra hisses like a snake. A partial quote from an oath to Hydra would include, “…lead my arm, you have the supremacy of the universe, because you move it, all is your creation. Heaven and earth belong to you, which is fulfilled in your glory, which are images of your greatness and superiority. You are helpful protector of each of yours, you Enemy- of-the-crucified. In your name I curse God, the Trinity, Christ…ln trust of your revelations, in the faith of your might above all Creation; visible and invisible things. I have the right to request and receive from you what you know.” Hydra is acknowledged as the supreme master by a blood oath. You must sell yourself to Hydra totally, even to the point of suicide. In return you are promised honor, power, and wealth. The dragon also promises to give confidence to the pact-maker. As the Illuminati understand it, demons are only interested in soul-pacts or sutleges (pacts written in blood on paper that are swallowed).

Klotilde–This spirit demands that the slave never get involved in human love. To love with human love would be to suffer.

Knochers–These are tiny spirits who work in the internal gold mines. They are the Keepers of the Jewels. What are the jewels? The jewels are those parts created by master programmers such as Dr. Mengele, which are left as clean slates from which the programmers can build from later.

Leraje (Leraikka)–This demon is used for ritual battles.

Lucifer/Satan/Devil–This triad has Black/Red/Gold as their colors.

Malebranche–This is the demon with the evil claws that is a tormentor in the 8th realm. Readers will remember seeing his presence in this authors collages in the Illustrated Guidebook to Monarch Mind- Control Programming.

Maleficia–This demon is not used internally, but is used when casting spells to hurt others. This demon is also employed to punish disobedient slaves.

Malphas–A builder of high towers. He may also get involved with the hypnosis.

Mammon–His family of demons creates the internal worlds, especially the palaces and towers.

Marax–This demon helps the Mothers-of-Darkness understand astrology. A Mother will loose her powers if he is removed.

Marbas–Demon attached to help the system heal, or get diseased.

Marchosias–This is a family of fighting demons. They work well with fighting alters.

Page 484 …

Melchom–This demon is placed internally to oversee the internal treasures of a system. This demon is very secret and understands the Grand Druid Council.

Mulciber–This is one of the builder demons who helps construct the internal worlds. The programming scripture that applies is “Unless the Lord builds the house, they labor in vain.” This scripture is misused to teach alters, that unless this lord (demon) is involved in the construction of something internal, the alters labor in vain, because it will only be a superficial temporary structure. To insure that all structures put in by a therapist are temporary, all kinds of alters and demons will scurry about in a frenzy to figure out how to destroy any internal structure that the therapist & victims alters try to build to oppose the programmers control.

Murmur–This demon is in charge of the soul. He is connected to core issues. (See the article on the core to understand the cores issues.)

Navky–This is a Spirit of Murder that is tied to the sacrifice of unbaptized children.

Nebiros–This is a field marshall who is given command of the little robots alters and fragment purpose armies.

Nysrock–This is a demon chief in hell within a system.

Osculum infame–This refers to the Sabbat ritual that Mothers of Darkness perform where they “kiss the ass” of Satan, also known as the “Kiss of Shame”.

Paimon–This knight spirit is very obedient to Lucifer and is used as an enforcer in an internal system. He continues to report back as to whether the internal worlds are intact or not.

Paymon–This demon is placed into alter systems of politician to give them the ability to speak in public.

Phenex–This demon is a poet who speaks to exorcists but supposedly does not need to obey exorcists.

Philatanus–This is a Spirit of Sodomy and Pederasty

Procel–This demon can make internal water freeze or boil.

Purson–This demon blows internal trumpets, and is believed connected to the revelator to the AntiChrist. He also knows the system.

Put Satanachia–Commander-in-chief of the call back armys in a system especially the armys that ride on armageddon horses. He will play an important role in the end times.

Raum– He destroys internal parts or internal cities.

Sabnack–This demon is attached to death programming. If a slave does the “unpardonable sin against Lucifer and his programming then Sabnack helps insure that the heart of the victim will stop.

Seera–This demon is in charge of internal perceptions of time. He can make time fly at whirlwind speed or to slow down.

Seraphim– The highest order of the Heavenly host. Illuminati systems will have seraphim placed into them.

Shaba lidoma–This demon bring depression

Shax–This alter works with deaf and dumb alters.

Sitri–This spirit is used in the covens for sexual enchantment and nudity.

Page 485 …

Speculum–This spirit is an internal crystal ball reader. He may also use mirrors.

Succubus–A female demon who preys on men sexually. This demon will be active during rituals.

Sytry–This demon is attached to stripper alters. It encourages women to show themselves naked.

Uphir–This demon heals in the name of Satan. He is placed into a system to help it heal quickly.

Volarire–A gatekeeper to a world or city, will play games to protect that part of system

Watchers–Demons attached to flying monkey alters who are used for observation in a system.

Zepar–This demon drives women insane. It is attached to insane programming.

Its really hard to describe spiritual things to those who havent experienced similar spiritual things. We want to help people begin to get a feel for what works and what doesnt work. The following is a few minutes of a transcript of a deliverance. The deliverance minister has never been told anything about this persons alter system, but the Holy Spirit reveals that the system is 13x 13. The deliverance minister speaks about grace and love. He also does something very important: he teaches the alters how to put a spiritual canopy of protection around them so that they can sleep without spiritual attacks at night. The spiritual canopy that is built by this alter system ends up being helpful. Here is only a tiny portion of this deliverance session.

Alter: You cant love what isnt.

Support Person: Theyve had their hearts and souls taken away. Many of the things they need to be able to have a relationship with Christ have been stolen from them.

Alter: How did I get this two-headed beast?

Deliverance minister: You got it from the time of conception given to you by Dad. It is a two-headed demon. One of the heads goes back 18 generations, that would be about 400 years. The other head dates back 22 generations. Allow me to explain, there are 365 levels of demons…. We need to walk in one accord. I realize your system has many of you who dont know how to, and also that there are many who dont want to.

Alter: God cant love us.

Deliverance minister: God will remove all the curses, all the spells, the garbage, the chains, the tar, the slime, the pain, the bondage.. .All these things which carry bad feelings, pain and unbelief will be taken care of. Each curse carries memories….

Alter: How did our light side even know Christ with those demons?

Deliverance minister: Its because of Grace, amazing grace. [Then the deliverance minister explains how demons imitate alters and play roles within an alter system.] Father we come before your throne, strengthen the canopy about this house, and purify it with your holy fire. We ask that you seal and cleanse this room with your holy blood, and every object about us, and each one of us. Seal and cleanse us with your blood. Purify us with your fire. I acknowledge the diamond shaped head that encapsulizes her head and is filled with your essence. Will you fill that diamond head with the blood of Jesus Christ. I recognize that this represents your eternal ownership of this body. Father, we acknowledge that you love them no matter what. Father, Im glad you love them, even the alters who dont know that you love them. Remove any demonic shields from these alters and send them to the abyss. Father, bind Lucifer from interfering. Set some warring angels about us to help. Thank you. Father, I ask for every

Page 486 …

anointing that we need for this work. I ask you to acknowledge all three of your servants. Order our thoughts. Keep this floating diamond over her Lord. Now fill up her Systems 13 by 13 by 13 grid right now with your blood. [End of quoted material.]

We have watched deliverance ministries in action, we have visited and heard other deliverance ministries give reports on what they have done, and we have seen what works for us. What we have seen is that some of the better ministries are on the basic right track and are able to help in some important areas, but by and large there is little depth to what most Christians are doing, and some blindsides. We can also add some of our own first hand observations. Our own master was far more concerned about deliverances being done to our system, than he was for a psychiatrist to work with us. But we also have a view of things from having been on the other side, that is from the programmers viewpoint, and we can honestly say, that the programming is so far reaching, that the mind-control victim could use a chiropractor, a medical doctor, a psychologist, a guard, a prayer partner, a friend, and a deliverance minister. This is why we applaud the few groups that have established safe-houses and teams of people to assist mind-control victims. The type of issues we write about in articles like this are enough to challenge support teams who are working with well stabilized programmed DIDs who have worked on issues for a while.

The removal of foundational programming can take several different avenues, but there are several constants in how to fight the programming. The stronger a persons alters are spiritually, the better they will do. The healthier a victim is, the more chance they have to survive the debilitating effects of the programming. The more humor, rest, and internal peace the recovering victim has, the better they will do. Morale is important. The morale of the support team is essential. The therapist has to have a strong conviction that hope exists for the victim, and the victim needs to have this hope conveyed to them. The will to resist needs to be fed. We know that this is nothing new, but it is so important that we dont want to neglect emphasizing it. The reader will find many suggestions and hints within this book on routes to take to dismantle the programming. Where there is a will, there is a way. Sometimes the victim will loose the willpower, and that is where the support team must pick them up. Lets not kill our wounded, instead lets dig into ourselves to find the resources to minister to them even more. We know of some ministers who have justified dumping programmed-multiples because at some point they didnt met the ministers criteria of wanting to work on issues. There were times when our system didnt want to work on issues, but were glad Fritz didnt give up on us. On the flip side, we also believe that support teams and therapists need to take a serious look at who they decide to invest time helping. The unfortunate truth is that our time and energy is limited and we should choose sincere candidates who are capable of success.

Page 487 …

RATIONALES, of the abusers

Persons, who are just getting into the subject of Illuminati mind-control, naturally ask “Why do the abusers do what they do?” and “How can the abusers mentally justify doing what they do?” We will not attempt to give a comprehensive answer to this question, which would take a book, but will try to give a condensed version of why it happens, and how it is justified in the abusers minds. First, well look at what psychologists are saying, & then we will build upon that to give a more accurate sketch of why the abuse happens. Psychologists who have studied parents who sexually abuse their children have concluded that such parents are extremely narcissistic. Narcissism means self-love. They go on to say that essentially everyone is narcissistic, but the abusers are extremely so. The psychologists are on the right track, but not quite there. (Hold this thought for a moment.) The psychologists also think that the sexual abuse is done to gratify the abusers need for a reward, in the same vane that some are also alcoholics. The mind-control abuser needs to be worshipped, which will gratify the need to be desirable & important. Because children idolize adults, and since children are innocent & powerless, the abuser enjoys dominating the child sexually, mentally, & spiritually. Because knowledge of the 7 brains has been kept away from the publics general awareness, the public and psychologists dont think in these terms. Knowledge of the 7 separate brains that make up the human mind are how the Illuminati successfully carry out mind-control. Psychologists carrying out research have reported between 40 to 80 % of the abusers were abused themselves as children. When it pertains to trauma-based mind-control, we can assure the reader that 99.999% of the abusers have been abused themselves as children. That abuse has locked the abuser into making the reptilian brain their principle brain. The reptilian mind thinks only in terms of survival. It thinks in terms of its own needs. What the psychologists call narcissism is simply the survival-type thinking (the self-love so to speak) of the reptilian brain which we all have. The only difference is that some non-multiples are able to develop their higher brains so that they can develop their conscience and true spiritually enlightened thinking as the guiding source of their actions. Everyone has a reptilian first brain. Almost any male can be made to tap into that survival instincts and can be made to be sadistic. The programmers create clean slate alters which are created in the crucible of survival. When a person fears for his life, the higher brains are shut down. These alters are simply working from the reptilian brain. They are power-based, greed-based, survival-instinct-based alters. These alters are then given scripts that morally justify this thinking, so that the reptilian brain can block any future second thoughts from the two highest brains. This is where Illuminati Luciferian doctrine is important. The Illuminati teach their Grand Masters that they are the elite of the world, that their rulership is their birthright, and that Lucifer has taught them programming so that they can be a god, and follow after Lucifers own heartbeat. They believe that they are pleasing Lucifer by carrying out mind-control on children and then presenting these “little treasures” to Lucifer. These Illuminati programmers are not going to say, “I doing this because Im a sinner [which is a higher brain concept]”, but they are going to say, “Im doing this because Im a god.” Power is a need that stems from the reptilian brain. Power can be directed into proper channels by our higher brains, but due to the mind-control that the Illuminati programmers themselves have received there is nothing structured in the mind to veto this power-hungry thinking. Also Satanic doctrines, like LaVeys and Crowleys “Do what thou wilt”, give the mind a blocker to prevent the higher brains from

Page 488 …

overriding the actions based on the reptilian brains selfish survival based thinking. There are many other rationalizations, for instance, “this is the way our fathers and forefathers have traditionally done things”, “no pain no gain”, and “this child (such as Marilyn Monroe) would have been a nothing, but by carrying out the programming we are building the person into something”. The World System has set up dialectics such as the Cold War, which gave lower echelon abusers the survival-based justifications that mind-controlled slaves were needed if their side were to win the Cold War, and protect their nation.

They justify their criminal behavior by saying that most people want leaders, and they are merely providing that leadership. Most people have been conned into accepting the leadership of others. Most people go through a stage in life like the hippies, where they want to think for themselves, but just like the hippy movement they end up taking the attitude if you cant beat them join them. But even the most average of persons has an incredible computer between the ears, and are far more capable than they are given credit for. At least the potential is there, if it werent stolen by an education system that dumbs students down, and the other hassles in life that steal so much potential from people. Because the abusers have seared their consciences, they often look at the abuse as a game (albeit a sadistic one). At that point, several of them may try to outdo each other and the abuse becomes an ongoing contest to see who can outdo each other. In some cases, not only do the hidden Luciferian doctrines support the abuse (such as reincarnation), but the front alters religious views may also support the abuse. Numerous passages in the Talmud, give legal religious sanction for pedophilia, torture and other crimes. Because this fact has been covered up, it would be appropriate to quote some of the fuller Talmudic translations (because some of the translations into english leave out passages that are in the original Hebrew which promote such things as pediophilia and sodomy. The book of Yebamoth of the Talmud, 2 Vols., London, The Soncino Press, 1936, page 397 states, “Harlotry is not applicable to bestial intercourse.” In other words, intercourse with a beast is not regarded as a sin of intercourse. Page 402 (as well as 403) of the same Talmudic book states, that it is O.K. for a priest to have “co-habitation” with a girl proselyte under three. It states, “A proselyte who is under the age of three years and one day is permitted to marry a priest” or the daughter of a proselyte is “eligible to live with a priest” and have intercourse. In Kethuboth (another book of the Talmud) pp. 54, 57, 58, 59 provide more examples of legal religious justification of adults having sex with children. For instance, on pg. 58 it states, “When a grown-up man has intercourse with a little girl it is nothing.,, “Although the intercourse of a small boy is not regarded as a sexual act, nevertheless the woman is injured by it as by a piece of wood.” This does not mean that all readers of the Talmud practice such things, but its one example of many of how religious beliefs & cultural beliefs give sanction to abuse. Some deranged criminals are hiding behind their religious covers, & these religious covers are across the board. Some small size cults teach that free sex” between all persons is “liberation” and “love”. In such cases, one has a layering of rationalizations, from the front clear down to the deeper levels. And as for the abuse, many of the handlers think that it is O.K. because they have the ability to erase any memory of the abuse from the slaves mind, and make it “O.K.” They also rationalize that they are expanding the mind of their slaves. Youve all heard the New Age clap trap that man is on the edge of a new evolutionary leap forward, and they talk themselves into believing they are part of that great leap forward. Some of the leading mind researchers, who help program seem to honestly believe this. As rediculous as this may sound, people will believe rediculous things if it will justify to their own minds, the cruelty they perpetuate on innocent people. At the heart of all the mind-control, you will find the heartbeat of Lucifer and the willingness of his followers to do what they believe he wants.

Page 489 …

REALITY VS PERCEPTION

This article will discuss the ins & outs of an alters perception of things, and the external world. In many ways, it might be helpful for the client and the therapist to view each other as two beings from separate worlds who need to learn some common means to communicate. Stephen Toulmin said, “All knowledge bears the imprint of the minds own structure.” There is some truth that our minds help us organize our perceptions. A newborn baby will turn its head toward a sound, even though it has not had any experience in the world that would teach it that anything important is in the direction of the sound. It knows to do this because it is born with this ability. As the magician uses a slight of hand, the programmer uses a slight of “the minds abilities to learn”. As we live in the real world, we grow up & learn meanings to words. Our ideas are representations of what exists in the world. The problem between the programmed multiple and the common person in the street who is not programmed, is that the programmed multiples experiences indeed make his or her ideas representations that exist in the reality that the programmers created for the various alters. One might say that many of these objects in an internal world are objects of a multiples imagination. This may be ultimately true, but the programming has a reality of its own and may be the best reality that the alter has had a chance to apprehend. For instance, at one point Fritz hooked up a heart/pulse monitor to prove to an alter that she had a heart. However, this alter was programmed to trance out if hooked up to such a device. The device read “no pulse”, and the alter said “See I told you I had no heart”. Fritz was chagrined, but he didnt give up. He explained that the programming was causing this alter to trance, so the alter tried hard not to trance and the next time, there was a weak reading. The third time, there was even a better reading, as the alter mastered the ability to stay grounded. When people remember something or imagine something, one can not be sure if these ideas relate to something that really existed. Generally, when a person perceives something, unless he is drunk, his perception is going to conform to reality. However, the programmers mess with the mind of victims so much, that the deeper alters only live in a deep hypnotic trance. They only perceive as they have been programmed to perceive. This really is a tribute to how incredible the human mind is. The human mind can creatively design all kinds of concepts and can function in an imaginary world if that is what it takes to survive. One of the things that most of the alters need to develop is a sense of external reality. This means that they need to spend time holding the body and experiences life outside of their external world which they live in. They will also need to learn that truth is not whatever you make it. Of course, the victim of mind-control already has many doubts and to realize that they cant trust their own judgement is difficult to accept. Some of the alters will be left-brain and some will be right-brain alters. The therapist will experience various quasi-psychotic” symptoms, but there is no reason to be alarmed by it. It simply comes with the territory. Because the alters systems are complex, and may be subjected to programming at a particular time, alters may not present a consistent picture. The therapist may begin to wonder if the entire thing is a very complex game for the clients alters. Over time the therapist will begin to sort things out. If the client does not have the ability to communicate, there may develop many incidents that are difficult to understand. Again, the therapist needs to remind her or his self that there is probably a good reason WHY the alters are acting the way they are acting. As this book has repeatedly brought out, the phenomena of programmed multiplicity has been very poorly understood by therapists.

Page 490 …

RESPONSIBILITIES, tips to face new ones

The programmers succeed in what they do, because they know how the mind works, and they work with the victims mind. The support team must do the same. The programmers know how the mind needs the stage set for it to learn new things, and they will take the time and effort to lay the groundwork, the foundation. Likewise, when the deeper alters begin experiencing the real external life, they need to have the groundwork, the stage set for them to learn new things. The deeper alters can be encouraged to put their survival skills to work. The deeper alters need to forget the “I cant”s and recognize that they have powerful survival skills that can be redirected to make them successful in the external world. When deeper alters who are learning about the outside world see a need, they need to tackle that need. If one sees dirty dishes, then wash them. If one sees a barren front yard, plant some flowers. If one sees a hurting person, give solace. By using their powers of observation the deeper alters can see needs and address those needs around them. This will give them a sense of accomplishment and power. They will then begin to recognize their worth and their potential. After one looks around for needs to address, the next step is to ask yourself what youd like to try doing. If you think youd like to do something, then try it. Go to a hobby shop, or to the library and get some ideas on what new activity you can do. You will be surprised at what you will be able to accomplish. Alter can help alters, and can work together as teams on new projects. Deeper alters need to have the goal of having a full range of emotions. Emotions will help them achieve maturity. Anyway, who gave the right to the programmers to say you cant step outside of programming?

SALVATION, obtaining it, issues for multiples

An infant will enjoy playing with a box, and later as a child will enjoy trees. When the child gains an intellectual understanding of boxes and trees as an adult, the simple fun of being with these things is lost. Sometimes people would enjoy God more if they didnt become so intellectual about Him, and just played with Him as a child. There are a number of people who insist on quarreling about what has already passed. How could God have done this? Why is God so cruel? Why is God so merciful? Why does God love me a sinner? Why does God hate me a sinner? With something so vast and big like God, He often gets the same treatment accorded the weather, in that everyone has their own opinion of how the weather should be. If we couldnt understand adults as children, why do we think we can understand God? Wouldnt it be more fun if we could crawl up in His spiritual arms and experience His concern and kindness, rather than trying to dissect His actions with intellectual theories. But one thing Gods Word makes clear, our happiness is not His goal for us in life, His goal is that we would be conformed to the image of Christ. When we see our problems in that light, we see that our problems are actually just what we needed to develop the Christ-like ministry God wants for us. Did you ever wonder why your parents wanted you to have good habits?–you wanted to play, and they wanted you to have good habits. They werent interested in your idea of happiness, they were trying to develop character. But rather than fight with God, why dont we try to have some child-like wonder, isnt it amazing how beautiful life is? Watch a spider spin a web. Watch the sunset. Watch a mother cat and her kittens. We sometimes think that our own problems are unique. We like to think that our modern world has its own unique problems. Western civilization has been built upon the

Page 491 …

ancient wisdom of the Word of God. The Bible records that in ancient times there were: child sacrifices (for example see 2 KGS 17:17), satanic rituals where they did self-inflicted cuts (for example I KGS 18:26-28), witches who used magic paraphernalia like rings (EZE 13: 17-21), secret magic books (ACTS 19:17-19), child prostitution (for example I KGS 14:24, & JOB 36:14), and political leaders who were into satanic witchcraft (2 KGS 21:1-16), and much more. On and on we could go describing many of the same problems that people face today–including mind-control. This does not mean everything was exactly the same. The Roman toilets and swimming pools looked similar to ours, but their elite had only 4 wheeled carts rather than cars. Obviously, a Roman senator didnt have to worry about a flat tire. But when it comes to matters about the human soul, the human spirit, eternal salvation, guilt, shame, greed and hate, and tax collectors the issues are exactly the very same issues as they were thousands of years ago. The ancient wisdom of the ancients which is embodied in the Holy Bible is still as rich and powerful for us today as it was in ancient times. That ancient wisdom said, “Open your mouth for the speechless…and plead the cause of the poor and needy” PROV 3 1:8. I wish we could find a few Christians who would stand with us to open their mouths for all the alter personalities of the 2 million mind-controlled slaves in this country who do not have a voice, and that we could plead the cause of these needy mind-controlled victims throughout this land. What you sow, you reap. In street parlance this translates “what goes around, comes around.” If we want to reap some salvation for ourselves, we had better sow some salvation. What have you been planting? One of the most difficult topics for programmed multiples and for those who work with them IS THE QUESTION: HOW do PROGRAMMED MULTIPLES GET SALVATION? We have been saved, we are being saved, and we will be saved. Salvation comes in many tenses. If one alter gives his life to Christ, does that save an entire system? Can a system of alters lose their salvation if the front is Christian and the deeper parts are active in rituals where humans are sacrificed? How can a person be two things at once? Does each alter need a separate baptism? Is it wrong to baptize different alters of one system? These are a few of the questions that have plagued multiples. God is not a respecter of persons. Everyone will be treated equally and equitably by God. There is not one standard for multiples and another for non-multiples. The question is

JUST WHAT ARE GODs STANDARDS? It may surprise the reader to be told that in spite of all the preaching that is going on today–many of the teachings of Christ and the teachings of the Bible have been lost, including many that concern salvation. Christ said it was foolish to gain the whole world, but to lose ones own soul. By extension it would be foolish to gain power over all the internal worlds of oneself or of another person, and to lose ones own soul. Dont be foolish, dont lose your soul. Can you imagine a company building an exclusive ship like the Queen Mary, installing many beautiful things, the latest communication equipment, the best safety equipment and then when it is completed, set the ship adrift without a crew to float aimlessly around and to be tossed by each storm and to sink without any purpose. The human is far more wonderfully made than any ship. Our brains are still far superior in many ways to the best computers. Do you think that God created mankind (and crowned him with “glory & honor” according to His Word in PS 8:5) just to cast mankind adrift? Some men have decided that man is adrift. That man must chart his own course–somewhat like the ship deciding to sail itself. Adam Smith, a scottish intellectual of the 18th

Page 492 …

century was convinced that science would save mankind from war and superstition (which is how he viewed Christianity). Science did not save us from war, nor have the teachings of Christ lost meaning as some superstitious gobblygook, but the Words of Christ are just as powerful today as they were 2,000 years ago. Christ said that the truth shall set men free, and those words are no less true today than they were in his day. There are plenty of philosophies that will convince you that you were designed by God merely to be abandoned, that there is no purpose to life. But why did the prodigal son feel miserable eating with the pigs? Because he was a man and he knew that he was meant to have a better life. People know that they are called to something better. They are often not content to think that their life is meaningless, because they know better. In the sight of God the creator there are no common people, only special important people that He ordained. Almighty God loves us better than we love ourselves. Not Sally over here because she goes to church several times a week, nor Sue over here because she has the Bible memorized better than anyone else. He loves us, all of us, good and bad, because He created us and as our Creator He loves what He created in His own image. Christ asked people to get to know him. He didnt ask his disciples to go to church on sunday. He didnt give them a Bible and command them to follow the Bible, he asked them to learn from him and to follow him and to get to know Him. God allowed a persecution to come upon the early Christians so they would quit going to church and would go to the world and tell them the good news that their Creator loved them and had a plan for their lives. “That day a great persecution broke out against the church in Jerusalem, and all except the apostles were scattered. ..So the people who were scattered went from place to place telling the good news.” ACTS 8:1 The good news IS NOT that you are unworthy, Gods Word says that all are worthy

of anything good that He has. The good news IS NOT that we are rejected and worthy of punishment. Gods Word says that he suffered rejection and punishment so that we can realize that we dont need to. The good news IS NOT that we should be ashamed of ourselves, and walk around in guilt, Im sure most of you were told at some point, “Shame on you, you are a bad person.” God sent his only begotten-son to love us, not to judge us. Dont you think He knew what people were like, when he came to show us Gods love? The self-righteous and those with religious spirits enjoy making people feel guilty. They threaten you with rejection, punishment, and want us to lower our self-esteem. After a while a person surrenders to their incessant religious spirits, and decides that “Im stupid, Im worthless, Im bad, etc.” But guilt is NOT the answer. Guilt is not the good news. But you may be protesting–But isnt that what the Bible wants, doesnt it want us to be guilty, doesnt it say for all have sinned and come short of the glory of God.”? Doesnt it say, “All of us like sheep have gone astray. Each has turned to his own way.”? Doesnt it say, “For whoever keeps the whole law, yet stumbles in one point, he has become guilty of all”.? Surprises of surprises, the Bible NEVER asks man to feel guilty. The Biblical greek words that translate guilt (hupodikos, opheilo and enochos), mean guilty in the same sense that if you leave your car overparked and the meter runs out–you have violated a law and are guilty of violating that law—BUT THAT IS SOMETHING ENTIRELY DIFFERENT THAN FEELING GUILTY. We have been told all our lifetimes by the modern day pharisees that it is God who wants us to feel guilty. God wants us to feel loved. God wants us to realize that He loves us more than we can ever love ourselves. God is love, God never tells us that God is guilt. I can do all things through Christ Jesus who lives in me! Wow! How can God expect us

Page 493 …

to have a low opinion of ourselves if He tells us that we can do all things through Christ! He never expected us to have a low opinion of ourselves. Jesus is called the most humblest man ever, and yet he had no sins to castigate himself about. He couldnt crawl in the dust and plead for Gods mercy on his wretchedness, so how did he get to be the humblest man? Because humility is not self-denigration. We have been fed a lie here too by the religious pharisees of our day. Humility means knowing Gods plan for your life. God wants us to learn His ways which are the ways of love. Religious spirits dont want to treat people with love, they want to judge them, they want to hit them over the head with religion, they want to legalistically find ways to prove that their fellow man is bad. They can always show you how they are right and the other person is wrong. They like to use the law–but they seldom use love. The Word of God says that the letter of the Law kills, but the Spirit of Love gives life. Yes man has fallen greatly, and mankind sins greatly. But where sin abounds, Gods love and strength are poured out in more abundance. Christ said, if God clothes the wild flowers in all their beauty wont he do more for you if you have faith? On the one hand is the beauty of mankind–bought with a price” “in the image & glory of God” and “in the likeness of God”; and on the other hand this beautiful image of God has wandered off in total rebellion to his Creator. But even in that state of rebellion God still sees worth and value in a man. The enemies of God, such as the mind-control programmers, love to make people think that God has rejected them because they are bad. And since our parents didnt listen to us, and told us we were bad, we think that God acts like our parents. But the message that Christs disciples gave was not one of guilt, and shame, and religious rules, but sounded like this, “For David, after he had served his own generation by the will of God, fell on sleep, and was laid unto his fathers, and saw corruption. Be it known unto you therefore, men and brethren, that through this man [Jesus] is preached unto you the forgiveness of sins: and by him all that believe are justified from all things, from which ye could not be justified by the law of Moses.” ACTS 19:36-39 When my deeper alters thought about forgiveness, the programming kicked in and I got suicidal. These alters had been programmed to think they had no heart, that they were bad, etc. Forgiveness was a concept that they could not grasp. But these alters were able to take the first step of faith. (Allow me to switch to first person:) I told myself, if God said it, I had to believe it, because God said WHOSOEVER asks for forgiveness is forgiven. The day you seek Me with your whole heart is the day youll find me. (cf. PS 34:8-10, 2 CHR. 15:2, HEB 10:22). I stepped outside of the programming and believed God was the integrity of His own Word. I couldnt rationalize the forgiveness, I simply accepted it on the basis of Gods integrity. As the months past, I realized that the Holy Spirit had quietly done His work, and had freed me from the guilt that I had carried, and freed me from the effects of the programming. I did feel forgiven. I didnt intellectually comprehend forgiveness, the programming blocked me mentally, but it couldnt block the Holy Spirit working in my heart. Forgiveness came to my deeper parts by standing on the Word of God. Now I was free to acknowledge the things God had for me in life. If your prayers are not going anywhere, and you feel like God is not hearing your prayers–then quit praying, and start trusting that God knows your situation. He knows the trouble your in. Place some trust and faith in Him. Quit fearing, and start having some faith. An innocent child is birthed out of heaven. The Word of God says that Christ died for all men, the entire world. He was the lamb of God who took away the sins of the world. He was the second Adam, who corrected the curse that Adam brought upon mankind. It is very

Page 494 …

clear in scripture that you will only be held accountable for the sins that you have done. Adams sins are not imputed to you. The goal of the Illuminati is to take the innocent child and perform mind-control upon it before it can know right from wrong, before it has stepped outside of its innocence. The perverted joy that Satan gets in marrying and polluting the innocence of a small child is part of why things happen the way they do. What happens when free-will is stripped from a young innocent child? Those parts that do have free-will will stand in proxy for those who are trapped. How did God judge a city? God told Abraham he would spare Sodom and Gomorrah if he could find a few righteous persons within them. God told Abraham that if he could find 10 righteous men in the city of Sodom, then he would spare it. If a persons front alters have free will they will stand in proxy for those who do not have free-will. Persons are not responsible for action under extreme duress nor are contracts valid legally if they are contracted under duress. Likewise, those alters who have no free-will are not in a situation where they can choose right from wrong. They become accountable when they are free of the mind-control and can choose between right and wrong. In other words, front alters can indeed save a city of alters, if they are the only ones with free will and they are righteous. But with freedom comes responsibility. There are numerous cases of non-multiples coming forward for numerous altar calls, and repeatedly giving themselves to Christ. There are plenty of cases of non-multiples receiving repeat baptisms. As much as this happens, it seems strange that some ministers will deny alters who come to Christ the chance to be baptized. If the alter wants to make a personal public confession of faith, they should be allowed to do it. And the co-authors will be happy to help victims with this area of concern. If a person is really O.K. with the Lord, do you think that going into the water and getting baptized is going to injure that relationship? Does the reader really think God is that petty and has that little compassion. What kind of person do some people think God is? And that is probably one of the big secrets to gaining salvation–DISCOVERING WHO GOD REALLY IS, versus what all the modern religious pharisees say about Him. You are not going to find salvation by submitting yourself to an organized religious group that takes your free-will away. Christ came to give you free-will to seek God on your own. He came to set men free of religious tyranny. Unfortunately, after setting men free of religious tyranny, many have come using his name and have established religious tyranny. And they usually justify their tyranny by distorting the character and nature of God. What you sow, you reap. If you want a spiritual life, you need a spiritual birth. Its that simple. You dont plant a natural life and get a spiritual life.

OUR “SALVATION PACKAGE”

1. Provides for a full and complete pardon for all sins of commission and omission of which a sinner might be guilty.
2. Provides for a cleansing from all unrighteousness which results from said sinners behaviour. “If we confess our sins He is faithful and just to forgive us our sins and to cleanse us from all unrighteousness.”
3. Provides for the Judge of all the earth, “Remembering our sins no more”.
4. Provides for the sins to be blotted out as a thick cloud, and put away as far as the East is from the West.
5. Provides for clearing of the conscience by way of asking for forgiveness, not just apologizing, and making restitution where it is possible to restore the damages.

Page 495 …

SANCTUARY (safe room), creating a s.

Therapists working in tandem with clients have built internal safe rooms for alters to view memories together, or to work on issues together in safety. They may also construct new living quarters for alters as they work with the front systems and try to stabilize, integrate and fuse alters. The concept of building safe rooms internally to protect alters from internal attacks is a good idea for therapists, but it has limited success. There is nothing wrong with using internal sanctuaries, if the therapist realizes the ins and outs of creating and using one. Safe rooms created by the therapist & client work better for the front alters than for deeper alters. Every change in the system comes with a price tag. Programming has its own kind of security. The programmers allowed alters to build their own internal worlds and the homes they live in. They have felt safe in their internal residences for years. When they abandon their internal homes it doesnt have a safe feeling, and then they are pounced upon by numerous internal mechanism to not disturb the peace and order of the system, such as judge alters with armies who enforce the order of the system with pain and punishment. So they have exchanged their comfortable internal home for a palace with pain. No matter how beautiful the therapist makes the safe room, it is still will be a place of pain. During deprogramming, when we wanted to preserve temporary gains, it was possible to creatively think of some type of internal structure like an accessible mountain with a hollow oak to hide in or an invulnerable space ship where an alter could have refuge from the internal programmers. The problem is as long as those internal programmers are operating, they are cagey and they can creatively think of some way to overcome the imagery of the new safe place. Generally within 48 hours they had figured out some way to recapture the alter and had started attempts to reprogram the alter. This means that every two days a new safe hiding place has to be created, unless a sloppy job is done and the system defenders break through very quickly, and then a sanctuary may have to be built even sooner. And telling this just underscores the need to work on why the alters are making their changes in their life. Why are they fighting the programming? They need to be reminded. If the support team wants to create an internal sanctuary, and are aware of its vulnerability, then the therapist needs to work with the alter being protected to find out what the alter feels is safe. The alter may have lived internally in a box and may not know what a large room is. The alter may not even feel comfortable in a large room. Perhaps the alter has been around numerous other alters and has always heard noisy chattering. How will the alter feel if the alter is now going to be isolated in a “safe” room. The safe room may end up feeling more like maximum security. In other words, the therapist needs to work with the alter and the alters creativity to secure the best choice of safety. Other supportive alters can help. Internal telephone lines can be put in to keep alters in touch with each other.

Page 496 …

SATANIC CULTS, understanding the practice of

For a certain part of mankind, the drive for power has developed the power to fashion other men. But what power controls those who have gained the power to fashion the minds of men as they choose? Is that power which controls the programmers merely the latent potential of the human mind? Or is that power merely a mass hallucination, or an auto suggestion by these programmers? Or to rephrase these questions more bluntly: does Lucifer and his demons really control the programmers? Or do they only half-way pretend that demons exist, because if you believe in something, anything, then supposedly it will work? For the power hungry, truth and fiction are but tools to gain power. There is an appealing theory that the CIA, Anton LaVey (a satanist & programmer), Michael Aquino (a satanist & programmer), and others of the occult underworld find witchcraft and spells appealing simply because it gives power, and that they do not believe in an actual character named Satan. LaVey and Aquino both convincingly claim that they do not believe in Satan. They also lie convincingly that they dont carry out human sacrifices. Who knows the hearts of these programmers? At the heart of evil is the quest for power. That is what is at the root of the love of money. At the heart of evil is a philosophy of death that must act as if it is a philosophy of life. Because the Illuminati is not able to see the true meaning of life, on the surface nothing seems to count but personal power, but is there something else? Yes, there is, and we know it for a fact because we were there. These programmers are prisoners of their quest for power, but they also believe that there is a greater power that they serve which will reward them. Again the question begs itself–when they are captured by their insatiable quest for power, have they surrendered themselves to a neutral thing, or have these programmers surrendered their life to a higher power? Everyone is willing to concede that these satanic movers and shakers are obsessed with gaining power. If these men want power so bad, and have such resources available, would they devote so much time and resources to something that didnt work? But the rational thinker can correctly answer, much of magic is trickery, natural unknown forces in nature, or some unknown power of mind over matter. The rational thinker argues, it works, but not by supernatural forces. Psychic abilities are merely untrained RV abilities.

But the surrender to demonic forces always brings with it a desire for the irrational. If reason were to have a central place in the magicians world view, then much of what the magician believes would have to be discarded. Castanedas occult classic Tales of Power (NY: Simon & Schuster, 1974) p. 101 states, “We, the luminous beings [the Illuminati], are born with two rings of power, but we use only one to create the world. That ring, which is hooked very soon after we are born, is reason, and its companion is talking. Between the two they concoct and maintain the world. So, in essence, the world that your reason wants to sustain is the world created by a description and its dogmatic and inviolable rules, which the reason learns to accept and defend. The secret of the luminous beings is that they have another ring of power which is never used, the will. The trick of the sorcerer is the same trick of the average man. Both have a description; one, the average man, uphold it with his reason; the other, the sorcerer, upholds it with his will….the advantage of the sorcerer is that will is more engulfing than reason….from now on you should let yourself perceive whether the description is upheld by your reason or your will.” The child victim while they are being programmed are told that if they want something bad enough they can create it.

Page 497

Hitler, a secret satanist, never quit preaching the power of the will. If the German people willed to win, then they could, was Hitlers magical perception. When individuals lost the will to fight, Hitler held those individuals accountable, rather than external circumstances for their lack of fight. Mind over matter. This is the sorcerers world view. There have been and continue to be plenty of gullible people who want to believe the deceptions of the cults. What you see is not what you get. The world of reason must be left behind to understand the Illuminati. We must think in terms of willpower and power of all kinds. We must think in irrational terms. We must grasp what it is like to be addicted to power, and the quest for hidden knowledge to gain more power, and power through deception. The Mystery Religions (which continue today in their hard core form as the Illuminati, and their more ceremonial symbolism as Freemasonry) have had thousands of years to perfect their deceptions. The victim of mind-control experiences the depth of how powerful the perpetrators network of deception is. The Illuminati and the Masonic Perpetrators of mind-control have a system of secrecy so pervasive and well in place that you will not see the obvious telltale signs that most people would look for when they initially hear that something is amiss. Even the visible front of the occult world is overlooked by many people. Along this line, when a therapist or victim begins to catch on to the mind-control, immediately the natural questions present themselves, HOW DID THEY HAVE TIME TO DO THIS? and WHERE COULD THEY HAVE DONE ALL THIS? These questions may stem from genuine concern that the person not jump to false conclusions, but they also are predicated on a lack of understanding about how the Illuminati and associated cults work. For reasonable people who are disposed to learn, we can provide the inside story on how the unexplainable can be explained. For those who have made up their minds and are not interested, all we have to ask is this, “How do you explain this present wicked world and how do you explain how incompetent our government seems to be in correcting problems? How is it that billions of dollars get looted from the entire Savings & Loan industry by hundreds of insiders and no-one ever gets punished? How is it that Russian generals pilot our most secret Stealth bombers, but U.S. airforce personnel get shot if they approach a stealth bomber without authorization?” Actually, when we think of it, the list of “anomalies” of this present system are endless. We could honestly ask hundreds of questions of things that dont make sense, unless you understand how the Illuminati are running things. Take a minute to think about how important power is to the military and to the alphabet spy-agencies? Their quest for power lines them up philosophically with the occult worlds philosophy. Truth for warriors and spies is merely a tool. The men who will rise to the top of such organizations are those who will defend the satanic philosophy of using willpower to create ones worldview. During our time within the Illuminati, we can say for a fact that Freemasonry and the Illuminati are interlocked. The Masonic system has lodges and temples that public can see, but dont think that they are not smart enough to create a system of secret lodges. They have a system of secret lodges, and secret tunnels to temples that allow them to carry out human sacrifices and sexual rituals without the mainstream of lower level Masons even knowing what Freemasonry is all about. In a female Illuminati system, the Sisters of Light alters will be created before the Illuminati Mothers of Darkness. All Mothers of Darkness have to have Sister of Light alters. However, the Sisters of Light alters, which are used during the bodys teenage years are extremely difficult to find?

Page 498 …

Why? Because the Sisters of Light are created for extremely abusive Masonic sexual rituals that are done in both visible & secret Masonic Temples. The teenage girl may be used on Friday, by quietly pulling the child out of school for a preparation ritual by the Masons, and then on Saturday and Sunday the teenage child Sister of Light alters will participate in the actual full-blown rituals.

DEMONOLOGY, and its relation to mind-control and the satanic cults.

If you investigate into the depths of darkness in the hearts of men, where will it lead you? Your investigation will take you into demonology. In its nicer forms, it shows itself as mysticism and spiritism. It is upon demonology that the Illuminati is founded. It is from demonology that the rituals and the mind-control spring forth. Of course those who have no previous knowledge of this will be the first to feel qualified to pass judgement that magic and demons are merely urban myths. In the rarified air of academia, denial of Satanic Ritual Abuse is like an opium addiction. If corruption & organized crime need satanic philosophies to justify their acts, then they also need demonology to provide the spiritual power and guidance. It all becomes one dynamic, sacrifice and gore are necessary to harness spiritual power, secrecy is demanded to perform such a blood lusting magical tradition, and control of the outside world then is needed to hide the crimes done for power. A mind-controlled slaves hidden life is based upon the spirit world. The science of dealing with spirits is called the Cabala. Theurgy is a high degree of occultism where the magician can evoke angels (evil), exalted spirits, genii, fire spirits. Within the Illuminati, we were Luciferians (also known as Gnostics), not Satanists. That does not mean that Satan doesnt play a role in the occultism of the Illuminati, it means that Satanic cults tend to be deranged dabblers, and the Illuminati are sophisticated blue-blooded bloodlines that view themselves as the elite of the world. But whether one is part of a Satanic cult or the Illuminati or some other occult group, the foundation of what is done is demonology. With ruthless dedication the upcoming Illuminati undertake to transform themselves into magicians and witches who can control the spirits. Controlling spirits gives power. Satanic dabblers are not the only practitioners of necromancy, so are the Illuminati. You will find the Illuminati in graveyards for some of their rituals. Many of the Illuminati rituals are so severe only persons with multiple personalities (or great dissociative abilities) could endure them and maintain a functioning sanity. Although we can write with authority about demonology and the Illuminati and its relationship to programming, we hope to show a few tidbits of the paper trail that could be amassed to add validity to what we want to share. A member of the elite Stewart bloodline, R.J. Stewart, provides a paper trail of what we also experienced in the Illuminati, “The developing practitioner of advanced magical arts must have grounding and experience in the following disciplines: meditation, concentration, visualization and ritual pattern-making. No advanced work may be undertaken without training and experience in these four skills. There are five fundamental arts or disciplines in magical work, and the first four tend to lead towards the fifth, which is meditation.” (Stewart, R.J. Advanced Magical Arts. Longmead, England, 1988, p. 8; this is also in Stewart, R.J. Living Magical Arts. Blandford Press, Poole, 1987.) The same abilities that are needed for advanced magic, (according to this great magic adept and member of the scottish Stewarts), are the same abilities needed for becoming a programmed multiple. The mind-control with its abilities to endure pain, to go into trances, to visualize is really a natural outgrowth of the deeper black magical arts.

Page 499 …

The eastern branch of the secret occult world is Indian Yogism, and it is well known how they have developed total control of their minds and bodies. They can go into altered states and sleep on beds of nails or walk on hot coals. Because demonology is based upon power, and power is obtained by fighting to the top, a child victim is soon taught that if they do not perform they will bring harm upon their cult bloodline. In high level magic, there is no room for failure. The bloodlines and individuals are locked in intense rivalries, and individuals are expected to contribute to the competition. The child victim is expected to blindly obey all orders within the family. The victim is to never ask why or ask about the consequences of an order. The victim is warned, “If you ever break this oath may all the Darkness of the family fall upon you as the same daggers pierce your heart through and through.” After such an oath the child will be ordered to worship Lucifer, and carry out Luciferian chants. Some of the oaths, and secrets are beginning to see the light of day. J.K. Huysmans wrote in La Bas (french for Down There) that one of the Illuminati oaths at that time of the French revolution (and still used) was, “Lightning does not strike so quickly as the dagger which will reach thee wherever thou mayest be.”

Page 500 …

SELF-FORGIVENESS, to achieve

One of the major blocks preventing deprogramming is the lack of self-forgiveness that alters maintain. Some churches have it backwards, they think that the victims need to forgive their abusers from the start. The victims do not even recognize what their abusers have done, and the victims generally blame themselves (unfairly) for much of what was done to them. The victim needs first to work on self-forgiveness, then learn what has really been done, and finally when the memories are all worked on, and the person has completely integrated, then the victim can honestly forgive their abusers. Mouthing some words about forgiveness without understanding what the sin was that was done to the victim is only pretending to work on the issue. The bitterness that is embedded in their hearts and minds needs a proper release, and unfortunately most of this bitterness is turned by victim themselves on themselves, not against the abusers, who are the ones who really should held responsible. Because self-forgiveness is such a major issue, it has already been covered some in Vol. 2, p. 284, and in our Deeper Insights article on “Salvation” Those who have studied the professional literature on treatment of MPD/DID will notice a deathly silence in most professional literature on the topic of self-forgiveness. All Illuminati victims of mind-control have been terrorized by their abusers about how God hates them and how God will punish them for their badness. The mind has had to accept the repeated messages that the programmers will drill into the victim that the victim is bad. Why will the mind accept this message so conclusively? The mind is pre-set to expect love from parents. Every animal and every person expects care and love from its mother when its born. When the child does not receive what it expects then it has no choice but to conclude, “I must be bad for so many people to treat me this way.” “These all-knowing big people must have a reason for abusing me, and they say its because Im bad, and all the evidence shows that Im bad, so I must be very bad.” Its a vicious cycle. The programming makes the child feel defective, and the feelings of being defective and guilty make the child feel shame. All these feelings combine to make the person hate him or her self. The victim of mind-control has had a foundation of guilt and humiliation laid into their unconscious mind. Memorizing a Bible verse and repeating some verse like its a mantra is not going to root out that foundation which is firmly embedded. Programs which attempt to show deeper alters their identity in Christ will hit lots of strongholds and triggers and may get bogged down in fierce resistance. The struggle for self-forgiveness will be a process. It is a process of sanctification that the Holy Spirit will work in a person over a period of time. The mind needs time to process and sort things out. The bitterness and self-hatred were not wired into the mind in countless neural-synapses and K-lines overnight. It will take time for the mind to re-wire itself. Here are some tips, and the reader may have already thought of these: Study the Word of God about self-forgiveness. Pray for self-forgiveness. Be gentle and patient, it takes time for the mind to overcome its foundation of self-hatred. Keep bathing the mind in positives and washing away the negatives. Over a period of time a healing will take place, and you will have regained the self-respect that the programmers and abusers stole from you.

Page 501 …

SPLIT-BRAIN PROGRAMMING

One of the most powerful programming tools is the use of split-brain programming. In order to insure the continued secrecy and success of the use of alters who function only from one hemisphere, the Illuminati used their psychiatrists to spread the notion that split-brain programming was simply a hypnotic program, a trick of the mind. The reality is that one side of the brain is physically drugged to sleep with an injection while the victim is traumatized to create parts. Vol. 2 covers methods used in split brain programming. After a single hemisphere part (alter) is created, it can then be further programmed by each of its two eyes viewing different films simultaneously. Actually, the split-brain films begin during the splitting tortures. If a programmer wants a part to assassinate a particular person, they will often create a particular part for just that assignment. While they are torturing the mind to get that part who will do the job, they will be showing films of the crimes supposedly done by the person who is the target of the assassination mission. The programmer doesnt know exactly when the mind will split a piece so the films are run during the entire trauma-splitting process. The crime films and what needs to be done will be run during the process. The part that is created for this specific job will be accessed after the mission and destroyed by shattering it with trauma, and then the shattered parts will be locked up in a concentration camp in the mind. This specialized type of assassination programming is done usually with men. Sometimes the programmers are too busy or dont have the patience and they merely put in a shattering program, that self-triggers when the slaves mission is complete; and shatters that piece using the internal programming capabilities of the slaves mind. This works fine, but the risk of leakage is somewhat greater. Special alters created for a single drug run or money laundering run for an important politician will be created and destroyed in a very sophisticated hi-tech fashion. There will be no split-brain alter left for the therapist to work with, only tiny fragments locked up in very deep secure parts of the mind. However, the key to understanding why these dissociative pieces (alters) are so good at their jobs is SPLIT-BRAIN PROGRAMMING. That is why it has been kept such a secret. Alters who have been created when only one hemisphere was awake will either operate only on logic or operate only on emotion. Alters who operate only on logic serve in roles such as assassination alters just described and internal programming alters. These alters will carry out inhumane horrible atrocities upon others and themselves because they have no emotions. On the other side, an alter which has no logic can be hypnotically told to act like Betty Boop (the cartoon figure) and they will emotionally carry out this assignment, because they have no logic to tell them that people dont act like Betty Boop, a cartoon figure. An alter who has no logic can easily be made into a door knob or some other illogical form. These alters will only function from the side of the mind they were created from. Over time, the Illuminati has discovered that alters with split brain programming do not gain the advantage of the other hemisphere, but remain stunted. This is why it is so difficult for therapists to “contaminate” internal programmers with positive thinking. Internal programming alters can make themselves co-conscious with other alters who want to be free of programming, and the programming alters dont sense the horror of the abuse with which they subject the rest of the system.

Page 502 …

EXERCISES TO REWIRE THE BRAINS HEMISPHERES TOGETHER FOR SPLIT- BRAIN ALTERS.

Brain Integration Therapy developed from the foundational research of Dr. Glenn and Robert Doman and and educator, Carl Delacato, and later Dr. Paul Dennison provides exercises that will develop brain pathways for integration of the hemispheres. An example of such an exercise is called “the crosscrawl”. The Crosscrawl stimulates both sides of the brain and has a very positive impact on integration of the brain from side to side. The exercise is basically marching in place with the opposite hand touching the opposite knee. If it done to music its more fun. A variation is is to try touching the opposite hand to the opposite foot in the back instead of in the front. Or one can try touching the opposite hand to the opposite heal in the front. The exercises and advice that Dr. Paul Dennison developed have solid research to validate them. This section cant possibly cover what several books cover on the subject. Interested therapists should consult the following books:

Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Brain Gym, Teachers Edition. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.

Dennison, Paul E. and Gail E. Dennison. Personalized Whole Brain Integration. Ventura, CA: Edu-Kinesthetics, Inc., 1989.

Hannaford, Carla. Smart Moves: Why Learning is Not All In Your Head. Arlington, VA: Grat Ocean Pub., 1995. This book was written by a neurophysicist/educator who has research to validate the Brain Integration Therapy.

Some therapists have explored using music that both hemispheres of the brain listen to in order to pull the two hemispheres together. Whether this helps or not is not known. Alters, who find they are only logic or emotion, can pair up with the opposite type of alter and can work in teams. By learning to co-consciously work side by side, they regain some of the brains natural abilities to look at life both ways.

Page 503 …

SURVEILLANCE, dealing with surveillance

SPIES IN THE SKY (This information is based upon Harold Houghs book Satellite Surveillance.) The FBI, SWAT teams, and other law enforcement, the NSA, and the military all use spy satellites. The best way to detect people from space is infrared. Spy satellite KH-II (KEYHOLE-II) transmits its information instantly to the ground. It can circle and view a particular site every few days. Keyhole is the codeword for spy satellites and each new generation gets a higher number. Low level electric currents on the ground known as dark currents interfere with their images. KENNAN, & LACROSSE spy satellites are the newer generation spy satellites. LACROSSE has radar imagining with a 3 resolution. The Russians have the ability to track spy satellite locations as they have circled the globe. They could hide things as the satellites came around. The normal person cant do this, nor does the average person have a great deal to hide anyway. So what if a spy satellite can read a billboard from space?

How do these spy satellites work? CCDs are used in electronic cameras in spy satellites (but the CCDs are blocked by cloud cover). Radar from satellites is also used. Radar is used from space to watch things, including what is happening in the oceans. Passive radar can see through the surfaces of underground structures. These kind of satellites are more of a threat to the privacy of objects like cars & underground shelters, than they are to people. They are not going to be able to track you as an individual. But add in the factor of a tracking implant, and the overhead satellite system becomes a nightmare. The implants are a far greater threat than any spy satellite with an electronic camera.

SPIES ON THE GROUND.

Some of the standard surveillance techniques are given in Chapter 12. From our observations of their surveillance methods, the Illuminati handlers use the standard techniques that are taught by the military and the intelligence agencies. Quite often people who are trying to mess with slaves will use dealership cars that dont have traceable licence plates. Over the years, we have seen some clever ways for mind-controlled slaves to elude their trackers. In fact, our system has had to elude some with our car at times. The first step in eluding their tracking is to realize they generally know where you are, and they are looking for ways to exploit your weakest situation. They will watch for your support person to leave. They will try to access you on your way to your therapist. They will try to access you when you are alone. They will disguise themselves as JWs, a repairmen, as salesmen, and other disguises too numerous to mention. Watch out for “friends”. Try to keep your business to yourself. Realize that everything you say over the telephone is heard by the controllers. Fritz had a hard time convincing us that the telephone wasnt safe, because it seems like such an invasion of ones privacy, and to admit it, means that one can no longer walk around with feeling that illusion of safety. Finally, after years of evidence that the phones are not private, we realize that if we talk on the phone, we need to accept that others are listening. This seems like a simple thing, but for Americans it is really difficult for them to realize that all ordinary phone calls are run through 30 computers between the caller and the receiver & that some of those computers record all conversations. If the computer spots trigger words, your conversation will get sent on to be listened to by humans. If you dont want your conversation listened to by a person, dont use trigger words. Much of what we would suggest is common sense. We realize that the wise dont need our advice, and fools wont heed our advice.

Page 504 …

TIPS FOR THERAPISTS

One of the first things that therapists must acclimate themselves to, is that the victim will go from one crisis to another, and many times seem a hairs breath away from death. This is because they will actually bounce from one total disaster to another calamity. The reasons for this chaos are many, but if proper treatment through a support team can be mustered, the length of this time period of disasters may be decreased. Please dont think that the victim is simply making this all up for attention. And please dont overreact and place the victim into a hospital setting which will only create a new set of problems. There is also a mistake on the part of some psychiatrists to try to medicate the person to suppress the symptoms. The best way to help a victim is to get the victims alters to creatively and internally work on situations, after all, they were creative enough to survive the most horrendous traumas ever dreamed up by mankind. Another tip for therapists is that they should not play favorites with alters. The therapist is in the same situation as any leader, be he a sergeant or a kindergarten teacher. In the long run, treating all persons with respect will produce the best results. Not all systems are ready for treatment. Some systems will bug out when their programming kicks in.

“LOVE ME AS I AM.”

A programmed multiple is probably the closest robot mankind will ever design that approaches being like humans–why? Because they are humans, and that is the horror of the thing. Men can applaud when science makes true robots to assist mankind, but mankind shrinks in horror and disgust to realize that during the entire 20th century the Illuminati have been creating robots out of people with the full secret assistance of the British, American, French and German governments. People, including therapists, shrink from the horror that slave robots are being created out of humans, so they label us anything but “slaves”. People will tell you, “Love me as I am.” We saw one therapist tell an alter of a recovering victim, “Youre nothing but programming.” Are programmed feelings any less than normal human feelings? Does it hurt any less to be programmed that you lost a baby in child birth, than to have actually lost a child? Is pain any less pain because it comes from programming and not external reality? Is there any less pain from being hypnotically convinced that they murdered a child because of your disobedience, than if it were watched in real life? Is the illusion of conscious thinking that the victim has any less an illusion than the illusion of mainstream America that common Americans determine who runs their government? Is the victim of mind-control any less free than the average person who must follow the dictates of their station in life, their genetic coding, the dictates of society, the dictates of their own lack of talents, and the subtle influences of peer pressure, organized religion and mass mind-control, not to mention the laws of physics? Perhaps there is more similarity between the mind-controlled slaves and the rest of society than we choose to admit! At any rate, the programmed thoughts and feelings of an alter should not be given any less respect nor any less validity than any other hurting person. It is time that psychologists quit throwing labels on people, and love them where they are at. Fritz and I have discussed what it is like for an observant person to watch a programmed multiple. Programmed multiples are not like other people. When you see some of the deeper alters that carry out jobs in the real world you will notice distinct differences between their thinking and non-programmed people. The observer may find that the unusual person

Page 505 …

before them doesnt laugh as they should, and they dont follow the cues of life in quite the right cadence. The unusual person (the multiple) will seem to know about things, but when questioned in depth will be found wanting. Specifics will be lacking in explanations. It is typical of how a programmed alter thinks. At times, in situations in which mind-controlled slaves are prepared to function in, they can spew forth information that will make them look above their peers in intelligence, and at least look like non-programmed individuals. They will show discipline and appear composed. But they will not carry with them the baggage of half-baked ideas and useless memories, and half-forgotten images. Reality of non-programmed people is like a jungle full of tangled undergrowth. The programmed multiple is like a well-manicured garden. What they know, they know; and what they are ignorant of, they are ignorant of. Their minds are more straight forward than non-multiples. Even front alters have a way of being very on task and straight forward. An observant person can use this as a clue. Learning behaviors outside of the programming are more difficult, and provide the appearance of “erratic” abilities. Many parts of the slave are told they have no heart and no soul. They are told they are robots, that they are slaves, that they are not human, etc. Just as an ugly child knows in its being that it is ugly by the way it has been treated by everyone in life, so also, the slave in its innermost being, is convinced that it is something less than human. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone cry for them. The deeper alters will be amazed to see someone care about them. When the deeper alters are helped, who can blame them for loving their rescuers? But again, the alters will ask themselves, is this just another illusion? And anyway how can anyone really care? We have hoped that by being brutally honest with what a programmed multiple is really all about, that there will be some people who can actually genuinely love multiples in the reality of who they are. For instance, in our Illustrated Guidebook we show a child involved in cannibalism. We are calling for solid relationships between victims and recovering slaves, not relationships based on illusions. Although the thinking of the victim has been modified to suit the Illuminati, that does not mean that victims are any less worthwhile than anyone else. Today, we lavish time and special attention to those who are handicapped and learning disabled. But to think that any person is deserving of attention because they are unusual is lopsided thinking. Our role in life to facilitate people to be the person God had intended. Underneath the superficial thoughts of the programming are special dear people who hold many of the answers to the questions so many of us ask, and to whom God has bestowed contributions and abilities for the rest of mankind. In other words, love us for being worthwhile humans, not for being an oddity, but love us in the totality of what has been done to us to make us into robotic mind-controlled slaves.

Page 506 …

TRANSFERENCE, issues of

To be expected.

Transference issues are a given when working with programmed multiples. It comes with the territory. The programmed multiples mind naturally sets itself up for a proxy. (A proxy is someone who stands in for another.) Instead of seeing it as something to be feared, hopefully the therapists can begin seeing that transference actually has a great deal of positives. The person who suffers the most from transference is the therapist, who will wonder at times if he or she is coming or going. What is also interesting, is that not only is the therapist the one who has to endure the brunt of the transference issues, the therapist is also generally the primary trigger of the transference problem. Transference issues are related to memories, and the victims memories are very intense. The programming memories are often abreacted in a drugged state, so it is hard to separate the therapist from the abusers in the fog of the memory.

Will be varied.

There are several types of transference issues. Transference occurs when the client responds to their therapist or support person based on some significant childhood figure. Transference may also occur where the response to the support person is based on several different important figures from different points in the systems past. The alter system may also transfer feelings that should be directed toward their abusers and internalize it. In other words, they treat themselves based on some significant person in their past. (And then if this isnt enough, many therapists end up having transferences provoked by someone in the system. This has a high chance of happening because alter behavior is so exaggerated, and there are so many different kinds of alters in a system, there is a

likelihood one of them will trigger the therapist. This is called “countertransference”.) Because an alter system is like a city full of people (with lots of children), a large number of contradictory transference issues may be going on at one time. Lets say Sally is a multiple going for therapy from therapist Betty. One child alter of Sallys system may see Betty as one of her past Mother-of-Darkness abusers. Another may see her as their abusive natural mother. Another may see her as a former sexual partner. Another may see her as the programmer. Another may see her as this wonderful kind teacher that the system had in high school. The therapist barely knows at first if she is coming or going, because so many alters are interpreting and seeing her differently but all in the light of their varied past experiences.

Can happen naturally.

Alters are very good at having transference reactions. Sometimes all it takes for a transference reaction is the gender of the therapist. A small alter when it takes the body may hide, thinking that the therapist is one of its abusers from the past. One of the sports that the Network of abusers likes to carry out are hunts, where slaves are turned loose naked on large tracts of private property like the Bohemian Grove and then hunted. If an alter that was involved in a hunt is near the surface of the mind, and a noise or sound randomly occurs that makes that alter think that it is being chased, it may take the body and run for its life. Transference issues happen so easily because the multiples mind often runs two tracks, they may be in memory while they are also carrying out other duties. The programmed multiple will have feelings all over the place. Children (child alters) easily see their abuser all around them.

Page 507 …

Can be manipulated for the abusers benefit. The abusers at times can manipulate transference so that the therapist gets a raw deal. This is another reason why victims need to be safe before work is started. There are enough difficulties with transference issues without the Network increasing them.

Can be worked with during therapy.

The therapist may want to take the feelings that the alters have locked away and see if they can vent them. They might use a dummy or mannequin to get in touch with their emotions. “Who are you really angry at?” “What is the undercurrent of your feelings, not what is on the surface, but what is below?” “What have you remembered and not dealt with?” In this way, the victim begins to learn to verbalize. To learn to redirect transference is a sign of maturity. The guilt that is transferred, can be dealt with. “You are not responsible for what was done to you.” If the victim acknowledges that they were powerless, that acknowledgment will help with the fear. Facing the fears and the lies saves the victim from internal transferences. Dealing with this in turn will pave the way for the system to get a clearer picture of programming. “I dont have to personalize it.”

Transference issues call for teams.

Within an Illuminati system, you are going to find some alters that work well with one gender, and some that work well with the other. This is why it is advisable for teams to work with multiple systems. A male therapist will simply never reach some alters, and a female therapist will simply never reach other alters. The therapist may feel like many of the transferences are uncalled for or unfair, but the therapist must go beyond personalizing the actions of the multiple. It is common for the programmed multiple to assume that the therapist will be cruel and sadistic just like their parents were. The therapist may think that this misperception can be taken care easily, but because of the way the multiples mind works, the only way to change the misperception is over a long period of time, such as a year or two of work. The therapist can make headway in this area by being there for the client when the system desperately needs help–which will happen. Gradually, the system will see that the therapist was there. But the system will never quit testing the therapist. It is the nature of children to test, and most alters except for a few front alters have very little experience in the world–even less than most children. It really is a positive that they are questioning and beginning to think for themselves. A child will be rebellious toward its parent, because it knows that it can be its true self, it can show its true colors, and still be accepted and received. Some of what the alters do, is simply testing to see that the therapist will be there and will continue to receive them.

Page 508 …

a name=”del115″>TWINNING, understanding and dealing with

Twinning is a critical factor to consider in the therapy of all victims, and yet it has been basically a secret until Fritz, with the help of some survivors like the author Cisco, began exposing it in writing & talks in 1992. The reader will look in vain at some of the best literature on treatment of MPD (now DID) and not find it mentioned. The Illuminati via their dirty psychologists have spread the false information that victims should not be in contact with each other. For therapists who have yet to get the word about twinning (or have heard the disinformation that is being spread), this article may save the life of their client.

Essentially all Monarch trauma-based mind-controlled slaves are programmed to have a twin. The front host alter will generally not know about the twinning unless they have had a deep Illuminati alter teaches the host or they have read something in our previous books. The Vol 2 book has information on twinning on pages 83-84, 215, and 359. Our Illustrated Guidebook has information on twinning on pages 45 and 47. During the twinning each victim will create parts that internalize all the characteristics of the person selected to be their twin. These parts have totally internalized the other persons identity. These parts are programmed to take responsibility for what the twin does contrary to the programming. If a victim goes into the hospital for therapy, the twin systems alters that identify with the victim will punish their own systems body and will report back to the master what is happening. (A hospital stay will trigger the fear of death in the twin, i.e. shes dying, were dying.) The victims system will not have to report back to the handler, their twins system will do it for them. Twinning makes the subject of victim safety and the prevention of victim accessing far more complex than has been generally realized. Likewise, the victim of

mind-control who is attempting to move toward health and freedom will experience lots of guilt in moving toward freedom, when they know that this may be causing their twin to commit suicide. The front parts (for instance the host alter) will have no idea of the deeper torments that coming in to therapy causes the deeper parts, because the host is oblivious to the twinning. The therapist then double-binds the host by making them sign contracts not to hurt the body, not realizing the dynamics of why deeper parts are being pushed increasingly to punish themselves for what is happening to or for what they are doing to their twin system. We will review the various types of programming scenarios that the programmers use to create twins. The 12 sciences of mind-control that the Vol 2 and the Deeper Insights book describe are all used to create twins. The programming begins at about age 7, although the preparation and selecting work may have taken place many years before.

SELECTION & PREPARATION.

a. One parent will have two children, but the two will be raised independently of one another.
b. The eggs of a mother will be placed in surrogates to create separate but identical twins.
c. A mother may swap her child with another mother.
d. The two will have generational ties.

TRAUMA.

a. The paired slaves will be trauma-bonded to each other, the older will want to protect and nurture the younger, and will be set up in situations to save the other from death.
b. They will torture each other, at times they are forced to almost kill each other via torture.
c. They will go through almost all the death, burial and resurrection ceremonies together. They learn to live and to die together.
d. They will take & internalize each others pain when they are tortured in the vicinity of one another.

DRUGS

a. Placed in front of mirrors under drugs to take on (internalize) the identity of the other person.

HYPNOSIS

a. The full power of hypnosis will be used to twin the pair of slaves.

DECEIT

a. The alters of both systems will be told elaborate lies to bond them, to think they have common heritages, and also to create scripts and conflicts.

Page 509 …

STRUCTURING

a. They will be given identical structures so that they can have the hidden keys to each others systems. The deeper parts of most systems cant be unlocked without the help of twins.
b. They will have identical structures (cubes systems, sphere systems) to give them something in common.
c. They will have Mirror images of each other, and alters with similar names, and alters who have the same identity as their twin.
d. They are given programming scripts that intertwine.

BODY MANIPULATION

a. The twins are usually 3 years apart, unless they are special purpose actual twins.

MIND MANIPULATION

a. They are given jobs and team projects that require the skills of both, esp. jobs that require total compliance with the twinning programs in order to survive.
b. They participate in ceremonies that require the joint abilities of both.
c. They are programmed to be 1 in body, soul & mind. d. They are set up in love-hate relationships.
e. They are set up in opposites-attract & opposites-repel conflicts.

SPIRITUAL MANIPULATION

a. They are sexually mated together.
b. They are telepathically connected.
c. They are demonically connected.
d. Guilt will be created, when one twin knows something important about the other, but is not allowed to tell, such as Twin A will think her child is dead, and Twin B will know that it is alive but is not allowed to tell.
e. They will lie crown to crown (head to head) to pass psychic energy (t-).
f. Lying side by side, theyll hypnotically sense intravenous tubes mixing their blood to blood-bond them.

EXTERNAL CONTROLS

a. They are programmed to die if anything happens to kill the other.
b. The peer pressure of the team prevents them from “breaking the circle”.

We have provided a more detailed look at how the twinning is done, so that therapists & the support team can grasp that the twinning is a major part of the programming. It is the forerunner to the proxying and the group-mind that is being created. Therapists need to understand that the twinning (as with everything else) is a controlled bonding. The Illuminati choose slaves that compliment each other in abilities, that is, one tends to be logical, the other emotional. One tends to be negative, & the other positive. One will be programmed to accept love and the other not to. By having this dichotomy, the Illuminati have something to manipulate to either join them or separate them. The systems are also filled with false information to keep them apart. The twins are set up to be jealous of each other, for instance, one is jealous of the others mental abilities, and the other is jealous of the others beauty. There is always some method for the handlers to divide and conquer the twins if they have to. Within twins, there will be some alters that love the other person, and some that hate the other person. This is meant to be this way.

ADVANTAGES GAINED FROM WORKING WITH TWINS TOGETHER

Not all work with twins needs to have them in the same room together. Their therapy can be coordinated without them being simultaneously present. For instance, in the above example of a victim being in a hospital in therapy, the twin could be talked to by the therapist and calmed down, “It will be O.K.” It is surprising what a few kind words can do in some situations to defuse the fears that are triggered in a twin. It has been standard practice to exclude the twins from any knowledge of the others therapy. Giving notice of what is happening to one person about the therapy of another can raise its own set of problems (such as jealousies), but it is suggested that rather than letting that deflect support teams from coordinating the work with the twin systems together, that this wrinide be accepted as part of the job and that it be addressed. What are the advantages to having programmed twins work together? The two twins will not try to impede each others progress as much. When a victim of mind-

Page 510 …

control is in the hospital most therapists dont realize that their twin is going absolutely bonkers. The two twins will unlock each others deeper systems. The two twins will help trigger and help heal each other. The two twins will be a support team for each other. The twins can work on mutual issues and mutual memories together. The twins can validate each others experiences and memories. Done properly, deprogramming twins could speed up the time needed for deprogramming.

DEEPER CULT PARTS

It is the Illuminati ritual parts that know about the twinning. Twins and teams consist of cult alters. The 4-person teams are set up on a compass with an internal clock that links them all to “circle” rituals. There are only 4 circumstances where the Illuminati internalize other people during the programming, which are: a. they internalize a Satan (a false god), b. the internalize the programmers (more false gods and an internal master), c. they internalize cult figures such as a Grande Dame, the physical mother if she is cult, perhaps a Mother-of-Darkness caretaker, perhaps the physical father who is a cult member too (which provides internal false parents), and d. the false sibling which is the false twin. These are the few times that external people are internalized within alters during the programming. This may help support team members to see the importance of twinning.

A FINAL TRICK

A related programming trick is to tell a system that they have given birth to twins, one was sacrificed and the other has been secretly raised as an adept in some foreign country. The fear of separation from ones child that the mind experiences, also overlaps into the fear of losing ones own programmed “twin”. The mind doesnt reason these things out, it simply responds with natural anxiety that something has been taken from it. We havent seen any proof that the supposed lost children who are adepts actually exist, it is our tentative conclusion that in most cases the stories are cult fabrications, but either way, it is just one more anxiety that the victim has to endure.

Page 511 …

WORLD, external, how to underatnd the external world

How did the reader come to understand the world, was it not step by step? Lets take a quick but close up look at this step by step learning process. (If the following is a little too technical bear with it.) Researchers have discovered that the basic “frame-arrays” that allow the mind to begin this step by step procedure to build a world-view are part of the original brain already provided for us at birth. At that starting point, we begin accumulating sensory input and building our understanding of the external world. The mind for instance, orients itself wherever it is located, by attaching some type of grid, such as up-left, up, up right, etc. or south, east, west, and north. This happens both in a normal person, and within the mind-controlled slave whose orientating system (compass/clock) is programmed in. In the mind, as it creates “internal visual maps” of what the mind sees in a room, it associates items in the room with prelearned frames, such as the ceiling, the floor, the four walls. Then items are attached at the neural level to these frames. While we can interchange & reuse frames, the information attached to them remains fixed. As the mind looks in a different direction a K-line, which has been developed to record the finished visual maps that the mind has created, is then activated. As the items are filed the mind compares what has been “seen” (mapped) with previous patterns & interconnects (overlays) the new memory. The bottom line is that learning is a step by step process. The programmers have given each alter exactly what they want that alter to see and know, line upon line, precept upon precept. They have finished that programming, teaching & training with strict programming that the alters are not to question anything, and that they are to accept what is there. They have closed off the five senses to many of the alters. For years when psychologists got non-host alters, they thought that many of these other alters were delusional, psychotic, and insane. Actually, there was nothing abnormal about these alters. Their perceptions were totally in line with what they had been allowed to learn and experience. Hopefully, at some point, experiences like this will begin to restrain the therapeutic community from attaching labels on people, rather than understanding them. When the deeper alters hold the body, they receive a cultural shock. The internal world is actually a protection for them to prevent them from having to come in contact with the external world. When they do take a peek at the external world, they try to understand it from their extremely limited viewpoint. The typical response for deeper alters is to run back into the internal world and hide. They are very skittish. They have been told that the outside world will not understand them, and generally this is soon validated by whoever they meet in the outside world. They are like an American left to fend for himself in the middle of mainland China. So how can the therapist encourage skittish deeper alters to take a look at the world? Over a long period of time, deeper alters will begin to get internal glimpses and hearsay messages passed down the grapevine that so-and-so alter took the body and it went O.K. Over a period of time, they will begin to develop a trust that they can come out and not be hurt. They generally do not know the simple things of life, such as how to use a microwave, how to use a teller machine, etc. Even a modern telephone may be a new thing. This is where a 24-hour support team member who understands the situation can help provide a safe loving environment for the deeper alters to have as their first exposure to the world on their own. Now the therapist/support persons need to begin to teach those alters to ask questions, and to think on their own. They need to discover emotions and their senses. They need to experience life in a reduced trance state, so they see reality better. This freedom in the

Page 512 …

outside world will begin unshackling them from the internal world. They have never had a taste of life, outside of the cult world & hidden internal world. Contrary to what some believe, alters are changed by their environment, although the programming does inhibit change. Remember how small children go through a stage where they cling to their mothers and are afraid of strangers? How is this stage dealt with? The child naturally grows out of it with exposure to the world. Likewise, the deeper alters gradually lose their fear of the outside world as they are exposed to it. Many of these deeper alters have been locked away in their internal world for 20 or 30 or 40 years. There have been great changes over the years. If they are to participate with the front alters, they will have to take ownership to the front alters relationships, and the front alters relatives. They will have to learn that they have a telephone number, and an address. As they function more and more in the real world, the pull to go home (home to the master “Daddy”) will decrease. The support team can give them a taste of life. This is where they will need help. The deeper alters will often show reluctance to experience new things, but if their initial fears can be overcome, they may enjoy the activity more than they realized. It really is a catch 22. Lets say you want a deeper alter to enjoy a birthday party. Birthdays are exceptionally big triggers, and all kinds of horrible junk will surface in terms of memories. The child slave has had “surprises” that has conditioned these child alters to hate surprises. A small child may have been given a-head in a gift wrapped box. Who knows all of what has been done to the child on its birthday in the past. How does one reframe the meaning of birthdays? Any attempt to reframe birthdays by giving a happy celebration will simply trigger the deeper alters. One thing that might be tried is to have a strong deeper alter hold the body, and put most of the other alters to sleep or wall them off from the birthday activities. After the one alter survives the birthday without any major traumas, that success can filter down through the deeper layers. That doesnt mean that the rest have had a good time. They have likely gone through hell during the day. But at least a small step forward has been taken, and gradually perhaps year after year, a slow refraining process can be worked on. There is not any outside activity which wont have a sharp edge to it somewhere in the deeper parts of the system. (This is one reason why it is ludicrous to think that integration is the only answer, or that lots of slaves have already achieved integration. If there were ever a programmed multiple that got complete integration, the integrated system would pull in so many phobias as they united, that the system wouldnt function.) There needs to be work to reframe their view of life. There needs to be work on the fears. Through conditioning by exposure to the joys of life, the sharp edges of life can be blunted. The present methods of therapy (1 hour a week in an office) have no real mechanism to give the deeper alters the safe, guided exposure to the outside world that they need to stretch themselves. We hope we have communicated that the needs of the deeper alters during an everyday experience in the real world are extremely great. They need a loving wise support person to help them in the external world, this is not something that should be left haphazardly in the hands of some friend of the client who doesnt understand programming and DID. Exposure to the world can greatly help break down the lies of the programming and the power of the programming, but this tool is being neglected today in therapy, or thrown away by simply having perhaps an aunt of the client take them out for a movie. Programmed multiple systems are great at putting on fronts. It takes someone with an understanding of the system to really take advantage of the power of exposing the system to the real external world. Finally, the alter system can develop internal processes to speed up the exposure of

Page 513 …

alters to the external world. They can teach each other and help supervise each other as alters step out into the external world. By doing this they can shorten the time it would take for so many different people to reorient their thinking. The Illuminati programmers will occasionally punish troublesome alters by locking them mentally (internally) in a box, against these alters wishes. This is just as traumatic for these alters as it would be for the therapist to experience being locked in a box for months. Therapists need to stay on top of these kinds of situations and take responsibility to find missing alters who have helped with therapy but have been punished by being locked away. Some therapists have a policy of only working with those alters that show up for therapy. They dont understand the internal structuring and how alters that cooperate with them can be punished and locked up. Therapists need to develop some sense of commitment to help rescue alters that have “stuck their necks on the line” by working with the therapist. In summary, although support groups and therapy sessions are helpful, great opportunities to destroy programming and expose the programming lies are lost because skilled support people are not available to help guide deeper alters into experiencing, understanding & coping with the external world.

Page 514 …

WORLDS, the destruction of

In order to do this subject justice, Fritz and I have collaborated extensively in pooling our experiences and knowledge together to write this article. The cold hard fact is that we have never seen anyone totally free of all the effects of programming, in spite of the pre-mature or boastful claims of many therapists to the contrary. Not knowing what they are looking at, they do not know that they are not finished. A small child may think for sure he or she is finished cleaning a room, but in reality the child has not even begun. Fritz and our system have patiently waited for years to explain these things in a helpful spirit to others, so now is our chance to express ourselves. In order to understand how to take out the programming, one has to understand the internal computers. In order to understand the internal computers, one has to understand the early core splits, which are: the gems, the Grand Druid Council, and the Butterflies. The Butterflies empower and guide the computers. Further, to understand the computers and these early splits, one needs to understand the core. Although we have discussed the core at length, we will need to go into this subject in greater depth. In order to understand the core, we will have to understand some secrets about how the mind functions. Many of the things that we write about the brain are known, but they are not being widely reported because knowledge of these things gives the Illuminati the ability to carry out mind-control.

UNDERSTANDING THE 1ST HUMAN BRAIN, also called the “Reptilian brain.” The human brain is in reality 7 brains that function together. Each brain is like an independent computer which connects to the others. Each has its own intelligence, its own subjectivity, its own sense of time and space, and its own memory and other functions. The first brain, the brain stem is that part of our brain that matches what a reptile brain. The reptilian brain deals with breathing and the heart beat. Reptiles are able to greet one another, forage for food, establish territory, gather food, and work in social groups. Reptiles also have awe for authority, and understand social peeking orders, because that is associated with that level of thinking. The human first brain, or shall we say “our reptilian brain” has the same abilities that the reptilian brain has. A great deal of the reptilian brains actions are preset and work very mechanically. (By the way, alligators, snakes and other reptiles can be hypnotized.) There are certain periods of time as a person develops that the reptilian brains primitive thinking (call it software) can be changed. These critical windows of vulnerability are called “the times of imprint vulnerability.” The brains ability to allow imprinting is a survival mechanism that allows the brain to establish the limits to which all future learning and conditioning will occur. The reptilian brain is concerned with survival. It is concerned with body survival and body security. It is imprinted by the mother figure. (This explains why the core is worked with by the victims personal cult mother, who is chosen for her role by the Illuminati because she is gentle and motherly.) The human first brain (reptilian brain) retreats from anything predatory, a threat to its life. The automatic nervous system is part of this first brain. The basic thinking of the first brain is “what is safe, what is not safe?” The primitive brain receives judgement calls from the higher brains as to what is not safe and what is safe. Money issues can be a survival issue for the mind. Although reptiles do not use money, they deal with other complex survival issues. The other parts of the brain will contribute messages that trigger the first brain to considered its survival threatened. If a person has not developed his other higher brains, he may simply be concerned with survival and money. Disapproval by the mother figure is threatening to the first brain, because it suggests death by

Page 515 …

the loss of food supply and nurturing. The core of a programmed multiple is not allowed to develop beyond a reptilian brain focus, which is a fear-based survival mode. The reptilian brain has the ability to shut down the other brains if it senses danger. This is an important factor for the mind-control. Most reptilian brain activity is unconscious or perhaps a gut level feeling. Emotions are also stored in the second brain, and in various ways in all the other brains too. Time, as our higher consciousness knows it, is absent from the reptilian brain, it operates on the cellular-environment circadian rhythm. Thoughts (events in the mind) of tremendous importance can take place in the mind and our conscious mind will not even be aware of it. We may have high blood pressure and be totally unaware of it. Heart rates and blood pressure have been consistently controllable via bio-feedback teachings. Just like the instructions that move your various arm muscles to catch a ball are unknown to the conscious mind, they are known by the reptilian mind and can be altered, although we dont know exactly how the mental instructions are rewritten in the mind. Information from our organs is fed into our reptilian brain so that survival of the body can be regulated. For instance, we will sweat when its hot. We will want to breathe when carbon dioxide builds up in our lungs, such as when we hold our breath. Our higher brain can send competing messages to the reptilian brain–keep holding the breath, we are under water. The battle may be won by the reptilian brain when the person goes unconscious and the person goes ahead and breathes, which is fatal when underwater. The reptilian brain is capable of paranoia. Lets say that we convince someones mind that some group of people, a particular minority, pose a threat to the survival of that persons nation. The widespread uneasiness will cause the reptilian brain to feel comfortable in exterminating that minority. Only a higher level of brain could check the “animal instincts” of survival. The limbic system is connected to the reptilian brain. Smell memories are connected to the limbic system. In other words, our system of smell is closer in touch to the reptilian brain. An example from everyday life will illustrate how the different brains work separately. If you are in turmoil, your body may show it, while your higher brains control your speech and talk so that everything appears O.K. Your body language which is controlled by your reptilian brain reflects its fear-survival based thinking, while your words and your consciously controlled gestures controlled by the higher brains are in line with what those brains are wanting to communicate. If the human mind was one monolithic brain it could coordinate the body totally with what was being said.

MANIPULATION OF THE REPTILIAN BRAIN

Before the higher brains develop their abilities, and while the Illuminati can imprint the reptilian brain, they begin with their trauma programming with pre-verbal children. The traumas that the Illuminati apply to the victim are not discomforts, they are life threatening traumas. The reptilian brain is imprinted with the idea of who its mother figure is, it is imprinted with the idea that adherence to “the mother programmer” means survival. The reptilian brain is connected to the heart. When the Illuminati traumatize the child, and the heart stops beating, the reptilian brain is being programmed. During the initial splitting of the core, there is a period of time when the Illuminati programmers stop the heart, and the persons spirit (their life force begins to leave the body.) The programmers know exactly how long (how many millisec.) they can allow a person to remain between life and death before they shock them with paddles to bring them back to life. Thousands of splits in the mind occur during this time between life and death. These splits are found and put in a very secret grid of butterflies. Our Illustrated Guidebook

Page 516 …

shows a picture of butterflies. We have seen these swarms in our dreams, and we know that they are put in because we helped with the programming of victims. The first human brain (reptilian) is connected to life and death. It is connected with the spirit (life energy) of a person. This part of the mind has an awareness of itself, but its awareness is totally on a survival level. The programmers have linked in the victims mind the survival of the person to its loyalty to its mother figure, and to its obedience that the core should never be touched, and to its obedience that the computers should not be touched. The core is a dissociated part of the mind buried deep into the reptilian brain level. If one tries to get to this level by going through the higher brains, the higher brains will trigger the survival instinct of the reptilian brain, which will react with what it has been trained to do. The reptilian brain is not logical, it is quite mechanical, and it will respond in its mechanical fashion. Survival of the victim demanded that the victim build, maintain and protect certain structures in the mind. The reptilian brain is totally convinced that these structures are needed for survival. During childhood, these structures were absolutely necessary for the survival of the person. The reptilian brain can not see it any different, because that is the way it is imprinted. Can the reptilian brain be reached? Yes. Solomon Steiner & W. Dince found & documented that with 8 to 25 hours of biofeedback training a person can reliably control their heartbeat. (Steiner & Dince. “Biofeedback efficacy studies”, Biofeedback & Self Regulation, 1981, 6:pp. 275-88). Anything less than this gave unreliable results. That means that the programmers could train the reptilian brain in 8 hours or more to control its heartbeat. D. Shapiro & R. Surwit found & documented that operant conditioning (behavior modification) could be used to maintain biofeedback behaviors rather permanently. (Leitenberg, H. ed., art. “Learned control of physiological function & disease” by Shapiro &

Surwit in Handbook for Behavior Modification & Behavior Therapy. Prentice-Hall, 1976.) By using biofeedback with dissociated alters who have received behavior modification the Illuminati have heart programming within the reptilian mind that is boxed up, virtually permanent, powerful and untouchable. The very heartbeat of the person is totally controlled by programming. For the butterflies to abreact their trauma memory stored in the reptilian mind (as well as for the other dissociated parts from that same splitting period) would spell death to older recovering victims of mind-control whose hearts could not survive going through the near-death experience again, even if medical personnel were present. The life of the individual is virtually wrapped up with their programming. The reptilian mind will protect the programming and its survival. It can not be reasoned with. While the reptilian brain has lots of instincts and some openings for imprinting, the other brains are more flexible in their growth. The higher brains take time to develop, because they learn. Genetics determine all seven brains. But the genetics of the higher brains are not like blue prints–but are more like computer programs that interact with the environment during the persons lifetime. These genes do not provide a fixed character, but the range of mental modifiability and how the mind will modify itself (its responses) to certain items in the persons life. In the case of an Illuminati programmed multiple, the victims core is locked up within the reptilian brain tightly and does not fashion strong links to the higher brains. Sometimes it appears that the Illuminati cross that fine line in programming and impose too much trauma on the child and the reptilian brain locks itself tight and quits communication with the higher brains. This may account for some programming failures becoming autistic children. They were traumatized so much that

Page 517 …

the higher brains are not used by the victim. When the child is getting ready to have its core split, it is still in the self-center “I” stage. This is the I-am-hungry–I-need-my-diaper-changed type mode. The programmers at times in conversations among themselves have noticed some similarities between the fear-based survival-based 1st mind and the mind of the demons, including Satan. Experiments have shown that some animals, if they are imprinted to a particular mother figure, are far more tolerant of pain from that source, without it bothering them. The perception of pain and fear are relative to how the mind has been imprinted. How much of a role this plays within humans is hard to determine. There is a strong drive in little children to attach themselves to parent figures. Even though the programmers may not have all the research data to specifically sort out the complexities of how the mind develops, many years of success has given them the empirical feedback to know that their methods work.

OUR IDENTITY

What is our identity? There is some life force within each of us that is unique. Different religions have different names for it. As time goes on, this life force expresses itself in its uniqueness through our thoughts, our emotions and our physical expressions. As everyone knows, our bodies and minds have many unique features to them besides just our fingerprints. It is well known that we also have sub-personalities and different “selves”. We have a deeper self, a spirit-self, that will go before God Almighty. The hindus call this atman, the eternal self, the eternal spirit. That deeper self, that life-spirit is connected to this body, but should this body die, it will leave. That deeper self in a programmed multiple still expresses itself–alter systems vary from one person to the next, but the programming is an overlay that hides and distorts the expression of that deeper self. The reptilian brain, which is in charge of keeping the body alive, will not allow the computers and the core to be touched. No therapist, as far as we know, has ever touched a real core. The programmers have placed core splits that pose as cores to insure that therapists and ministers have someplace to stop in their search for the core. Remember the core splits have the same characteristics of the core, but only the core is able to shut down all of the computers with her mind. Unfortunately, the core also believes the computers are necessary for her survival. She has been made fearful of the world without her computers. The core has the ability to shut all the computers down, which will automatically shut all the programming off. But remember, the core is located in the base of the mind–the reptilian mind. The core is very young when she or he is split. The core has been offered the opportunity to love God at this age, but does not understand the fine points of what is proper and improper. I mention this, because the Illuminati teach the core to view herself as the glory of God. The imagery of the computers to make the computers starts out with “Gods throne”. The core is told she is like God and that from her/his throne she/he can set up a universe like God did. And after that universe is created, and the core is very dissociative, then the core will be told that it will be Gods glory. Gods glory permeates His whole creation and sustains it. So the core sees itself as Gods glory. A theological student may see the blasphemous nature of this, but the fine points of theology are lost on a little 18 month old child. The child core then is told he/she can manifest itself like a person, just like God manifested himself as the man Jesus. The core is part of that mind that functions with survival reptilian-type thoughts. [Lets say the core is female so we can use a single pronoun.] She wants no knowledge because to survive means to give away awareness of what is happening. She is not consciously aware of the computers, but her energy does flow out like Gods glory and sustains her system. After the core gets out of

Page 518 …

the “I” stage, the programmers will teach it more of what they want it to be. The throne is made into a tomb where the core is put to sleep, like sleeping beauty. One of the things, that takes place as a person develops, is that the brain is imprinted in how much priority it will give the different brains. Most people never develop beyond a second brain priority. The core & her first splits never develop beyond a first brain priority. The true core and her splits are always in a survival mode. That is why they hide so well. If a person ever got the true core, the first job would be to insure that the survival instincts were not triggered and that the core developed a deep sense of trust. But the core can not be reached by going through all the dissociated states (pieces of the mind–alters) which are all linked to numerous fears and programs. There are thousands of fragments of the mind in all the various parts of the mind. No one can control all of these dissociated parts of the mind at once, not even the programmer–although the master programmer can come far closer than the rest of us. Only the one person that the core (which is in the reptilian brain) has been allowed to trust can pull up the core. Some of those alters are going to have a fear response to anything the therapist does, and this fear will trigger the reptilian brains splits into their protective behaviors. Any fear, even a subconscious fear, will prevent the core from presenting. It is clear that the only effective way to get to the core and the initial core splits is to use a medical team and deep hypnosis. This would bypass all the garbage that would trigger survival reflexes that are programmed into the reptilian brain. However, once the core and her splits were reached, tampering with anything could still trigger the programmed survival reflexes of the reptilian brain. When the core is initially split, the programmers take some of the early splits and make gems, some get made into the Grand Druid Council and others into the thousands of butterflies that are placed on the butterfly grid. All this is extremely secret. Front Grand Druid Councils are sometimes placed on every level. Also each major computer will have its own real Grand Druid Council. The butterflies go around and create the power grid that is structured like a grid and tied in to the entire structure. The butterflies give life energy to the system via the core in the reptilian brain. The programmers have taken the life-force that would normally run free like a river, dammed it up, and are harnessing it like a hydro-electric dam to run the system.

HOW THE WORLDS ARE BUILT & THE COMPUTERS REBUILD WORLDS & COMPUTERS

Various quadrants, worlds, galaxies, and sub-systems are constructed within the mind of the victim. The victim may even speak of their internal 7 wonders of the ancient world (which may possibly be the programmers method of referring to the seven brains). The various worlds have strong walls built between them. Going through those walls triggers internal earthquakes and other programming to go off. Generally, alters do not have the mental strength to even want to attempt such a feat. The worlds have been created to please the programmers. They are built upon the early traumas. The programming is layered in. This is why disturbing the early traumas by doing memory work seriously disturbs the programming. However, there is no way to destroy a world permanently without destroying the computers and/or the demons that can rebuild it. However, the computers themselves will regenerate unless they are all taken out in sequence and in about the same time period. But the computers can regenerate if the core and core splits are not worked with, because they created the computers and they can create them again.

Page 519 …

HOW THE DEMONS PROTECT THE SYSTEM, & HOW THEY IN TURN ARE PROTECTED

Whether one wants to admit that demons exist, or whether one wants to maintain that they are only mental hallucinations, either way, the fact remains that the victims mind is terrified of these demons, and there is no way the therapist is going to get the reptilian mind to relax when it perceives a life threat from these demons. The therapist is going to have to calm the mind that these demons which guard various structures are taken care of. We are not talking about trickery–we are talking about dealing with demons by the spiritual laws that govern demons. Trickery will simply not work. Demonology is a spiritual issue–but it also becomes a mental and a programming issue because the reptilian mind will protect itself and will perceive tampering with the programming which causes the demons to get upset to be a serious threat to the life of the system. The demons have the ability to tear the victims mind apart. That is a threat that must be dealt with if serious work is going to be done. The principal core decoy is a core split in the carousel. This core decoy has a false trinity attached to it which we described in the Vol. 2 book. However, a more powerful evil trinity is linked to the gems and the Grand Druid Council. This is the evil trinity of Beelzebub, Lucifer and Hydra, which were mentioned previously in this book. Attempts to pull the big daddy demons to the front of the mind and cast them out have gone in the right direction, but were woefully inadequate, because they stopped too quick. For instance, our system went through four powerful deliverances at different points. One allowed the front system to work. One allowed the middle layers to work. One saved the systems life from self-destruction. One seriously destroyed all the front programming, and the front demons. Where we failed is that after these successes there were no strategic plans to take further initiative to exploit these victories. Some reasons that most deliverance ministries stop way too quick is:

a. they want instant miracles instead of commitment and hard work
b. the demons are very intelligent and sly and they will do everything they can to make themselves appear defeated. The demons will hide, they will substitute one smaller demon for a bigger demon during deliverance, and they will let everyone think they have been defeated. One of their winning strategies is to duck down low, and allow the enemy to pass by them, so-to-speak.

WHAT PEOPLE IN THE PAST HAVE DONE, AND WHY THEY HAVE NOT SEEN THEIR FAILURES.

When we write about the worlds and programming being taken out, we write based on experience of what we have done and what we have observed others do, and what their results were, as well as relating all that we know about how the systems are built. We have watched the results of many different approaches. Just because a particular line of attack will not bring ultimate success does not mean that a therapist may not want to attempt it. Sometimes alters need to see some progress, however small, so that they can see that there is hope. Second, there is the synergic effect of chipping away from many different angles that wears down the programming where it is not as powerful. The overall wearing down may facilitate other treatment strategies to work. Here are some of the approaches and their results:

The standard methods of psychology applied for years to getting past the mirrors with no results; then encircling and applying the blood of Jesus Christ to the mirrors with the results that the mirrors were destroyed, their demon protectors were controlled, and this allowed the victim to move into new parts of the system and do memory work. What had unsuccessfully taken years, took only a few minutes.

This was a step in the right direction, however this step was never used in a comprehensive enough strategy to totally dismantle the system.

Page 520 …

Going vertically deep into the system and doing those things to get the Dameon (satan) alter up, and then working with Dameon. With work and prayer Dameon is convinced to switch sides. Using Dameon to help dismantle the system. Dameon is a protector. He has lots of knowledge of the layers, but he has no power. The core and her core splits have lots of power and they can regenerate the system when they feel they need to. Anything permanent and comprehensive is going to have to control the regenerative power of the mind. Another problem with working deep in a system is that the mirror images and demonic constructs swarm in and most times therapists end up working with the mirror images and demons.

In the Vol. 2 book we gave the actual universal codes. There are some standard features that are put into most systems. Suicide programs and other programs receive master erasure codes. A computer will have many programs that can be erased at once. A slower approach is to get into the computer and dismantling program after program. Or getting to a computer and shutting it off according to the programming codes. These methods did work (temporarily) even though they can be very time intensive. The problem is that within two weeks the computers and their programs will regenerate. The time period may actually be the standard 72 hours, but the alters moving toward health will often not realize when the internal computers get back on line. Another problem encountered was that often a cover computer activated, and new alters that appeared to help the victim integrate were in reality well-disguised demons, that the victim initially integrated but then realized were demons. In other words, more times than not, the victim and therapist will not even get the actual computer but only a front. When such a front computer goes down, an LSD state will be activated that makes colors seem more real tothe alters. The programming will put on a good show to the therapist that they have succeeded, but the cover program that success has been achieved is actually “over dramatized” to the victims alters, which have to be fooled also. The bottom line is that we have to get to the bottom and work from the inside out. There are too many programming defenses in depth. We need strategic plans to overcome the concentric rings of programming defenses.

Working with the internal Grand Druid Council. This is a good strategic idea. However, up to now there hasnt been the skill and the knowledge and the teamwork to really implement this strategy in the way it should be. The Grand Druid Council is part of the power base. The problem with this is that there are several GDCs in a system and the therapist/deliverance ministry must work with big daddy demons to be successful.

Finding the internal programmers and working with them is an extremely difficult proposition when one realizes how they were created and function. Even if a therapist managed to work with them, they are not in a position to dismantle what the core wants.

During the early rituals a simple 3 to 5 letter word will be given to a 4 year old child which is known as the T Code. This is the anchor for the programming, because the programming must be anchored in the subconscious somewhere. The T Code is also called the toddler switch. In systems that have few alters each alter may have a T Code. In Illuminati systems created with lots of worlds and complex alter systems, the T Code is part of the primal programming trauma. There is a small period of time (a few minutes) where that T memory or word occurs upon which the entire programming structure is based.

Flipping that T Code or T Memory is like collapsing the entire computer programming, but getting to alters (like core splits) who are very deep & who can help with

Page 521 …

this is going to take work. Again the problem surfaces, how does one let the mind know that it is safe and does not need to self-destruct to protect the programming? The best solution would be to somehow get the core involved. It is possible to remove the programming by flipping the Toddler Code, but it should be done by someone who understands the bigger picture of what is going on with the victim and the programming.

HOW THE GRAND DRUID COUNCIL IS LINKED TO THE CORE (A BACKDOOR)

Perhaps the best back door to the core is the Grand Druid Council. In order to work with the GDC one will have to be prepared to bind the 3-generation curse, that is Adam, Cain, Tubal-cain etc. that can be found by looking up this books comments on Ex. 20. The support team will have to go through the steps of Freemasonry too in their work with the Grand Druid Council. Bear in mind that the evil trinity will need to be commanded to return to God to receive directions from Him. These big daddy demons only come out with authority. They also need to be told to take their Luciferian form, rather than all the deceptive forms they take. The deliverance minister and the victim need to emphasize to the demons the spiritual heritage of the victim based on their New Birth in Christ. Lucifer will try guarding the backdoor between the Grand Druid Council and the Core. He will have to be taken care of. The Grand Druid Council is really just pieces of the mind that were split around 18 months. They have been heavily demonized, so that the demons do much of the running of the GDC. The GDC splits were created from a pre-verbal stage up to the age of 3. They form a power base in the system. They are linked to the gems and the ribbons. They are discussed in our other books. The demons knows the authority of the Bible and Jesus Christ. It is helpful to quote the exact location from the Word of God. It is also important to be honest concerning ones walk with the Lord. Command them to the front of the mind and put the blood of Jesus Christ around them. The demons should be commanded to be honest, not use profanity, and to not harm the body. They are under standing orders to destroy the “temple” (the mind) IF they cant deliver the person to the AntiChrist when he begins his reign.

GETTING MEANINGFUL ASSISTANCE FROM A SYSTEM

Therapists have been working with and trusting the front systems to help them. They are working with fragments and confused alters and they are getting a lot of misinformation. They need to get to alters who know the power, spiritual, & programming structures of their system. Fritz has published diagrams of the hierarchy, for instance, the book that accompanied his video of his lectures on a speaking circuit in major cities has a hierarchy diagram. We have inserted it in this book too. Alters that function at hierarchy levels would be useful to therapists. The front alters and the gatekeepers are not in a position to be really helpful. The strongest Christian alter can help with spiritual things, but if the therapist could get a hierarchy alter involved with wanting the mechanisms of control dismantled, better progress could be made. Within female hierarchy slaves, the Mothers-of-darkness levels & above know programming and some about their own system. Within the male hierarchy, the Grand Master levels and above (Asmodeus, Ippsisimus, etc.) may know programming, and likely know their own system. The reason the Grand Masters may or may not know is that in contrast to the secrecy of the Mothers & Grande Dame alters, the male hierarchy alters function in the outside world. The very same alter that carries out rituals in secret may be a cult leader, or an occult leader, and may participate in many meetings in real life. If a Grand Master were to play both a Christian and an occult role, it

Page 522 …

means that the Christian front alters may not completely dominate holding the body in the real world. For these men their Christian alters might even get less than 50% of the body time, and the hierarchy alter gets much of the rest. In denominations such as the Lutheran, Catholic, or Episcopal where religious functions are very ritualistic this works fine. However, in churches which call for a spiritual walk, the Christian alters have to be given a chance to be strong.

SUMMARY & FINAL COMMENTS

We have provided the reader with some remarkable secrets about the foundations of the internal worlds. These specifics are meant to be more as a type of shorthand to enable competent experienced therapists to grasp what they are dealing with. By knowing the basic patterns, inferences can be made in working with a system. However, it is disturbing to think that any therapist would view his or her client as a guinea pig or an interesting new toy. The client has been the victim of enough experiments. In the light of what we know, and hopefully what the reader has learned, deprogramming needs to be handled by teams of people. The programming has physically changed the victims brain. Has the reader ever been in a depression that they cant break out of, no matter what the efforts? Hopefully not, but some people do. It is possible for the brain to be trapped in a physical change, a neurochemical change in the brain that is hard to dislodge. The internal worlds can appear to be collapsed, the computers can pretend or actually be taken down– and yet, the creative force in the mind that constructed them for survival will rebuild them. Long term benefits of destroying worlds will be best achieved when methods are carried out that encourage the core and the core splits to collapse the entire thing. That is why the core is hidden so well, the Illuminati do not want their internal worlds tampered with.

We have written 3 books to provide a rough sketch of a very complex subject. We trust that this book has given the reader deeper insights into the depths of total mind-control that contemporary mankind has plunged into. The subject is a deep one, which can be compared to Mammoth Cave, for what one sees on the surface is small compared to the depths and breadths of a vast underground. Although our books have explored and shined light deeper than previous explorations, who knows how deep the subject goes? Gods Word says, “Where sin increased, grace abounded all the more.” When the world was void and empty God put His light upon it, with only a spoken word, & new life broke forth. He can still do this. He is the same God, yesterday, today & forever. Mankind is resourceful. He can do amazing feats. Mankind has been faced with difficult situations in the past and has been competitent. If mankind can do these things without God, what could we do with God? If God be for us, who can be against us? Never, never, never give up hope.

Page 385 ….

BIBLIOGRAPHY & SOURCES

The co-authors brings lots of experience and study with this subject into the creation of this book. The sources that have contributed to their knowledge would take a book as long as this to list every source that has gotten them to their understanding of the subject.

PRIMARY SOURCES ON PRIMARY SUBJECT– TRAUMA-BASED TOTAL MIND-CONTROL

1. Numerous professional papers.
2. Personal accounts about slaves (published).
3. Unpublished paperwork, tapes, interviews of slaves.
4. Therapists
5. Books on Mind-control.
6. Books on associated topics, such as PTSD, the Mind, hypnosis, drugs, witchcraft, and the various aspects of control.

1. NUMEROUS PROFESSIONAL PAPERS. Carole Goettman, George B. Greaves and Philip M. Croons put out a reference book Multiple Personality & Dissociation 1791-1992 A Complete Bibliography, 2nd edition. (Lutherville, MD: The Sidran Press, 1994). Co-author Fritz has gone through the Bibliography which lists in 150 pages essentially all the articles ever published on MPD and Dissociation, and he has read all that he could obtain via the large research libraries. Dozens of the articles, and many of the books which appear in this complete bibliography have been read. Most of the professional literature on the subject is trash. During the 1970s, Americans got interested in Multiple Personalities, after having lost interest in the subject as W.W. I got started. I believe the therapeutic community was probably nudged by the military/intelligence agencies to lose interest when W.W. I broke out, and that anyone who did get interested got scooped up into the government during W.W. II and the Cold War. Some of the helpful professional papers have been notated in the book itself. A perusal of the index will provide part of the sources for this book.

2. ALL THE PERSONAL ACCOUNT (AUTO BIOGRAPHICAL ACCOUNTS) THAT ARE AVAILABLE.

The list of auto-biographies (or biographies) of victims which were consulted include the following:

CHASE, TRUDY.
Chase. Trudy. When the Rabbit Howls. NY: Dutton, 1987.

DORSETT, SYBIL ISABEL.
Schreiber, Flora Rheta. Sybil. Chicago, IL: Henry Regnery Co., 1973.

FORD, SUE.
Taylor, Brice with Patrick Stone. (written as a novel). Starshine. Huntsville, AL: The Brice Taylor Foundation, 1995.

JONES, CANDY. (born Jessica Wilcox).

Bain, Donald. The Control of Candy Jones. Chicago: Playboy Press, 1976.

LYNN, LORETTA.

Vecsey, George with Loretta Lynn. Loretta Lynn A Coal Miners Daughter. Rockefeller Plaza, NY: Warner Books, 1976.

MONROE, MARILYN.

Pepitone, Lena. Marilyn Monroe Confidential An Intimate Personal Account. NY: Simon & Schuster, 1979.

OBRIEN, CATHY.

OBrien, Cathy with Mark Phillips. Trance Formation ofAmerica, The True Life Story of a CIA Slave. Nashville, TN: Global Trance Formation Info, Ltd., 1995. Also Cathy OBrien and Mark Phillips put out numerous monographs and a number of articles in the Contact magazine, which were also consulted in writing this book.

STRATFORD, LAUREN. Satan s Underground: The Extraodinary Story of One Woman s Escape., 1991.

WHEELER, CISCO.

Wheeler, Cisco with Fritz Springmeier. They Know What They Do, An Illustrated Guide to Monarch Programming-MindControl. Oregon City, OR: Springme ier & Wheeler, 1995.

OTHERS VICTIMS:

Casey, J.F. & Wilson, L. The Flock. Alfred A. Knopf, 1991.

LaCalle, TM. Voices. NY: Dodd, Mead, & Co., 1988.

Lancaster, E. & Polney, J. The Final Face of Eve. NY: McGraw-Hill, 1958.

Schoenewolf, G. Jennifer and her selves. NY: Donald I. Fine, 1991.

Sizemore, C. & Pittillo, E. Im Eve. Garden City, NY: Doubleday & Co., 1977.

Page 386 ….

Smith, Michelle & Lawrence Padzer. Michelle Remembers: A Story of Satanic Possession.

Thigpen, C.H. & Cleckley, H. The three faces of Eve. NY: McGraw-Hill, 1957.

3. UNPUBLISHED PAPERS, TAPES, & INTERVIEWS WITH VICTIMS.

These sources will have to remain confidential. Over a dozen Illuminati slaves provided notes from what they have found out about their lives and mind-control systems. The co-authors have interviewed and personally known dozens more, who have been visited with. Notes were kept on some of these interviews. Fritz taped some of his interviews, and in more than one case got a computer disk of the persons life story with colloborating evidence.

4. THERAPISTS.

Fritz is appreciative to the following therapists for the help he received:

Dale Calvocade, Ukiah, CA, who helped me understand the religious covers better.

Dr. Carol Clifton, Portland, OR, who helped me understand the value of patience, kindness and listening in helping victims help themselves.

Dr. Loreda Fox, Denver, CO, who helped give a better understanding of the spiritual dimensions.

Catherine Gould, TX, who helped me understand the role of alters within programs.

Denny Hilgers, Pasadena, TX, who helped me understand the deeper codes, and the deeper systems better, and t h e importance of a persons identity.

David W. Neswald, Irvine, CA, who helped me understand the primal traumas better.

Randy Noblitt, Dallas, TX, who helped give a better understanding of overall picture, and how some of the codes are constructed.

Mark Phillips, Nashville, TN, who opened up a deeper understanding of how the Network operates, and provided some direction for how we should approach dealing with mind control.

Doug Riggs, Tulsa, OK, who helped give a better understanding of the religious fronts, and who helped tremendously understand how this trauma-based mind-control fits in with the Word of God.

5. BOOKS (& LONG PAPERS) ON MIND-CONTROL

Bowart, Walter H. Operation Mind-Control, original edition and the totally revised Researchers edition of 1994, which carried the same title.

Chavkin, Samuel. The Mind Stealers, Psychosurgery and Mind Control. Westport, Conn: Lawrence Hill & Co., 1978.

Estabrooks, G.H. Hypnotism. NY: EP. Dutton, 1957.

Lockwood, Craig. Other Altars, Roots and Realities of Cultic and Satanic Ritual Abuse & Multiple Personality Disorder. Minneapolis, MN: CompCare Publishers, 1993.

Marks, John. The Search For The “Manchurian Candidate” The CIA & Mind Control. NY: W.W. Norton & Co. (paperback version), 1991.

Mediaecco. When The State Rapes, Part I & 2. Gorredijk, Netherlands,

Thomas, Gordon. Journey into Madness. NY: Bantam Books, 1989.

White, John. Psychic Warfare, Fact or Fiction? (An investigation into the use of the mind as a military weapon.) Wellingborough, Northamptonshire, UK: The Aquarian Press, 1990(?).

De Laurence, editor. The Lesser Key of Solomon Goetia, The Book of Evil Spirits. Chicago, 1916.

6. BOOKS ON ASSOCIATED TOPICS.

Both authors have read many books on tangent subjects. The list of books that have been read and researched prior to writing this would take another book to record. The co-author Fritz found himself consulting his own books, Be Wise As Serpents (1991), The Top 13 Illuminati Bloodlines Vol. 1 (1995), and Exodus 20:4-5 (1978). The co-authors purchased and read the 14 Oz books. They also have a number of the other books used for scripts such as, Mother Goose Rhymes, The Tall Book of Make Believe, -Michael Aquinos version of Star Wars, etc., Snow White & the 7 Dwarfs, The Island of the Blue Dolphins, Through the Looking Glass, etc. Fritz purchased his own copy of The Graphic Work of M. C. Esher. NY: Ballantine Books, 3rd edition, 1972. in order to have on hand the artwork which contains so many mirror images and inversions and is so often used for programming.

As I, Fritz, sit down to provide the sources for the reader, it is apparent that the task is beyond my time restraints. Knowledge accumulates. A random sample of just two of almost countless references looked at to come to the authors level of understanding would be Jean L. Suttons workshop book Ritualistic Abuse of Children Identification and Case Management Strategies which was used in workshops for teachers and child services division people on Fri. Sept. 11, 1992 at 815 N.E. Davis St., Portland, OR. Another example is The New Yorkers, May 24, 1993, article “Remembering Satan–Part II”. Neither one was referred to in writing the book, but these two and

Page 387 ….

countless others over the years form the accumulation of understanding that is needed to tackle writing a book on Multiple Personality Disorder (Dissociative Identity Disorder).

To be able to write this book, Fritz, the co-author has studied material, books, newspapers clippings, articles, etc. from the following ASSOCIATED TOPICS with a close estimate of the number of items studied in each area: Aliens & UFOs (40 items), Amish-Mennonite (30 items), Astronomy & astrology (25 items), Behavior Modification (12 items), Black religions in the New World and Africa (6 items), Brain (30 items), Caballa (10 items at least), Computers (25 items), Computer languages (8 items), Crime (25 items), Demonology (30 -items), Druidism (20 items), ELF waves (20 items), Fairy Tales (7 items), False Memory Syndrome (5 items), Freemasonry (35 items), Holograms (6 items), Hypnosis (12 items), Intelligence (20 items), Jesuits (6 items), Ku Klux Klan (15 items), Medical technology (15 items), Memory (20 items), Mental Hospitals (5 items), Military (10 items), Mind (25 items), Movies (20 items), NeuroLinguistic Programming (6 items), New World Order (50 items), Particular Individuals such as the Rothschilds, Rockefellers, Collins, Mengele, Cameron, Wheeler, LaVey, Aquino, Elvis Presley, Doris Duke, and many others mentioned in the book (50 items at least), Personality (25 items), Satanic Ritual Abuse (50 items), Spiritual warfare (40 items), Spying (25 items), Underwater research (40 items), Voodoo (3 items), Witchcraft (50 items). Some of the books that would have been cited if every detail had been footnoted can be found footnoted in other writings by Fritz Springmeier. Also I, Fritz, have spent time examining the Word of God to try to understand what Gods written word revealed by His Spirit would teach me about this situation. There are numerous Bible verses that pertain to the information in this book which are not referred to in this volume. The primary issues created by the traumas are a. identity issues, and b. issues concerning fellowship with God. Much of the trauma and programming is cloud the issue of who the person really is, and how they can have a beneficial relationship to God Almighty. The Bill Gothard Basic Youth Seminar which the co-author Fritz has attended 6 times, has been very helpful to him to understand what the programmers do, and how they strip a person of what they need to be spiritually strong. In fact, Fritz knows a number of the programmers have attended the Bill Gothard Seminar themselves, and know how to use beneficial information for evil purposes. Likewise, the Christian can take the occult knowledge of revealed in this book and use it for good instead of the evil that it was designed for. The Institute has a hard volume reference book on Research in Principles of Lfe as well as a workbook. Cisco, the other co-author, has studied MPD, SRA, Bible issues, and occult topics indepth. Her personal knowledge added a depth to the book that could not have been achieved without her. William Frost of San Antonio, TX was a good friend of a tall lean Texan named David Hill. David Hill had been taken in by Mafia boss Joseph Bonanno, who was as a surrogate father to him. After David Hill became a Christian, he used his first hand knowledge of the Mafia, the occult world such as his Masonic experience to put the pieces together about the NWO. He had just completed a very detailed manuscript for a book exposing the NWO, when he was murdered. After Davids murder, William Frost was able to retrieve Davids manuscript and sent me a copy. The death was not ruled a murder by the authorities, but men who have written lengthy exposes on the New World Order do not commit suicide before they get their books published. It was keen-minded David Hill who warned Billy Graham for many hours about the New World Order, only to be told by Billy Graham, that Billy was a captive (Grahams own words) of the New World Order. The information William Frost gave me about David Hill, was later verified in many ways by Joseph Bonannos surprising autobiography A Man of Honor, Simon & Schuster, Rockefeller Center, N.Y., 1983. Its somewhat unusual for Mafia chiefs to write autobiographies. In it, Joseph Bonanno says he looked up to Billy Graham, and that David Hill joined up with Billy Graham. In 1974, Billy Graham came to Joseph Bonannos house in Tuscon with David. Graham sent him a Christmas card every year, and called him soon after his wife died to offer condolences. These things are mentioned on page 333 of his autobiography. David Hills manuscript was encouraging to me, Fritz, because he verified many of the same things that Id found. His manuscript was quoted in Vol. 1 concerning the top families.

Information about the names of programmers and programming sites and the Temple of Set membership has come from recovering victims of Trauma-based mind-control. Information about Illuminati bloodlines, ritual sites, and important buildings has also come from Illuminati members who are recovering from Illuminati mind-control. Many more witnesses to Illuminati Mind-control will come forward if people learn how to help these people, and to believe the things that have happened to them. Now that this legitimate information is being circulated, it can be expected that “witnesses” with bogus information/bogus memories will come forward to detract from the credibility of this book.

next page Information on Illustrations.

Page 388 ….

ILLUSTRATIONS

Chapter 2 title page–Reproduction of the cover of the program of the Bohemian Grove Cremation of Care Ritual. p. 45–Torture device, drawn by a recovering Monarch slave used by permission of Denny Hilgers, Pasadena, TX p. 46–Ritual stick, drawn by a recovering victim of SRA, used by permission of David Carrico, Evansville, Indiana. Heart in a Jar, drawn by another recovering victim of SRA, used by permission of David Carrico, Evansville, Indiana. Chapter 4 title page–Hypnotic illusion drawings, adapted from uncopyrighted material.

p. 66–Spinning top, common illusion, adapted from uncopyrighted material.
p. 88–Section Chart of “A” alters, created by Fritz Springmeier
p. 91–Structure Chart, of color codes, alter runways, system structure, created by Fritz Springmeier based on information from a recovering Monarch mind-control victim.
p. 134–Cover Decision magazine.
p. 168, 175-178–U.S. Patent4,858,612, public information, U.S. Patent Office.

Chapter 7 title page–Chart was drawn by Fritz Springmeier, it is based on an actual Illuminati Mind Controlled Slaves systems structure. The chart has modifications from the actual systems structure, but closely resembles it.
p. 195–Chart drawn by Fritz Springmeier and Cisco Wheeler of internal hour glass, x-y-z axes.
p. 196–Worlds, domino program arrangement, solemetric–drawn by Fritz Springmeier
p. 210-2 1 1– “Common Structures” Illustration showing various internal systems and their relationships to each other, done by Fritz Springmeier based upon various reports of recovering slaves whose systems match each other.
p. 237-239, 241, 243–Designs. United Nations identity Franz Joseph. Star Fleet Technical Manual TM:3 79260. Ballantine Books: NY, Nov. 1975 (also on title page it states 1st edition STARDATE 7511.01.) The title page to this manual at first appearance seems to indicate that it was really printed by the United Federation & the United Nations, with a stardate year given. The actual dates, and actual publisher are almost camouflaged on the title page. p. 240, 242– Star Trek, the Next Generation Technical Manual. Given to Fritz by a recovering Assistant Programmer.
p. 244-246– Warren magazine.
p. 248–Intergalactic symbols, drawn by Fritz Springmeier, based on what slaves see in their heads.
p. 252–Histamine molecule, graphics by Fritz Springmeier. Chapter 10 title page–Top picture drawn by eyewitness Kim Stevens of Satanic Ritual. Bottom picture was redrawn from the original drawing done by a member of the Ordo

Saturnus in ritual, a German branch of the Illuminati. p. 315-317–First Earth Battalions Training Manual, US Army written by LTC Jim Channon.

Chapter 11 title page–drawing of computer generated by computer graphics and done by Fritz Springmeier p. 338–Portion of Sharis restaurant place mat with a maze and Wizard of Oz theme.

Chapter 12 title page–Bo Gritzs own campaign broshure during the the 1992 Presidential campaign which gives his biographical information.

p. 361–Newsweek cover with caption “Disneys Dilemma Can the Kingdom Keep Its Magic?”

Appendix B title page. Drawing by victim of mind control from eastern U.S. showing the skinning process of person. This skill is put to use for programming purposes. Appendix B. Photographs of Presideo by Fritz Springmeier, Photographs of Portland Mormon Temple by Fritz Springmeier, Photographs of the Mothers-of-Darkness castle Chateau des Amerois, Belgium by Fritz Springmeier.

ALL ITEMS BY FRITZ SPRINGMEIER, COPYRIGHT BY FRITZ SPRINGMEIER.

http://www.whale.to/b/sp/2deeper.html

One thought on “How help comes about for Mind Control Victims

Leave a Reply

Fill in your details below or click an icon to log in:

WordPress.com Logo

You are commenting using your WordPress.com account. Log Out / Change )

Twitter picture

You are commenting using your Twitter account. Log Out / Change )

Facebook photo

You are commenting using your Facebook account. Log Out / Change )

Google+ photo

You are commenting using your Google+ account. Log Out / Change )

Connecting to %s